GE Fanuc Automation

Computer Numerical Control Products

Series 15 – Model B
for Lathe

Descriptions Manual

GFZ-62072E/01 May 1994

 GFL-001
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
as Used in this Publication

Warning
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents,
temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or
may be associated with its use.
In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment, a
Warning notice is used.

Caution
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.

Note
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and
operating the equipment.

This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts
have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all
details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency in
connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein
which are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes
no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.

GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory

with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or
usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for
purpose shall apply.

©Copyright 1994 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

All Rights Reserved.
PREFACE

The models covered by this manual, and their abbreviations are :

Product name Abbreviation

FANUC Series 150TB I5-TB

FANUC Series 150TFB 15-TFB

Series 15-B
FANUC Series 15-TB 154-l-B

FANUC Series 150lrFB 150I-T-FB

I

The following manuals related to the FANUC Series &MODEL B.

This manual is marked with an asterisk ( * ).

* FANUC Series 15-TB/TFB/TTB/TTFB DESCRIPTIONS (B-62072E)

FANUC Series &MB DESCRIPTIONS (B-62082E)
FANUC Series 15-MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL (B-62073E)
FANUC Series 15-MODEL B BMI Interface CONNECTION MANUAL (B-62073E-1)
FANUC Series &MODEL B For Lathe OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-62074E)
FANUC Series &MODEL B For Machining Center OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-62084E)
FANUC Series &MODEL B APPENDIXES OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-62080E) .
FANUC Series 15-MODEL B MAINTENANCE MANUAL (B-62075E)
FAN-UC PMC-MODEL N/NA LADDER LANGUAGE PROGRAMMIN G MANUAL (B-61013E)
FANUC PMC-MODEL PAl/PA3/RA2/RA3/RB/RB2/RBYRC/RC3/NB LADDER LANGUAGE
PROGRAMMING MANUAL (B-61863E)
FANUC PMC-MODEL N/NA PASCAL LANGUAGE PROGRAMMING MANUAL (B-6 10 13E- 1)
FANUC PMC-MODEL NINA C LANGUAGE PROGRAMMING MANUAL (B-61013E-2)
FANUC PMC-MODEL RC/RC3/NB C LANGUAGE PROGRAhJMING MANUAL (B-61863E-1)
FANUC Series 15-MODEL B Supplement for Remote Buffer DESCRIPTIONS (B-62072Eil)
FANUC Series 15-MB Multi-Teaching Function CONNECTION MANUAL (B-62083E-1)
CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR LATHE
(Series 16, Series 15-MODEL B) OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-61804E-2)
CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR MACHINING CENTER
(Series 15-MF, Series 15-MFB) PROGRAMMING MANUAL (B-61263E)
CONVERSATTONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR MACHINING CENTER
(Series 15-MF, Series 15-MFB) OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-61264E)
 CONTENTS

I. GENERAL ......................................................................... 1

1. GENERAL ....................................................................... 3

2. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS ......................................*.............. 4

25
II. NC FUNCTIONS .........................................*.........................
1. 27
CONTROLLED AXES .............................................................
1.1 Basic Controlled Axes ...................................................27
1.2 Controllable Axes Expansion ............................................27
1.3 Basic Simultaneously Controllable Axes ............................... 27
1.4 Simultaneously Controllable Axes Expansion .......................... 27
1.5 27
Name of Axes ..............................................................
1.6 27
Increment System .........................................................
1.7 Maximum Command Value ...................................................28

2. PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS ........................................*............. 29

3 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS ...................................................34

31 34
Positioning (GOO) ........................................................
3’2 Linear Interpolation (GO11 .............................................34
3:3 Circular Interpolation (G02, GO31 ..................................... 35
3.4 Hypothetical Axis Interpolation (G07) ................................ 36
3.5 Cylindrical Interpolation (G07.1) ..................................... 38
3.6 Polar Coordinate Interpolation (G12.1, G13.1) ...................... 39
3.7 Involute Interpolation 41
..................................................
3.8 42
Spline Interpolation .....................................................

4. 44
THREAD CUTTING ..............................................................
4.1 Equal Lead Thread Cutting (G33) (With G Code System A: G32) ..... 44
4.2 Inch Thread Cutting (G33) (With G Code System A: G32) ............. 44
4.3 Variable Lead Thread Cutting (G34) .................................... 45
4.4 Circular Thread Cutting (G35, G36) .................................... 45
4.5 Continuous Thread Cutting ...............................................45
4.6 Thread Cutting Cycle Retract ...........................................46

5. 47
FEED FUNCTIONS ..............................................................
5.1 47
Rapid Traverse ............................................................
5.2 Cutting Feed Rate ........................................................47
5a2.1 Tangential speed constant control ................................ 47
5.2.2 Cutting feed rate clamp ............................................47
5.2.3 Per minute feed (G94) (With G code system A: G98) ............. 48
5.2.4 Per revolution feed (G95) (With G code system A: G99) ........ 48
5.3 49
Override ...................................................................
5.30-l Feed rate override .................................................. 49
5.3.2 Second feed rate override ..........................................49
5.3.3 Second feedrate override B .........................................49
5.3.4 Rapid traverse override ............................................49
5.3.5 Function for overriding the rapid traverse feedrate in 1%
49
units ..................................................................
5.3.6 Override cancel ......................................................50
5.4 Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration .................................. 50
5.5 Acceleration/Deceleration before Cutting Feed Interpolation ..... 50
5.6 Linear Acceleration/Deceleration after Cutting Feed
51
Interpolation .............................................................

c-1
5.7 Bell-shaped Acceleration/Deceleration after Cutting Feed
Interpolation 52
.............................................................
5.8 Bell-shaped Acceleration/Deceleration after Rapid Traverse
Interpolation 52
.............................................................
5.9 Acceleration/Deceleration Function for the Constant Speed
Specified by the PMC Axis Control Function .......................... 53
5.10 Exact Stop (GO91 ......................................................... 54
5.11 Exact Stop Mode (G61) ................................................... 54
5.12 Cutting/Rapid Traverse Position Check Function ..................... 54
5.13 Cutting Mode (G64) ....................................................... 54
5.14 Automatic Corner Override (G62) ....................................... 54
5.15 54
Dwell (G04) ................................................................

6. 55
REFERENCE POINT .............................................................
6.1 Manual Reference Point Return ..........................................55
6.2 Automatic Reference Point Return (G28, G29) ......................... 55
6.3 Reference Point Return check (G27) .................................... 56
6.4 2nd, 3rd and 4th Reference Point Return (G30) ...................... 56
6.5 Floating Reference Point Return (G30.1) .............................. 56
6.6 Digital Adjustment of Origin Deceleration Limit .................... 57
6.7 Dog-Less Reference Point Setting ...................................... 58

7. COORDINATE SYSTEMS ......................................................... 59

7.1 Machine Coordinate System (G53) ....................................... 59
7.2 Work Coordinate System (G54 to G59) .................................. 59
7.3 Local Coordinate System (G52) .......................................... 59
7.4 Work Coordinate System Change (G92)
(With G Code System A: G50) .........................................*.. 60
7.5 Work Origin Offset Value Change (Programmable Data Input)
61
(GIO) ...................*...................................................
7.6 Work Coordinate System Preset (G92.1)
(With G Code System A: G50.3) .......................................... 61

8. COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION ........................................... 62

8.1 Absolute and Incremental Programming (G90, G91) .................... 62
8.2 Inch/Metric Conversion (G20, G21) ..................................... 63
8.3 Decimal Point Input/Pocket Calculator Type Decimal Point Input .. 63
8.4 Diameter and Radius Programming ....................................... 63
8.5 Function for Switching between Diameters and Radius Programming . 63

9 l SPINDLE FUNCTIONS ........................................................... 64

9.1 S Code Output ............................................................. 64
9.2 Spindle Speed Binary Code Output (At only F56 Interface) ......... 64
9.3 Spindle Speed Analog Output ............................................64
9.4 Constant Surface Speed Control (G96, G97) ........................... 64
9.5 Spindle Speed Clamp (G92) ...............................................64
9.6 Actual Spindle Speed Output ............................................65
9.7 Spindle Positioning ...................................................... 65
9.8 Spindle Speed Fluctuation Detection (G25, G26) ..................... 65
9.9 Spindle Speed Output ..................................................... 67
9.10 Cs Contour control ....................................................... 68
9.11 Spindle Orientation (With Position Coder) ........................... 68
9.12 Spindle Output Switching ................................................68
9.13 Spindle Synchronization .................................................69
9.14 C-Axis control Switching (Only for 150TTB/TTFB) .................... 69

10. TOOL FUNCTIONS ..............................................................

70
10.1 T code Output .............................................................
70

c-2
 10.2 70
Tool Life Management .....................................................
10.3 Turret Axis Control ......................................................
71

11. MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS ...................................................

72
11.1 Miscellaneous Functions .................................................72
11.2 Second Auxiliary Functions .............................................72
11.3 High-speed M/S/T/B Interface ........................................... 72
11.4 l-block Plural M Command ................................................73

12. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION ......................................................75

75
12.1 Program Number ............................................................
75
12.2 Program Name ..............................................................
12.3 Program Name (48 Characters) ........................................... 75
76
12.4 Main Program ..............................................................
76
12.5 Sub Programs ..............................................................
76
12.6 Sequence Number ...........................................................
76
12.7 Tape Codes .................................................................
12.8 Basic Address and Command Value Range ................................ 77
78
12.9 Tape Function .............................................................
78
12.10 Label Skip .................................................................
12.11 Control-In/Control-Out 78
..................................................
78
12.12 Optional Block Skip ......................................................
12.13 Additional Optional Block Skip ......................................... 78

13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING ....................................... 79

13.1 Canned Cycle for Turning ................................................79
13.1.1 Cutting cycle A (G77) (With G code system A: G90) ............. 79
13.1.2 Thread cutting cycle (G78) (With G code system A: G92) ....... 80
13.1.3 Turning cycle in facing (G79) (With G code system A: G94) ... 80
13.2 Multiple Repetitive Cycles for Turning (G70 - G76) ................ 81
13.2.1 Stock removal in turning (G71) .................................... 81
13.2.2 Stock removal in facing (G72) ..................................... 84
13.2.3 Finishing cycle (G70) ...............................................85
13.2.4 Pattern repeating (G73) ............................................85
13.2.5 Peck drilling in Z-axis (G74) ..................................... 86
13.2.6 Grooving in X-axis (G75) ...........................................87
13.2.7 Thread cutting cycle (G76) ......................................... 87
13.3 Canned Cycles for Drilling (G83.1, G84.1, G86.1, G80 - G89, G98,
91
G99) ........................................................................
13.4 Rigid Tap (G84.2, G84.3) ................................................95
13.5 Chamfering and Corner R .................................................97
13.6 Circular Interpolation by Radius Programming ........................ 98
13.7 Programmable Mirror Image (G50.1, G51.1) ............................ 98
13.8 Mirror Image for Double Turrets (G68, G69) .......................... 98
13.9 Direct Drawing Dimensions Programming ................................ 99
13.10 Three-Dimensional Coordinate Conversion .............................. 102

14. TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION ................................................103

14.1 Tool Offset ................................................................
103
14.2 Tool Nose Radius Compensation (G40, G41, G42) ...................... 104
14.3 Tool Offset Amount Memory ...............................................107
14.3.1 Extended tool compensation ......................................... 107
14.4 Number of Tool Offsets ..................................................109
14.5 Changing of Tool Offset (Programmable Data Input) (G10) .......... 109

15. ACCURACY COMPENSATION FUNCTION ...........................................

110
15.1 Stored Pitch Error Compensation .......................................110
15.2 Interpolation Pitch Error Compensation ............................... 110

c-3
 15.3 The Second Cylindrical Pitch Error Compensation Method ............ 110
15.4 Backlash Compensation 111
...................................................
15.5 Inclination Compensation ................................................111
15.6 Straightness Compensation 112
...............................................
15.7 Programmable parameter Entry (GlO, Gil) .............................. 112

16. 113
MEASUREMENT FUNCTIONS ......................................................
16.1 113
Skip Function (G31) ......................................................
16.2 High-Speed Skip Signal Input ...........................................113
16.3 Skipping the Commands for Several Axes ............................... 113
.
16.4 Automatic Tool Offset (G37.1, G37.2, G37.3) ......................... 114

. 16.5 High-Speed measuring Position Reach Signal Input ................... 115

16.6 Direct Input of Offset Value Measured ................................ 115
16.7 Tool Compensation Value Measure Value Direct Input B .............. 115
16.8 Count Input of Offset Values ........................................... 117

118
17. CUSTOM MACRO .................................................................
118
17.1 Custom macro ..............................................................
17.2 Number of Common Variables 125
.............................................
17.3 Read/Punch Function for Custom macro Common Variables ............. 125
17.4 Interruption Type Custom Macro ......................................... 126
17.5 Key and Program Encryption 126
.............................................

18. FUNCTIONS FOR HIGH SPEED CUTTING .........................................127

18.1 High-speed Machining (G10.3, Gll.3, G65.3) .......................... 127
127
18.2 Multi-Buffer (G05.1) .....................................................
128
18.3 Feed Forward control .....................................................
18.4 Feed Forward during Rapid Traverse ....................................128

129
19. AXES CONTROL .................................................................
19.1 Following Up Function ................................................... 129
19.2 Following-up for Each Axis ............................................. 129
19.3 Mechanical Handle Feed .................................................. 129
19.4 129
Servo Off ..................................................................
19.5 Mirror Image 129
..............................................................
19.6 Control Axis Detach ......................................................130
130
19.7 Feed Stop ..................................................................
19.8 Synchronous/Independent Switching Function .......................... 130
19.9 Polygonal Turning (G51.2) ............................................... 131
19.10 Axis Control with PMC ...................................................132
133
19.11 Hybrid Control ............................................................
133
19.12 Synchronous Control ......................................................
19.13 Roll-Over Function for a Rotation Axis ............................... 134

20. AUTOMATIC OPERATION ........................................................ 135

20.1 Operation Mode ............................................................135
20.1.1 Tape operation 135
.......................................................
20.1.2 Memory operation .....................................................135
20.1.3 MD1 operation ........................................................135
20.2 Selection of Execution Programs .......................................135
20.2.1 Program number search ............................................... 135
20.2.2 Program search using the program name ........................... 135
20.2.3 Sequence number search ............................................. 135
20.2.4 Rewind 135
.................................................................
20.3 Activation of Automatic Operation ....................................135
20.3.1 135
Cycle start ...........................................................
20.4 Execution of Automatic Operation ......................................136
20.4.1 Buffer register ......................................................136

c-4
20.5 Automatic Operation Stop ................................................
136
20.5.1 Program stop (MOO, MOl) ............................................136
20.5.2 Program end (MO2, M30) .............................................136
20.5.3 Sequence number comparison and stop .............................. 136
20.5.4 Feed hold .............................................................
136
20.5.5 Reset ..................................................................
136
20.6 Restart of Automatic Operation .........................................136
20.6.1 Program restart ......................................................
136
20.6.2 Program restart function and output of M, S, T and B codes .. 137
20.6.3 Restart of block .....................................................
137
20.6.4 Tool retrace & recover .............................................137
20.7 Manual Interruption during Automatic Operation ..................... 140
20.7.1 Handle interruption .................................................
140
20.7.2 Automatic/manual simultaneous operation ......................... 140

21. MANUAL OPERATION ............................................................

141
21.1 Manual Feed ................................................................
141
21.2 Incremental Feed .........................................................
141
21.3 Manual Handle Feed (1st) ................................................
142
21.4 Manual Handle Feed (2nd, 3rd) ..........................................142
20.5 Manual Per-Rotation Feed ................................................
142
20.6 Manual Numerical Command ................................................
142
21.7 Manual Absolute On/Off ..................................................
143

22. PROGRAM TEST FUNCTIONS .....................................................

144
22.1 All Axes Machine Lock ...................................................
144
22.2 Machine Lock on Each Axis ...............................................
144
22.3 Auxiliary Function Lock .................................................
144
22.4 Dry Run ....................................................................
144
22.5 Single block ..............................................................
144

23. CRT/MD1 AND EXTERNAL POSITION DISPLAY ..................................145

23.1 CRT/MD1 Panel 1 ...........................................................
145
23.2 Manual Data Input (MDI) .................................................152
23.3 Display ....................................................................
152
23.4 Language Selection A/B ..................................................156
23.5 Clock Function ............................................................
157
23.6 Run Hour and Parts Number Display .....................................157
23.7 Load Meter Display .......................................................
157
23.8 Menu Switch ................................................................
158
23.9 Software Operator's Panel ...............................................
158
23.10 Graphic Display Function ...............................................
159
23.11 NC Format Guidance ......................................................
159
23.12 NC Format Guidance with Figure .......................................160
23.13 Simple Conversational Automatic Programming Function ............. 160
23.14 Data Protection Key .....................................................
161
23.15 Directory Display of Floppy Cassette/Program File ................ 161
23.16 Machining Time Stamp Function ......................................... 161
23.17 Directory Display and Punching on Each Group ...................... 162
23.18 Run Hour Display ........................................................
163
23.19 Function for Displaying Multiple Subscreens ........................ 163
23.20 Help Function ............................................................
164
23.21 Parameter Setting (RS-232-C) Screen .................................164
23.22 Operation History .......................................................
164
23.23 Waveform Diagnosis Functions .......................................... 165
23.24 CRT Screen Saving Function ............................................165
23.25 Displaying Internal Position Compensation Data .................... 166
23.26 Displaying Data Related to Coordinates .............................. 166

c-5
24. PART PROGRAM STORAGE AND EDITING ......................................... 167
24.1 Foreground Editing .......................................................167
24.2 Background Editing .......................................................167
24.3 Expanded Part Program Editing .......................................... 167
24.4 Number of Registered Programs 168
..........................................
24.5 Part Program Storage Length 168
............................................
24.6 Play Back 169
..................................................................
24.7 External I/O Device Control ............................................ 170
24.8 High-Speed Part Program Registration Function ...................... 170
24.9 Function Selection with Hard Keys .....................................170
24.10 Multi-Edit function .....................................................170

171
25. DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS ........................................................
25.1 171
Self Diagnosis Functions ................................................
25.2 Failure Diagnosis Guidance 171
.............................................

174
26. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT ...........................................................
26.1 Tape Reader 174
................................................................
26.1.1 Tape reader without reels .......................................... 174
26.1.2 Tape reader with reels ............................................. 174
26.2 Reader/Puncher Interface ................................................ 175
26.3 175
Input Device ..............................................................
26.3.1 Portable tape reader ................................................175
26.3.2 FANUC PROGRAM FILE mate 175
............................................
26.3.3 FANUC HANDY FILE 176
.....................................................

27. SAFETY FUNCTIONS ............................................................177

27.1 Emergency Stop ............................................................177
27.2 Overtravel Functions ..................................................... 177
27.2.1 Overtravel ............................................................177
27.2.2 Stored stroke check 1 ............................................... 177
27.2.3 Stored stroke check 2, 3 ........................................... 178
27.2.4 Stroke check before move ........................................... 178
27.3 179
Interlock ..................................................................
27.3.1 Interlock per axis .................................................. 179
27.3.2 All axes interlock .................................................. 179
27.3.3 Automatic operation all axes ......................................179
27.3.4 block start interlock ............................................... 179
27.3.5 Cutting block start interlock .....................................180
27.3.6 Door interlock ....................................................... 180
27.4 External Deceleration ................................................... 180
27.5 Chuck/Tail Stock Barrier ................................................ 181
27.6 Abnormal Load Detection ................................................. 183

28. 184
STATUS OUTPUT ................................................................
28.1 NC Ready Signal ...........................................................184
28.2 184
Servo Ready Signal .......................................................
28.3 184
Rewinding Signal .........................................................
28.4 Alarm Signal ..............................................................184
28.5 Distribution End Signal 184
.................................................
28.6 Automatic Operation Signal ............................................. 184
28.7 Automatic Operation Start Lamp Signal ................................ 184
28.8 184
Feed Hold Signal .........................................................
28.9 184
Reset Signal ..............................................................
28.10 184
Inposition Signal .......................................................
28.11 Move Signal 184
..............................................................
28.12 Axis Move Direction Signal ............................................ 185

c-6
 28.13 Rapid Traversing Signal ................................................
185
28.14 Tapping Signal ...........................................................
185
28.15 Thread Cutting Signal ..................................................
185
28.16 Constant Surface Speed Control Signal ............................... 185
28.17 Inch Input Signal .......................................................
185
28.18 DI Status Output Signal ................................................
185

29. EXTERNAL DATA INPUT/OUTPUT ................................................

186
29.1 External Tool Compensation .............................................
186
29.2 External Program Number Search ......................................... 186
29.3 External Sequence Number Search .......................................186
29.4 External Work Coordinate System Shift ................................187
29.5 External Machine Coordinate System Compensation .................... 187
29.6 External Alarm Message .................................................. 187
29.7 External Operator's Message ............................................ 187
29.8 External Custom Macro Variable Value Input .......................... 187
29.9 External Tool Offset Amount Output ....................................188
29.10 External Program Number Output .......................................188
29.11 External Sequence Number Output ......................................188
29.12 External Work Coordinate System Shift Amount Output .............. 188
29.13 External Machine Coordinate System Compensation Amount Output .. 188
29.14 External Custom Macro Variable Value Output ........................ 188

30 l EXTERNAL WORK NUMBER SEARCH ............................................... 189

31. POSITION SWITCHING FUNCTION ............................................... 189

32. MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTOR ................................................... 190

191
33. MACHINE INTERFACE ...........................................................
33.1 Basic Machine Interface (BMI) ..........................................191
33.2 3T Interface ..............................................................
191
33.3 6T Interface ..............................................................
191

34. PROGRAMMABLE MACHINE CONTROLLER (PMC-NJ ................................192

34.1 PMC Instruction ...........................................................
192
34.2 NC Window ..................................................................
194
34.3 NC Window B ................................................................
194
34.4 Key Input from PMC .......................................................
194
34.5 Output and Setting of PMC Parameters .................................194

195
35. MAN MACHINE CONTROL (MMC) .................................................
195
35.1 Hardware Specifications .................................................
35.2 Software Specifications .................................................
196
35.3 MMC/CNC Window ............................................................
196
35.4 MMC/PMC Window ............................................................
197

198
36. CONTROL UNIT .................................................................
198
36.1 Control Unit ..............................................................
198
36.2 Power Supply ..............................................................
198
36.3 Environmental Conditions ................................................

37. SERVO ......................................................................... 198

38. POSITIONING DETECTOR ....................................................... 198

39 0 SPINDLE ....................................................................... 199

c-7
 40. MACHINE INTERFACE ........................................................... 199

41 l POSITION CODER .............................................................. 200

42 FUNCTIONS FOR 4-AXIS LATHES (IS-TTB, 150TTFB) ......................... 201

4i.1 General ....................................................................
201
42.2 Balance Cut (G68, G69) ..................................................
201
42.3 Interference Check Function ............................................201

III. AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION (15-W, 150TTF) ......................... 205

1. GENERAL ....................................................................... 207

2. OPERATOR'S PANEL OF SYMBOLIC FAPT TURN .................................209

2.1 MD1 Key ....................................................................
209
2.2 209
Soft Key ...................................................................

3. SELECTION OF JOBS BY SOFT KEYS ..*........................................

212

4 SYMBOLIC FAPT PROGRAMMING .................................................

213
41 Operation Procedure ......................................................
213
4’2 Programming Start ........................................................
215
4:3 Designation of Material and Part ......................................216
4.4 Home Position and Index Position ......................................227
4.5 Machining Definition .....................................................
228
4.6 Preparation of NC Data ..................................................
233
4.7 NC Data Checking (Animated Drawing Function) ........................ 236

5. INPUT/OUTPUT OF FAMILY PROGRAM ........................................... 237

6. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA ...............................................

238
6.1 Tool Data ..................................................................
238
6.2 Tooling Information ......................................................
239
6.3 Material Data .............................................................
240
6.4 System Parameter .........................................................
241
6.5 Setting Data ..............................................................
242

7. SUMBMEMORY ......................~............................................
243

8. PARTS FIGURE INPUT EXAMPLE ................................................ 244

9 SYMBOLIC FAPT TURN SPECIFICATIONS LIST .................................254

91 Blank Figure ..............................................................
254
9'2 Symbolic keys .............................................................
254
9'3 Drawing Input Method/List Input Method ............................... 254
9'4 Operation Functions ......................................................
254
9'5 Definition of Machining Processes .....................................254
9'6 Automatic Setting of Cutting Conditions .............................. 255
9:7 Machining Time Display ..................................................255
9.8 Sub-memory .................................................................
255
9.9 Tool Data and Tooling Data Files ......................................255
9.10 Material Data .............................................................
256
9.11 Family Program ............................................................
256
9.12 Magnifying and Reducing Drawing .......................................256
9.13 Batch Input Function for Chamfering or Corner Rounding ............ 256
9.14 Animation Drawing Function ............................................. 256
9.15 Process Edit Function (150TTFB only) .................................256

c-8
 9.16 Auto Collision Avoidance (150TTFB only) ..............................
257
9.17 Balance Cut FAPT Function (15-TTFB only) ............................
257
9.18 258
C-axis FAPT ................................................................
9.19 258
Y-Axis FAPT ................................................................
9.20 258
Sub Cycle ..................................................................
9.21 Automatic Process Decision Function ..................................
258

APPENDIXES
APPENDIX 1 261
RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE ..........................................
APPENDIX 2 266
FUNCTION AND TAPE FORMAT LIST .................................
APPENDIX 3 271
LIST OF TAPE CODE ................................................
APPENDIX 4 EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS .............................................
273

c-9
I. GENERAL
1. GENERAL

To achieve high-speed, highly accurate, and highly efficient processes required

for future machining needs, the Series 15, an advanced industrial computer, was
developed as the high-grade AI-CNC.
It uses surface-mounted electronic parts to enable the control unit to be made
compact and the high-speed multi-master bus (FANUC BUS) to standardize all the
printed-circuit boards for providing a series of systems in different sizes
from small to large.
The sophisticated functions such as the world's fastest CNC function using a
32-bit microprocessor, high-speed and highly accurate digital servo system, and
high-speed PMC function provided with the newly developed processor dedicated
to PMC allow great enhancement of machining throughput. The high-grade AI-CNC
has AI functions such as intelligent failure diagnosis guidance which allow
full use of the user's know-how.
A .man-machine control (MMC) function is provided to enable a high-level man-
machine interface.
The 150TTB CNC enables simultaneous turning on two tool posts of a b-axis lathe
by independently controlling the tool posts.
The 150TFB CNC is a development of the 1%TB CNC, to -which an automatic
programming function has been added. Similarly, the lS-TTFB CNC is a
development of the IS-TTB CNC, to which the automatic programming function has
been added. .

Features
o Use of the high-speed multi-master bus (FANUC BUS) of 32 bits in width
enables all the printed-circuit boards to be standardized.
o Surface-mounted parts allows the control unit to be made compact.
o Use of the 320bit microprocessor achieves the world's fastest CNC function.
o The PMC-dedicated processor newly developed for high-speed processing of
ladder language enables high-speed execution of PMC basic commands at 0.25
*s/step.
o A ladder program of up to 16,000 steps and the Pascal program of up to 936 I&
can be supported.
o A large window is provided between CNC and PMC.
o PMC has up to 1024 input points and 1024 output points, and is also provided
with I/O modules meeting various I/O specifications.
o There are functions to shorten the machining cycle such as the high-speed
M/S/T/B processing function and the command function for one block in
multi-piece machining.

-3-
2. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS

Series 15 has the basic machine Interface (BMI), FS3 interface and the FS6
interface as machine interfaces and there are some limitations on functions
depending on the machine interfaces.
The specification list also informs which functions are effective for each
machine interface. The features of CNCs mentioneld here are classified as in
the following table and the lists of specifications are written according to
this classification.
.
Classification of Table No. of Models to be
specifications specification list applied

Standard specifications Table 2(a) All models

Optional specifications Table 2(b) All models

I
Optional specifications Table 2(c) 150TFB, 150TTFB
of automatic only
programming function
l
-.

Detailed explanations of each function are mentioned in an item of the text

indicated in the specification list.

1) List of standard specification

The list indicates the standard features equipped with each CNC.
2) List of optional specification
The list indicates features which can be added to the standard features.
3) List of optional specification for automatic programming function
The list indicates options of the automatic programming function available
with 150TFB and 150TTFB.
 Table 2 (a) Standard specifications(l/9)

Item
T Functions

Basic Machine FS3 FS6

Interface (BMI) Interface Interface

Controlled axes 2 axes (Note 1) 2 axes (Note 1) 2 axes (Note 1)

Simultaneous con-
2 axes (Note 1) 2 axes (Note 1) 2 axes (Note 1)
trollable axes

Optional from B, Optional from B, tional from B,

C, X, Y, Z (G code C, X, Y, Z (G code X, Y, Z (G code
system A) or from system A) or from stem A) or from
Axis name
u, v, w, B, C, X, u, v, KB, C, X, v, w, B, C, X9
Y, Z (G code Y, Z (G code Z (G code
system B/C) system B/C) stem B/C)

0.01, 0001, 0.01, 0001, 01, 0001,

0.0001 mm or 0.0001 mm or 0001 mm or
Increment system
0.001, 0.0001, 0.001, 0.0001, 001, 0.0001,
0.00001 inch 0.00001 inch 00001 inch

0.005, 0.0005, 0.005, 0.0005, 005, 0.0005,

Interpolation 0.00005 mm 0.00005 mm 00005 mm
unit 0.0005, 0.00005, 0.0005, 0.00005, 0005, 0.00005,
0.000005 inch 0.000005 inch 000005 inch

Maximum
318 digits 318 digits -48 digits
commendable value

G code system A/B Yes Yes Yes

Linear inter- Linear inter- Li near inter-

polation type polation type PO lation type
Positioning
positioning is positioning is PO sitioning is
also available also available al so available

Linear
Yes Yes Yes
interpolation

Multi-quadrant
circular Yes Yes Yes
interpolation

Equal lead thread

Yes Yes Yes
cutting

Inch-thread
Yes Yes Yes
cutting

Continuous thread
Yes Yes Yes
cutting

Note 1) 4 axes in case of 150TTB/TTFB.

-5.
 Table 2 (a) Standard specifications (2/9)

Functions

Item
Basic Machine FS3 FS6
Interface (BMI) Interface Interface

Rapid traverse Yes Yes Yes

Tangential speed
Yes Yes Yes
constant control

Cutting federate
For each axis For each axis For each axis
clamp

Feed per minute Yes Yes Yes

Feed per
Yes Yes Yes
revolution

Federate override Yes Yes Yes

Rapid traverse o- 254% o- 150% o- 200%

override 1% step 10% step 10% step

Second feedrate
Yes No No
override B

Rapid traverse: Rapid traverse: Rapid traverse:

Linear Linear Linear
acceleration/ acceleration/ acceleration/
Automatic
deceleration deceleration deceleration
acceleration/
Cutting feed: Cutting feed: Cutting feed:
deceleration
Exponential Exponential Exponential
acceleration/ acceleration/ acceleration/
deceleration deceleration deceleration

Linear accelera-
tion/deceleration
after cutting Yes Yes Yes
feed interpola-
tion
Bell-shaped ac-
celeration/decel-
eration after Yes Yes Yes
rapid traverse
interpolation

Feed forward
during rapid Yes Yes Yes
traverse

Exact stop, exact

stop mode, Yes Yes Yes
cutting mode

-60
 Table 2 (a) Standard specifications (3/9)

Functions

Item
Basic Machine FS3 FS6
Interface (BMI) Interface Interface

Per second dwell Per second dwell Per second dwell

Dwell and per revolution and per revolution and per revolution
dwell dwell dwell

Reference point Manual automatic Manual automatic Manual automatic

return (G27, G28, G29) (G27, G28, G29) (G27, G28, G29)

Digital adjust-
ment of origin
Yes No No
deceleration
limit

Dog-less
reference point Yes Yes Yes
setting

Machine coordi-
nate system Yes Yes Yes
selection

Work coordinate Yes

Yes Yes
system selection (G54 - G59)

Local coordinate Yes

Yes Yes
system setting (Note 2)

Work coordinate Yes

Yes Yes
system change (G92)

Work coordinate Yes

Yes Yes
system preset (G92.1)

Absolute/incremen Combined use in Combined use in Combined use in

tal programming the same block the same block the same block

Decimal point
input/pocket
calculator type Yes Yes Yes
decimal point
input

Diameter/radius
Yes Yes Yes
programming

Function for
switching between
diameters and Yes Yes Yes
radius
programming

Note 2) 150TTB/TTFB is not equipped with this function.

-7.
 Table 2 (a) Standard specifications (4/9) -

Functions

Item
Basic Machine FS3 FS6
Interface (BMI) Interface Interface

Roll-over
function for a Yes Yes Yes
rotation axis

S8-digit command S2-digit command S2-digit command

S code output
(Binary output) (BCD output) (Binary output)

T8-digit command T2-digit command T2-digit command

T code output
(Binary output) (BCD output) @CD output)

Miscellaneous M8-digit command M2-digit command M2-digit command

function (Binary output) (BCD output) (BCD output)

High speed M, S,
Yes No No
T, B interface

Program number: Program number: Program number:

Program number/ 4 digits 4 digits 4 digits
program name Program name: Program name: Program name:
16 characters 16 characters 16 characters

Program number
Yes Yes Yes
search

Sequence number
Yes Yes Yes
search

Sequence number
S-digits S-digits S-digits
display

Main program/ Subprogram: Subprogram: Subprogram:

subprogram Fourfold nested Fourfold nested Fourfold nested

EIA RS-244, IS0840 EIA RS-244, IS0840 EIA RS-244, IS0840

Tape code automatic automatic automatic
recognition recognition recognition

Word-address Word-address Word-address

Tape format
format format format

Label skip Yes Yes Yes

Control in/out Yes Yes Yes

External memory
Yes Yes Yes
Subprogram call

Optional block
Yes Yes Yes
skip
I

-80
 Table 2 (a) Standard specifications (5/g)

Functions

Item
Basic Machine FS3 FS6
Interface (BMI) Interface Interface

Canned cycles for Yes

Yes Yes
turning

Circular inter-
polation by
Yes Yes Yes
radius program-
ming

Tool offset Yes Yes Yes

I
+6 digits, common ,+6 digits, common +6 digits, common
Tool compensation
to all tools to all tools to all tools
memory A
(Note 3) (Note 3) (Note 3)

32 parts of tool Yes

Yes Yes
compensation (Note 4)

Incremental
Yes Yes Yes
offset

Backlash
Max. 9999 pulses Max. 9999 pulses Max. 9999 pulses
compensation
.
Backlash compen- -----I I
sation for each
Yes Yes Yes
rapid traverse
and cutting feed 1

Direct input
offset value Yes Yes Yes
measured

Counter input of
Yes Yes Yes
offset value

I At emergency
stop At emergency stop
I At emergency
Follow-up stop

Following -up for

Yes Yes Yes
each axis

Mechanical handle
feed and servo Yes Yes Yes
off

Possible on all Possible on all Possible on all

Mirror image
axes axes axes

Control axis
Yes Yes Yes
detach

Note 3) Tool compensation memory B (Geometry/wear memory) is equipped with

15TF as a standard feature.

- 9 -
 Table 2 (a) Standard specifications (6/g)

Functions

Item
Basic Machine FS3 FS6
Interface (BMI) Interface Interface

Tape, memory and Tape, memory and Tape, memory and

Automatic
MD1 operation MD1 operation MD1 operation
operation I
(Note 5) (Note 5) (Note 5)

Cycle start/feed
Yes Yes Yes
hold

Buffer register Yes Yes Yes

Program stop/
Yes Yes Yes
program end

Reset/rewind Yes I Yes I Yes

Manual continuous
Yes Yes Yes
feed

xl, x10, x100, xl, x10, x100,

xl, x10, x100,
Incremental feed x1000, x10000, x1000, x10000,
xl000
x100000 x100000

Manual absolute
Yes Yes Yes
on/off

All axes machine

Yes Yes Yes
lock

Machine lock on
Yes Yes Yes
each axis

Auxiliary
Yes Yes Yes
function lock

Dry run Yes Yes Yes

Single block Yes Yes Yes

I
Keyboard type
manual data input 9" monochrome 9” monochrome 9" monochrome
(MDI) and CRT (Note 6) (Note 6) (Note 6)
character display

Clock function Yes Yes Yes

NC format Yes
Yes Yes
guidance (Note 2)

Data protection
3 types 1 type 1 type
key

Note 2) 150TTB/TTFB is not equipped with this function.

Note 5) 150TTBTTFB is not equipped with tape operation.
Note 6) 14” color for 150TFB/TTFB.

- 10 -
 Table 2 (a) Standard specifications (7/9)

Functions

Item
Basic Machine FS3 FS6
Interface (BMI) Interface Interface

birectory display
nd punching on Yes Yes Yes
!ach group

'art program
Yes Yes Yes
storage & setting

ixpanded part
Yes Yes Yes
brogram editing

lackground
Yes Yes Yes
Lditing

lo. of register-
ible program
100 100 100
Program name
iisplay possible)

'art program
40 m 40 m 40 m
torage length

:alculation key Yes Yes Yes

ielf-disgnosis
Yes Yes Yes
'unctions

;ervo/Spindle
Yes Yes Yes
tdjustment screen

'unction for dis-

rlaying multiple Yes Yes Yes
ubscreens

[elp function Yes Yes Yes

ietting (RS-2320
1 Yes Yes Yes
t > screen

bperation history Yes Yes Yes

laveform diag-
Yes Yes Yes
losis functions

:RT screen saving

Yes Yes Yes
runction

tigh-speed part
brogram resistra- Yes Yes Yes
ion function

- 11 -
 Table 2 (a) Standard specifications (8/9)

Functions

Item
Basic Machine FS3 FS6
Interface (BMI) Interface Interface

Function selec-
tion with hard Yes Yes Yes
keys

Multi-edit Yes
Yes Yes
function

Displaying
internal position Yes Yes Yes
compensation data

Displaying data
related to Yes Yes Yes
coordinates

Emergency stop Yes Yes Yes

Overtravel Yes +LZ only Yes

Storage stroke Yes

Yes Yes
check 1

Each axis/all
axes/all axes in
automatic
All axes or Z axis Each axis, cutting
Interlock operation/block
only block start
start/cutting
block start
interlock

CNC ready, servo CNC ready, servo CNC ready, servo

ready, rewinding, ready, rewinding, ready, rewinding,
alarm, distribu- alarm, distribu- alarm, distribu-
tion end, auto- tion end, auto- tion end, auto-
matic operation, matic operation, matic operation,
automatic opera- automatic opera- automatic opera-
tion start lamp, tion start lamp, tion start lamp,
feed hold, reset, feed hold, reset feed hold, reset
Status output
imposition, rapid
traversing, tapp-
ing thread cutt-
ing, constant sur-
face speed con-
trol, inch input,
and DI status
output

- 12 -
 Table 2 (a) Standard specifications(9/9)

Item

~~~~~~
Cutting/rapid
traverse position Yes Yes Yes
check function

r
Yes Yes Yes
I I I
External power
Yes Yes Yes
on/off

Connectable servo FANUC AC SERVO FANUC AC SERVO FANUC AC SERVO

motor MOTOR MOTOR MOTOR

Connectable servo PWN transistor PWN transistor PWN transistor

unit drive drive drive

Connectable Pulse coder/ Pulse coder/ Pulse coder/

position detector optical scale optical scale optical scale

Connectable FANUC AC SPINDLE FANUC AC SPINDLE FANUC AC SPINDLE

spindle motor MOTOR MOTOR MOTOR

Connectable
PWN transistor PWN transistor PWN transistor
spindle servo
drive drive drive
unit

200 VAC +lO%, 200 VAC +lO%, 200 VAC +lO%,

-15%, 50/60 Hz + -15%, 50/60 Hz + -15%, 50160 Hz +
Power 1 Hz or 220 VAC 1 Hz or 220 VAC 1 Hz or 220 VAC
+lO%, -15%, 60 Hz +lO%, -15%, 60 Hz +lO%, -15%, 60 Hz
+2 Hz +2 Hz +2 Hz
-

- 13 -
 Table 2 (b) Optional specifications (l/IO)

Functions

Item
Basic Machine FS3 FS6
Interface (BMI) Interface Interface

Max. 3 axes (TA)/

Controlled axes 6 axes (TF/TTA/ Max. 4 axes and
No
expansion TTF) and spindle spindle control
control

Simultaneous con- Max. all

trolled axes No Max. 4 axes
controlled axes
expansion

Increment
system D (Note 1, Yes Yes Yes
Note 2)

Increment system
Yes Yes Yes
E (Note l,Note 2)

G code system C Yes Yes Yes

Helical
Yes Yes Yes
interpolation

Helical
Yes Yes Yes
interpolation B

Hypothetical axis
Yes Yes Yes
interpolation

Polar coordinate
Yes Yes Yes
interpolation

Cylindrical
Yes Yes Yes
interpolation

Involute
Yes Yes Yes
interpolation

Spindle
interpolation Yes Yes Yes
(Note 1)

3-dimensional
coordinate system Yes Yes Yes
conversion

Variable lead
Yes Yes Yes
thread cutting

Circular thread
Yes Yes Yes
cutting

Note 1) 150TTB-TTFB is not equipped with this function.

Note 2) 150TFB is not equipped with this function.

- 14 -
 Table 2 (b) Optional specifications (200)

Functions

Item
Basic Machine FS3 FS6
Interface (BMI) Interface Interface

Thread cutting
Yes Yes Yes
cycle retract

2nd feedrate
Yes Yes Yes
override

2nd feedrate
Yes No No
override B

Bell-shaped
accelerationfdece
leration after Yes Yes Yes
cutting feed
interpolation

Linear accelera-
tion/ decelera-
tion before Yes Yes Yes
cutting feed
interpolation

Automatic corner
Yes Yes Yes
override

2nd to 4th
Yes
reference point Yes Yes
(Note 3)
return

Floating
Yes Yes
reference point Yes
(Note 4) (Note 4)
return

GlO, tool offset GlO, tool offset GlO, tool offset

amount, work, zero amount, work, zero amount, work, zero
Programmable data point offset point offset point offset
input amount can be amount can be amount can be
changed by changed by changed by
programming programming programming

Inch/metric
Yes Yes Yes
conversion

Spindle speed Spindle speed

Spindle speed
analog output and analog output and
binary code/ Yes
spindle speed spindle speed
analog output and (For S command up
clamp (G92) clamp (G92)
spindle speed to 3000 rpm)
(For S command up (For S command up
clamp
to 60000 rpm) to 30000 rpm)

Note 3) 2nd reference point return only.

Note 4) Floating reference point return signal is not output.

- 15 -
 Table 2 (b) Optional specifications (S/IO)

Functions

Item
Basic Machine FS3 FS6
Interface (BMI) Interface Interface

Constant surface
Yes Yes Yes
speed control

Actual spindle
Yes No Yes
speed output

Spindle
Yes No Yes
positioning

Spindle speed
fluctuation
Yes Yes Yes
detecting
function (Note 1)

Spindle serial
Yes No No
output

Cs contouring
Yes No No
control

Serial interface
spindle Yes No No
orientation

Spindle output
Yes No No
switching

Spindle
synchronous Yes No No
control

C axis control
switching Yes No No
(Note 5)

Tool life
Yes No Yes
management

Turret axis
Yes No Yes
control (Note 2)

2nd auxiliary
function (Address
B, or C which is 8-digits
No No
not of controlled (Binary output)
axis can be
assigned.)

Note 1) 150TTB/TTFB is not equipped with this option.

Note 2) 150TFB is not equipped with this option.
Note 5) 150TTBTTFB is not equipped with this function.

- 16 -
 Table 2 (b) Optional specifications (4110)

Functions

Item
Basic Machine FS3 FS6
Interface (BMI) Interface Interface

1 block plural M No No
Yes
command (Note 1)

Program name
Yes Yes Yes
48 characters

Optional block
skip addition Yes No Yes
(2 to 9)

Multiple repeti-
tive canned
Yes Yes Yes
cycles for
turning

Canned cycles for Yes Yes

Yes
drilling (Note 6) (Note 6)

Rigid tap
Yes Yes Yes
(Note 2)

Chamfering/corner
Yes Yes Yes
R

Programming
mirror image Yes Yes Yes
(Note 2)

Mirror image for

double turrets Yes Yes Yes
(Note 2)

Direct drawing
dimensions Yes Yes Yes
programming

Tool nose radius

Yes Yes Yes
compensation

Geometry/wear Geometry/wear Geometry/wear

Tool offset
offset. offset. offset.
amount memory B
Used in common to Used in common to Used in common to
(Note 7)
all offsets. all offsets. all offsets.

64 tool
compensation Yes Yes Yes
(Note 8)

Note 1) 150TTB-TTFB is not equipped with this function,

Note 2) 150TFB is not equipped with this function.
Note 6) SSP, SRV, FMF, FFIN signals are not prepared.
Note 7) In case of 1%TFB, this is a standard feature.
Note 8) In case of 150TTB/TTFB, 32 pairs on each tool post.

- 17 -
 Table 2 (b) Optional specifications (5/10)

Functions

Item
Basic Machine FS3 FS6
Interface (BMI) Interface Interface

Tool offset value

digit expansion Yes Yes Yes
(Note 1, Note 2)

Stored pitch
error compensa- Yes Yes Yes
tion

Inclination
compensation Yes Yes Yes
(Note 1)

Straightness
compensation Yes Yes Yes
(Note 1)

Interpolation
pitch error Yes Yes Yes
compensation

2nd cylindrical
pitch error
Yes Yes Yes
compensation
method

Programmable
Yes Yes Yes
parameter entry

Skip function Yes Yes Yes

Multi-step skip
Yes No No
function (Note 1)

High-speed skip
Yes Yes Yes
signal input

Automatic tool
Yes Yes Yes
offset

High-speed
measuring
Yes Yes Yes
position reach
signal input

Tool offset value

Yes Yes Yes
measured input B

Custom macro DI/DO = 128/128 DI/DO = 16/16 (DI/DO = 16/16)

Note 1) 150TTB/TTFB is not equipped with this option.

Note 2) 150TFB is not equipped with this option.

- 18 -
 Table 2 (b) Optional specifications (6/10)

Functions

Item
Basic Machine FS3 FS6
Interface (BMI) Interface Interface

Custom macro 299/300/600 299/300/600 299/300/600

common variables (Note 9) (Note 9) (Note 9)

Interruption type
Yes Yes Yes
custom macro

Key and program

Yes Yes Yes
coding

High-speed
machining Yes Yes Yes
function

Multi buffer
Yes Yes Yes
(Note 1)

Feed stop Yes Yes Yes

Synchronous/
independent
Yes No No
switching
(Note 1)

Polygon turning
Yes Yes Yes
(Note 1)

Axis control by
Yes No No
PMC

Synchronous
control Yes No No
(Note 1, 2)

Hybrid control
Yes No No
(Note 1, 2)

Sequence number
Yes
comparison and Yes Yes
(Note 1)
stop

Yes
Program restart Yes Yes
(Note 1)

Yes
Restart of block No No
(Note 1)

Tool restart and Yes

No No
recover (Note 1)

Note 1) 150TTB/TTFB is not equipped with this option.

Note 2) 150TFB is not equipped with this option.
Note 9) In case of 150TTB/TTFB, 100/150 variable on each tool post.

- 19 -
 Table 2 (b) Optional specifications (700)

Functions

Item
Basic Machine FS3 FS6
Interface (BMI) Interface Interface

Manual handle Yes

Yes
interruption (Note 1) No

Automatic/manual
simultaneous Yes No No
operation

Manual handle
Yes Yes Yes
feed (1st)

Manual handle
Yes Yes Yes
feed (2nd, 3rd)

Manual arbitrary
Yes No No
angle feed

Manual numerical
Yes Yes Yes
command

Manual feed per

revolution Yes Yes No
(Note 1)

Language
selection

14" color CRT I Yes Yes I Yes

I
Run hour/number
Yes Yes Yes
of parts display

Load meter
Yes Yes Yes
display
_
Menu switch
Yes Yes Yes
(Note 1)

Software
operator's panel Yes Yes Yes
(Note 1)

Graphic display
Yes Yes Yes
(Note 1, 2)

NC format
Yes
guidance with Yes Yes
(Note 1)
figure

- 20 -
 Table 2 (b) Optional specifications (8110)

Functions

Item
Basic Machine FS3 FS6
Interface (BMI) Interface Interface

Simple conversa-
tional automatic
programming Yes Yes Yes
function
(Note 1, 2)

Machining time
Yes Yes Yes
stamp function

No. of registered
200/400/1000 200/400/1000 200/400/1000
programs

Part program
Max. 5120 mm Max. 5120 mm Max. 5120 mm
storage length

Yes
Play back Yes Yes
(Note 1)

External I/O
Yes No No
device control

Trouble diagnosis
Yes Yes No
guidance

Tape reader
Yes Yes Yes
without reel

reader/puncher
Yes Yes Yes
interface

Floppy cassette
Yes Yes Yes
and adaptor

FANUC PPR Yes Yes Yes

FANUC PROGRAM
Yes Yes Yes
FILE Mate

Portable tape
Yes Yes Yes
reader

FANUC Handy File Yes Yes Yes

Stored stroke
Yes Yes Yes
check 2, 3

Stroke check
Yes Yes Yes
before move

Note 1) 150TTB-TTFB is not equipped with this function.

Note 2) 150TFB is not equipped with this function.

- 21 -
 Table 2 (b) Optional specifications (g/IO)

Functions

Item
Basic Machine FS3 FS6
Interface (BMI) Interface Interface

Door interlock Yes No No

Chuck-tail stock
Yes Yes
barrier

Door interlock Yes Yes Yes

External
Yes No Yes
deceleration

Moving signal
Yes No Yes
output moving

Moving direction
Yes No No
signal output

Input/output of Input/output of Input/output of

tool offset tool offset tool offset
amount, work amount, work amount, work
coordinate shift coordinate shift coordinate shift
amount, machine amount, with PMC amount, with alarm
coordinate system (However input message, program
shift amount, only) number search
External data
alarm message, (However input
input/output
operator message, only)
program number
search, sequence
number search,
custom macro
variables are
available.

External work
31 works 15 works 31 works
number search

Key entry from

Yes Yes Yes
PMC (Note 1)

NC window Yes No No
NC window B Yes (Note 1) No No
200/220/230/240/ 200/220/230/240/ 200/220/230/240/
Multi-tap
380/415/440/460/ 380/415/440/460/ 380/415/440/460/
transformer
480/550 VAC 4801550 VAC 480/550 VAC

?Jote 1) 150TTB/TTFB is not equipped with this option.

- 22 -
 Table 2 (b) Optional specifications (1010)

Functions

Item
Basic Machine FS3 FS6
Interface (BMI) Interface Interface

Absolute position
detecting Yes Yes Yes
function

Yes
Balance cut No No
(Note 10)

Tool post inter- Yes

No No
ference check (Note 10)

Hypothetical axis
Yes No No
control (Note 1)

Tandem control
Yes Yes Yes
(Note 1, Note 2)

Abnormal load
Yes No No
detection

Note 1) 150TTB-TTFB is not equipped with this function.

Note 2) 150TFB is not equipped with this function.
Note 10) Only 150TTB/TTFB is equipped with this function.

- 23 -
 Table 2 (c) Optional specifications of automatic programming function
(ISTFB. 15TTFB only)

Functions
Item
150TFB 15-TTFB

Sub cycle Yes Yes

Automatic process decision Yes Yes

Automatic process decision B I Yes I Yes I

C-axis FAPT function I Yes I Yes I

Y-axis FAPT function Yes No

Auto collision avoidance function No Yes

Balance cutting FAPT function No Yes

Back machining FAPT function Yes No

Registration of file name to

Yes Yes
floppy cassette

Animated drawing function for

Yes Yes
vertical lathe

Language selection Yes Yes

Sub-memory addition I Yes I Yes

- 24 -
Il. NC FUNCTIONS
This chapter describes all the functions, which will be realized throughout all
models and all machine interfaces. For which functions are available on a
specific machine interface in a specific model, refer to the list of
specifications in Chapter I.

1. CONTROLLED AXES

1 .I Basic Controlled Axes

2 axes: 150TB
4 axes (two axes on each tool post): 150TTB

1.2 Controllable Axes Expansion

150TB: Max. 6 axes (Total 6 axes)

150TTB: Max. 4 axes (Total 6 axes)

1.3 Basic Simultaneously Controllable Axes

15-T : 2 axes
150TT : 4 axes (2 axes for each tool post)

1.4 Simultaneously Controllable Axes Expansion

Simultaneously controllable axes:

Following are controlled all axes at a time: positioning, linear interpofation;
jog feed and incremental feed.

1.5 Name of Axes

Name of axes can be optionally selected from B, C, X, Y, 2 (Set by parameter).

In case of G code system B and C, U, V and W can be used as axis names.

1.6 Increment System

Least input Least command Maximum command

Abbreviation
increment increment value
0.01 0.01 999999.99 IS-A
0.001 0.001 99999.999 mm IS-B
0.0001 mm 0.0001 mm 9999.9999 mm IS-C
0.00001 mm 0.00001 mm 9999.99999 mm IS-D
0.000001 mm 0.000001 mm 999.999999 mm IS-E
0.001 inch 0.001 inch 99999.999 inch IS-A
0.0001 inch 0.0001 inch 9999.9999 inch IS-B
0.00001 inch 0.00001 inch 999.99999 inch IS-C
0.000001 inch 0.000001 inch 999.999999 inch IS-D
0.0000001 inch 0.0000001 inch 99.9999999 inch IS-E
0.001 deg 0.001 deg 99999.999 deg IS-A
0.0001 deg 0.0001 deg 9999.9999 deg IS-B
0.00001 deg 0.00001 deg 999.99999 deg IS-C
0.000001 deg 0.000001 deg 999.999999 deg IS-D
0.0000001 deg 0.0000001 deg 99.9999999 deg IS-E

As shown above, five increment systems are supported. They are selected by
setting bits ISFx and ISRx of parameter 1004 for each axis.

- 27 -
The table below lists increment systems IS-B and IS-C when bit IPPx of
parameter 1004 is set to multiply the increments by ten.

Least input Least command Maximum command

Abbreviation
increment increment value
0.01 0.001 99999.999 mm
0.001 inch 0.0001 inch 9999.9999 inch IS-B
0.01 deg 0.001 deg 99999.999 deg
0.001 mm 0.0001 mm 9999.9999 mm
0.0001 inch . 0.00001 inch 9999.99999 inch IS-C
0.001 deg . 0.~0001 deg 9999.9999 deg

Each unit in the table shows diameter value when diameter programming, or radius
value when radius programming.

1.7 Maximum Command Value

Maximum command value = Least input increment x 99999999 (999999999 for IS-D
and IS-E)
See 1.6 Increment System.

- 28 -
2. PREPARATORYFUNCTIONS

The following G codes are offered. G code system has three types A, B and C as
follows.

G code system (Note)

Meaning
A B C
I

GO0 GO0 GO0 Positioning

GO3 GO1 GO1 Linear interpolation

GO2 I GO2 GO2 Circular interpolation CW

G02.2 G02.2 G02.2 Involute interpolation CW

GO3 GO3 GO3 Circular interpolation CCW

G03.2 G03.2 G03.2 Involute interpolation CCW

GO4 GO4 GO4 Dwell

G05.1 G05.1 G05.l Multi-buffer

G06.1 G06.1 G06.1 Spline interpolation

GO7 GO7 GO7 Hypothetical axis interpolation

G07.1 G07.1 G07.1 Cylindrical interporation

GO9 GO9 GO9 Exact stop

GlO GlO GlO Data setting

G1O.l , G1O.l GlO.1 PMC data setting

G10.3 G10.3 G10.3 High speed machining start

Gil Gil Gil Data setting mode cancel

G11.3 G11.3 G11.3 High speed machining end

G12.1 1 G12.1 G12.1 1 Polar coordinate interpolation

I 1
G13.1 j G13.1 G13.1 / Polar coordinate interpolation cancel
1
I
G17 / G17 j G17 XpYp plane selection
I
I1
G18 I G18 G18 I ZpXp plane selection
I
G19 / G19 ' G19 /0 YpZp plane selection
I
XP : X axis or its parallel axis
j , YP : Y axis or its parallel axis
ZP : Z axis or its parallel axis

- 29 -
G code system (Note)
Meaning
A R C
-- -._ --- ~--
G20 G20 G70 Inch input

G21 G21 G71 Metric input

G22 G22 G22 Stored stroke check on

G23 G23 G23 Stored stroke check off

G25 G25 G25 Spindle speed fluctuation detection off

G26 G26 G26 Spindle speed fluctuation detection on

G27 G27 G27 Reference point return check

G28 G28 G28 Reference point return

G29. G29 G29 Return from reference point

G30 G30 G30 Return to 2nd, 3rd, 4th reference point

G30.1 G30.1 G30.1 Floating reference point return

G31 G31 G31 Skip function

G32 G33 G33 Thread cutting

G34 G34 G34 Variable lead thread cutting

G35 G35 G35 Circular thread cutting CW

Circular thread cutting CCW or automatic tool

G36 G36 G36
compensation (X axis)

Automatic tool compensation #l or automatic tool

G37 G37 G37
compensation (2 axis)

G37.1 G37.1 G37.1 Automatic tool compensation #l

G37.2 G37.2 G37.2 Automatic tool compensation #2

G37.3 G37.3 G37.3 Automatic tool compensation #3

G40 G40 G40 / Tool nose radius compensation cancel

I
G41 G41 G41 ’ Tool nose radius compensation right

G42 G42 G42 Tool nose radius compensation left

Work coordicates change/maximum spindle speed

G50 G92 G92 1
setting

- 30 -
 G code system (Note) 1
._ Meaning
1
e-e-

A B C

G50.1 G50.1 G50.1 Programmable mirror image

G50.2 G50.2 G50.2 Polygon turning cancel

G50.3 G92.1 G92.1 Work coordinate preset

G51.1 G51.1 G51.1 Programmable mirror image

G51.2 G51.2 G51.2 Polygon turning

G52 G52 G52 Local coordinate system setting

G53 G53 G53 Machine coordinate system selection

G54 G54 G54 Work coordinate system 1 selection

G55 G55 G55 Work coordinate system 2 selection

G56 G56 G56 Work coordinate system 3 selection

G57 G57 G57 Work coordinate system 4 selection

G58 G58 G58 Work coordinate system 5 selection

G59 G59 G59 Work coordinate system 6 selection

G61 G61 G61 Exact stop mode

G62 G62 G62 Automatic corner override

G64 G64 G64 Cutting mode

G65 G65 G65 Macro call

G65.3 G65.3 G65.3 High speed machining call command

G66 G66 G66 Macro modal call A

G66.1 G66.1 G66.1 Macro modal call B

G67 G67 G67 Macro modal call A/B cancel

Mirror image for double turrets on or balance cut

G68 G68 G68
mode

Mirror image for double turrents cancel or balance

G69 G69 G69
cut mode cancel

- G70 G70 G72 Finishing cycle

G71 G71 G73 Stock removal in turning

G72 G72 G74 Stock removal in facing

- 31 -
 G code system (Note)
-- Meaning
A B C
_-__-p _.-__.---- ---_._
_--___.--.-_- __.
__
_______
_. _._.-___.---
G73 G73 CT75 Pattern repeating

G74 G74 G76 Peck drilling 2 axis

G75 G75 G77 Grooving in X axis

G76 G76 G78 Threading cycle

G80 G80 G80 Canned cycle for drilling cancel

G81 G81 G81 Drilling cycle, spot boring

G82 G82 G82 Drilling cycle, counter boring

G83 G83 G83 Peck drilling cycle

G83. I G83.1 G83.1 Peck drilling cycle

G84 G84 G84 Tapping cycle

G84. I G84. I. G84.1 Counter tapping cycle

G84.2 G84.2 G84.2 Rigid tapping cycle

G84.3 G84.3 G84.3 Counter rigid tapping cycle

G85 G85 G85 Boring cycle

G86 G86 G86 Boring cycle

G86.1 G86.1 G86.1 Fine boring cycle

G87 G87 G87 Back boring cycle

G88 G88 G88 Boring cycle

G89 G89 G89 Boring cycle

G90 G77 G20 Cutting cycle A

G92 G78 G21 Thread cutting cycle

G94 G79 G24 Cutting cycle B

G96 G96 G96 Constant surface speed control

G97 G97 G97 Constant surface speed control cancel

G98 G94 G?4 Feed per minute

G99 ! G95 G95 Feed per revolution

I
j G90 G90 Absolute command
/

- 32 -
 G code system
-P-T----r--

-
(Note)

_
-_-.
----
-_-__
____
_.._
-__-
________
-.----
_____
__- Meaning

I
G91 G91 Incremental command

G98 G98 Canned cycle initial level return

G99 G99 Canned cycle R point level return

Note) G code system A or B is selected

_ by setting bits GSC and GSB of
parameter 2400 (basic function).
G code system C is provided as an option. G code system A or B can
still be selected even when this function is supported.
In this manual, each function is explained using G code system B.

- 33 -
3. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS

3.1 Positioning (GOO)

The tool path can be selected by setting of the parameter LRP (No. 14 @ #4)
- Linear interpolation type positioning
Tool path is the same as linear interpolation (G01). Positioning is done in a
speed which allows the minimum positioning time without exceeding rapid
traverse rate of each axis.
- Non linear interpolation type positioning
Positioning is done with each axis separately.
Tool path generally does not become a line.

43 Start piont
.(( '/
/
0
00
Ly'
W/H
-- ------ Non linear interpolation
End point type positioning
Linear interpolation
type positioning

It is decelerated, to a stop at the end point, and inposition check is performed

(checks whether the machine has come to the specified position).
Width of imposition can be set by the parameter.
Format
GOOP--;
wheren--: Combination of optional axis address (of X, Y, X, A, B, C) as
X-Y-Z-A- ...
This manual uses this notation hereinafter.
;o End of block (LF in IS0 code
l

CR in ETA code)
This mark method is used in this manual.

3.2 Linear 1nterpolation (GOT)

Linear interpolation is done with tangential direction feed rate specified by

the F code.
Format
GO1 p-- F-0;
where F: Feed rate

X axis
End point
(,300,150)

G01G90X20O.Z150.F200;

i
Start point

-Z axis

- 34 -
3.3 Circular Interpolation (GO& G03)

Circular interpolation of optional angle from 0 to 360 can be specified.

GOP Clockwise (CL?) circular interpolation
G03: Counterclockwise (CCW) circular interpolation

Feed rate of the tangential direction takes the speed specified by the F code.
Planes to perform circular interpolation is specified by G17, G18, G19,
Circular interpolation can be performed not only on the X, Y, and 2 axis but
also on the parallel axes of the X, Y, and 2 axes.
G17: Xp-Yp plane Xp: X axis or its parallel axis
G18: Zp-Xp plane Yp: Y axis or its parallel axis
G19: Yp-Zp plane Zp: Z axis or its parallel axis
Parameter (No. 1022) is set to decide which parallel axis of the X, Y, 2 axes
to be the additional axis.

Format

Xp_ Yp_ I_ J_ F_; Xp-Yp plane

zp_ xp_ I_ K_ F_; ‘PnxP Plane

G19{$t}Yp_ Zp_ J_ K_ F_; Yp-Zp plane

where I , J , K
v
: Distance of the X, Y, Z axes fron the start point to the
center of thecircle.

End point (x, Y) End point (z, x) End point (y, z)

X

t
z
Start point , Start point

Center fix

- 35 -
3.4 Hypott!etical Axis Interpolation (G07)

Format

G07aO; Hypothetical axis setting.

G07al; Hypothetical axis cancell.

where a; one of controlled axis address

Hypothetical axis interpolation can be used for the following applications:

1) Sine function change of moving speed

Pulse distribution with one axis for circular are interpolation as the
hypothetical axis allows the moving speed of the rest of one axis to change
as a sine function.

Example)
G07YO; . . . . . . . ..~ob*~~~~~~~e~~oo~@~ Determines the Y-axis as the
hypothetical axis.
G91G02G17X30.OYOR15.OF50; •o*~~e~*e Changes the feed rate on the X-axis as a
sine function.
G07Yl; b~a~e~oe**eo~a~a~~*~~~~~~**~ Cancels the Y-axis as the hypothetical
axis.

X-axis feed rate

t

I Time

- 36 -
2) Fraction lead threading

The Z-axis (the axis with the largest move distance) for threading is
determined as the hvpothetical
r' axis to enable threading of the fraction
lead.

Example)
G07XO; . . . . . . . ..~~~*~~~o~~~~~~*~b*~ Determines the X-axis as the
hypothetical axis.
G91G33X1181.1022100.0F100; l .*o.oe* The Z-axis lead is expressed by the
following formula.
G07X1; . . . . . . . ..~b~*~~~~~.~~~~**~~~ Cancels the X-axis as the hypothetical
axis.

Z-axis lead = 100 x 100.0/1181.102 + 8.4666

- 37 -
3.5 Cylindrical Interpolation (G07.1)

When the form on the expanded side view of a cylinder (form on the cylindrical
coordinate system) is commanded by a program command, the NC converts the form
into a linear axis movement and a rotary axis movement, then performs a contour
control. This feature is called the cylindrical interpolation.

Cylinder interpolation is commanded with G07.1.

G07.1 (Name of Rotary axis) Radius value of cylinder;

Cylindrical interpolation mode

G07.1 (Name of Rotary axis) 0;

Cancellation mode of cylindrical interpolation

1) Cylindrical interpolation mode

Cylindrical interpolation is made between the rotary axis specified in the
block of G07.1 and the other optional linear axis.
Command of circle interpolation can be made as well as linear interpolation,
during cylindrical interpolation mode.
Also, absolute command and incremental command can be made. Furthermore,
tool nose radius compensation can be added to the program command.
Cylindrical interpolation is made for the path after tool nose radius
compensation.
Feed rate gives the tangential speed on the expanded plane of the cylinder
with F.
2) Cancellation mode of cylindrical interpolation
G07.1 (Name of Rotary axis) 0:
Cancellation mode of cylindrical interpolation is made when commanded as
above.
3) An example of a program

00001 (CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION) ;

Nl GO0 G90 2100.0 CO ;
N2 GO1 G18 ZO CO ;
h’3 G7.1 C57299 ;
N4 GO1 G42 2120.0 DO1 F250 ;
N5 C40.0 ;
N6 GO2 290.0 c60.0 R30.0 ;
N7 GO1 270.0 ;
N8 GO3 z60.0 C70.0 R10.0 ;
N9 GO1 C150.0 ;
NlO GO3 270.0 C190.0 R75.0 ;
Nil GO1 2110.0 C230.0 ;
N12 GO2 2120.0 C270.0 R75.0 ;
N13 GO1 C360.0 ;
N14 G40 2100.0 ;
N15 G07.1 CO ;
N16 M30 ;
Fig. 3.5 (a)

- 38 -
 _C
40 60 360 deg

Fig. 3.5 (b)

3.6 Polar Coordinate Interpolation~(GlZ.1, G13.1)

The function in which contour control is done in converting the command

programmed in a Cartesian coordinate system to the movement of a linear axis
(movement of a tool) and the movement of a rotray axis (rotation of a workpiece)
is the polar coordinate interpolation. It is an effective function when a
straight line groove is cut on the outer diameter of a workpiece in the lathe
having control axes, X, 2 and C, or when a cam shaft is ground. Whether the
polar coordinate interpolation is done or not is commanded by a G code.
G12.1: Polar coordinate interpolation mode (Polar coordinate interpolation
shall be done.)
G13.1: Polar coordinate interpolation cancel mode (Polar coordinate
interpolation is not done.)
These a G codes shall be commanded in a single block.

Polar coordinate interpolation mode (12.1)

The axes (linear axis and rotary axis) on which polar coordinate
interpolation is done are set beforehand by parameters (No. 1032, 1033)
Change the mode to polar coordinate interpolation mode by commanding G12.1,
and a plane (hereinafter referred to as polar coordinate interpolation
plane) is selected in which linear axis is made to the first axis of the
plane, and virtual axis being a right angle with the linear axis is made to
the second axis of the plane. Ploar coordinate interpolation is carried out
on this plane.
In the polar coordinate interpolation mode, the command' of linear
interpolation (GO0 and circular interpolation (GO& G03) possible. And
both absolute command (G90) and incremental command (G91) are possible.

- 39 -
For program command it iS possible to aPPJy tool nose radius
compensation.
For the path after tool nose radius compensation is done, polar coordinate
interpolation can he made.
As for feedrate, specif) the tangential speed (reJ.ati\respeed between the
workpiece and the tool) on the polar coordinate interpolation plane
(Cartesian coordinate system) with F.
Polar coordinate interpolation cancel mode (G13.1)
The polar coordinate interpolation cancel mode is obtained by G13.1 command.
Example of a program
Polar coordinate interpolation by X axis (Linear axis) and C axis (Rotary
axis)

Fig. 3.6

- 40 -
(X axis is diameter programming and C axis is radius programming)

00001;
.
NO;0 TO101
l

N1;)0G90 GO0 2120.0 CO Z ; Positioning to the starting posi.tion

N200 G12.1; Starting polar coordinate interpolation

NZOl G42 GO1 X40.0 F- ;

N202 C10.0;

N203 GO3 X20.0 C20.0 R10.0;

N204 GO1 X-40.0;

N205 c-10.0; Contour program

N206 GO3 X-20.0 C-20.0 110.0 KO; (Program in Cartesian coordinate

system of X-C plane)
N207 GOI X40.0;

N208 G40 X120.0;

N210 G13.1; Canceling polar coordinate interpolation

N300 z- ;

N400 X- C- ;

M30;

3.7 Involute Interpolation

With the following command, the involute curve machining can be performed. An
approximate involute curve with a minute straight line or arc is not needed.
Therefore, the programming becomes simple and reduces the tape length. The
distribution of the pulse will not be interrupted during the continuous minute
block high speed operation, so fast, smooth involute curve machining is
possible.

Format

G17 Xp--Yp--I--J--R--F--; Xp - Yp plane

G18 Zp--Xp--K--I--R--F--; Zp - Xp plane

G19 Yp--Zp--J--K--R--F--; Yp - Zp plane

G02.2 : Clockwise involute interpolation

G03.2 : Counterclockwise involute interpolation
Xp, YP, Zp : End point coordinate value
I, J, K : Distance to the center of the basic circle of the
involute curve from start point.
R .. Radius of basic circle
F .. Feedrate

- 41 -
Start po

point

Fig. 3.7(a) Clockwise involute interpolation Fig. 3.7(b) Counterclockwise involute interpolation

The commanded involute curve can be subject to tool nose radius compensation.
The intersecting point vector of a straight line or circular arc and an involute
curve is obtained and the offset involute curve is interpolated.

Involute curve
after offset

mmand
raight line
Offset vector

Fig. 3.7(c) Tool nose radius compensation and involute interpolation

3.8 Spline interpolation

Spline interpolation is prepared for machining of spline curve passing a

specific dot-string. A smooth curve passing a dot-string can be machined with
this function.
The spline curve obtained by spline interpolation has the following
characteristics.

i> The spline curve passes through all command points.

ii) The curves of the connecting line vector before and after, coincides at
all command points except for start point and end,point.
iii) The curvature before and after coincided with the command point except
for start point and end point.

- 42 -
GO6.1 Y
X ---em-----
2 I J K P Q R F ;

x : Mantissa of the X-axis component of primary differential vector at

start point.
Y: Mantissa of the S-axis component of primary differential vector at
start point
z: Mantissa of the Z-axis component of primary differential vector at
start point
I: Mantissa of the X-axis component of secondary differential vector at
start point.
Jr Mantissa of the Y-axis component of secondary differential vector at
start point.
K: Mantissa of the Z-axis component of secondary differential vector at
start point.
P: Exponent of X-axis component of primary and secondary differential
vectors.
Q .. Exponent of Y-axis component of primary and secondary differential
vectors.
R: Exponent of Z-axis component of primary and secondary differential
vectors.
F: Feedrate

Example)
GO1 X Y 2 F; (PO)
G06.1 X-Y-Z-I-J
x-y_Z-;----_--- K P Q R F ;
(PI)
x-y-z-; 02)
X-Y-Z-; (p3)
x-y-z-; @4)
X-Y-Z-; (p5)
GO0 x-y-z-;
---

- 43 -
4. THREAD CUTTING

4.1 Equal Lead Thread Cutting (G33) (With G Code System A: G32

By feeding the tool synchronizing with the spindle ro ation, thread cutting of
the specified lead is performed. Specify lead of the long axis direction with
the F code.

Least command increment Lead command range

0.01 0.0001 - 5000.0000 mm/rev

I 0.001 Klrn T 0.00001 - 500.00000 mm/rev/

Metric input I 0.0001 mm I 0.000001 - 50.000000 mm/rev I

I 0.00001 mm I 0.0000001 - 5.0000000 mm/rev I

I 0.000001 mm I 0.00000001 - 0.50000000 mm/rev---I
0.001 inch 0.00001 - 500.00000 inch/rev

0.0001 inch 0.000001 - 50.000000 inch/rev

Inch input 0.00001 inch 0.0000001 - 5.0000000 inch/rev
0.000001 inch 0.00000001 - 0.50000000 inch/rev
0.0000001 mm 0.00000001 - 0.5000000 inch/rev

The spindle must be equipped with a position coder. Thread cutting strat
position (the strating point of the thread cutting, synchronizing with the
spindle rotation) can be shifted. This is useful when cutting multiple thread.
Specify the desired angle with Q.
Format

G33 IP F Q ;
where? - ?Lead of the long axis
Q_ : Shift angle of thread cutting start position (0 - 360)
Note 1) Leads exceeding the cutting feed speed when converted to per minute feed
speed cannot be specified.
Note 2) For thread cutting, the gear ratio of the spindle and the position coder
must be l:l, 1:2, 1:4.

4.2 Inch Thread Cutting (G33) (With G Code System A: G32)

By specifying threads per inch of the long axis by the E code, inch thread
cuttting is performed. Thread cutting start position can be shifted.
Format
G33 II’- E- Q- ;
where E- : Threads per inch of the long axis

Note) Whether to specify threads number per inch by E code or specify precise
leads, can be selected by parameters.

- 44 -
4.3 Variable Lead Thread Cutting (G34)

Variable lead thread cutting can be done by commanding long axis direction lead
and lead increase/decrease per spindle rotation. Start point of thread cutting
can also be shifted.
Format

G34 I!’ FK Q;
whereF axis direction lead at start point
-Lo%
K-:
- Lead increase/decrease per spindle rotati on
Q_ : Shift angle of thread cutting start position (0 - 360 deg)
Comman d value range of 1ead increase/decrease (K) per spin.dle rotation:

Metric input -100.000 - +l.oo.ooomm

Inch input -10.0000 - +lO.OOOO inch

4.4 Circular Thread Cutting (G35 G36)

Circular thread cutting in which long axis leads can be specified is possible
with this command. Start point of thread cutting can also be shifted.
Format

x-m
z F-- Q ;

where G35: Clockwise circular thread cutting

G36: Counterclockwise circulr thread cutting
F: Leads in long axis direction
Q: Shift angle of thread cutting start position (0 - 360 deg)
Others same as circular interpolation.

4.5 Continuous Thread Cutting

Continuous thread cutting in which thread cutting command block is continuously

commanded is available. As it is controlled so that the spindle synchronism
shift (occurred when shifting from one block to another) is kept to a minimum,
special threads like threads which leads or shape change during the cycle can
also be cut.

G33
\ .
G33

_- 45 -
4.6 Thread Cutting Cycle Retract

When feed hold is commanded during thread cutting cycle by G76 or G78, the tool
rapidly relieves to the cycle tbtart point, like in the final chamfering of the
thread cutting cycle. Thread cutting cycle restarts by cycle start command.

--.---- - ---__-..__- -___.--- -

r____----- --.- ---

: Rapid t TiIVC‘TSC

--_--- Mow with feed hold

’ ,, ChilII f‘erring
t
\.,I
b

.,.,

Without this function, if feed hold is commanded during thread cutting, it

returns and stops at the position where thread cutting circle was started‘after
thread cutting is ended.

- 46 -
5. FEEDFUNCTIONS

5.1 Rapid Traverse

Positioning of each axis is done in rapid motion by the positioning command

(GOO). There is no need to program rapid traverse rate, because the rates are
set in the parameter (per axis).

Least command increment Rapid traverse rate range

0.01 40 - 2400000 mm/min, deg/min

0.001 mm 4- 240000 mm/min, deg/min

Metric system 0.0001 mm 0.4 - 24000 mm/min, deg/min
machine
0.00001 mm 0.04 - 2400 mm/min, deg/min

0.000001 mm 0.004 - 1000 mm/min, deg/min

0.001 inch 4 - 240000 inch/min

0.0001 inch 0.4 - 24000 inch/min

Inch system 0.00001 inch 0.04 - 2400 inch/min
machine
0.000001 inch 0.004 - 240 inch/min

0.0000001 inch 0.0004 - 100 inch/min

5.2 Cutting Feed Rate

Feed speed of linear interpolation (GOI), and circular interpolation (GO& G03)
are commanded with numbers after the F code.

5.2.1 Tangential speedconstant control

In cutting feed, it is controlled so that speed of the tangential direction is

always the same commanded speed.

5.2.2 Cutting feed rate clamp

Cutting feed rate upper limit can be set by the parameter (No. 1422) of each
axis. If the actual cutting feed rate (feed rate with override) is commanded
exceeding the upper limit, it is clamped to a speed not exceeding the upper
limit that value.

- 47 -
52.3 Per minute feed (G94) (With G code system A: G98)

With the per minute feed mode G94, tool feed rate per minute is directly
commanded by numerical value after F.

Least command
Cutting feed rate range
increment
~~
I 0.01 I ~~~
0.0001 - 2400000 mm/min, deg/min
0.001 mm 0.0001 - 240000 mm/min, deg/min
Metric machine
metric input/ 0.0001 mm 0.0001 - 100000 mm/min, deg/min
0.00001 mm 0.0001 - 10000 mm/min, deg/min
0.000001 mm 0.0001 - 1000 mm/min, deg/min

I 0.001 inch 0.00001 - 240000 inch/min

0.0001 inch 0.00001 - 100000 inch/min
Inch machine
inch input/ 0.00001 inch 0.00001 - 10000 inch/min
0.000001 inch 0.00001 - 1000 inch/min

I 0.0000001 inch I 0.00001 - 100 inch/min

0.01 0.0001 - 2400000 mm/min, deg/min
0.001 mm l 0.0001 - 240000 mm/min, deg/min
Metric input/ 0.0001 mm 0.0001 - 100000 mm/min, deg/min
inch machine
0.00001 mm 0.0001 - 10000 mm/min, deg/min
0.000001 mm 0.0001 - 1000 mm/min, deg/min
0.001 inch 0.00001 - 96000 inch/min
0.0001 inch 0.00001 - 9600 inch/min
Inch input/
metric machine I 0.00001 inch 0.00001 - 4000 inch/min

0.000001 inch 0.00001 - 400 inch/min

0.0000001 inch 0.00001 - 40 inch/min

The above feed rates are limits according to the CNC's interpolation capacity
when high-resolution interface is equipped. When the whole system is
considered, there are also limits according to the servo system. For details,
refer to appendix 1.
.
52.4 Per rev’olution feed (G95) (With G code system A: G99)

With the per revolution feed mode G95, tool feed rate per revolution of the
spindle is directly commanded by numeral after F. A position coder must be
mounted on the spindle.

- 48 -
 I Least command increment I Cutting feed rate range
~~ p--mm1
I 0.01 mm or deg I 0.0001 - 5000.0000 mm/rev or deg/rev I

I 0.001 mm or deg
I
0.00001 - 500.00000 mm/rev or deg/rev I
I 0.0001 mm or deg I 0.000001 - 50.000000 ~~-
-1
mm/rev or deg/rev

I 0.00001 mm or deg I 0.0000001 - 5.0000000 mm/rev or deg/rev I

I 0.000001 mm or deg I
0.00000001 - 0.5OOOOOOO mm/rev or inch/rev

I 0.001 inch I
0.00001 - 500.00000 inch/rev 1
0.0001 inch 0.000001 - 50.000000 inch/rev
1
I 0.00001 inch I 0.0000001 - 5.0000000 inch/rev I

I ~~ 0.000001 inch I
0.00000001 - O.50000000 inch/rev

I 0.0000001 inch I 0.00000001 - 0.05000000 inch/rev -1

~~~

The above feed rates are limits according to the NC’s interpolation capacity.
When the whole system is considered there are also limits according to the servo
system.

5.3 Override

5.3.1 Feed rate override

The per minute feed (G94) and per rotation feed (G95) can be overridden by: 0 to
254% (per every 1%).
Feed rate override cannot be applied to functions as thread cutting and tapping
in which override is inhibited.
5.3.2 Second feed rate override

All cutting feed rate can be overrideen by: 0 to 254% (per every IX). A second
override can be performed on feed rates once overridden. No override can be
performed on functions as thread cutting and tapping in which override is
inhibited.
This function is used for controlling feed rate in adaptive control, etc.

5.3.3 Second feedrate override B

This function selects the second feedrate override in the range from 0 to
655.34 with 0.01% increments.

53.4 Rapid traverse override

Rapid traverse rate can be overridden by:

FO, Fl, 50, 100%.
FO: A constant speed per axis can be set by parameter (No. 1421)
Fl: A constant % can be set by parameter (No. 1412)

5.3.5 Function for overriding the rapid traverse feedrate in 1% units

This function overrides the rapid traverse feedrate with a value (1% units)
entered from the machine operator's panel in the range from 0% to 100%.
By specifying the ROV8 bit of parameter 1402, the override selected by this

- 49 -
function can be switched to and from the standard override for the rapid
traverse feedrate (FO, Fn, SO%, 100%).

5.3.6 Override cancel

Feed rate override and the second feed rate override can be clamped to 100% by a
signal from the machine side.

5.4 Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration

Acceleration and deceleration is performed when starting and ending movement,

resulting in smooth start and stop. Automatic acceleration/deceleration is also
performed when feed rate changes, so change in speed is also smoothly done.
Rapid traverse: Linear acceleration/deceleration (time constant is parameter set
per axis)
Cutting feed : Exponential acceleration/deceleration (time constant iS
parameter set common to all axes)
Jogging : Exponential acceleration/deceleration (time constant is
parameter set per axis)

Rap
d traverse

lera tion/dece leration

constant
Speed

JOG feed _.
Jog feed rate

Jog feed time constant

Spee d
Low feed rate after
deceleration

_
3

Feed, Dry run

Feed rate

Acceleratioxl/deceleration
time constant

5.5 Acceleration/Deceleration before Cutting Feed Interpolation

In response to the cutting feed command, the feedrate before interpolation, that
is, the command feedrate can be directly accelerated/decelerated. This enables
a machined shape error caused by the delay of acceleration/deceleration to be
eliminated. However, the deceleration command (G09) needs to be given to the
block requiring deceleration such as a corner by the program.

- 50 -
 l Exponential acceleration/deceleration after feed interpolation
Interpolation
Acceleration/deceleration control
f 1 (pulse distribution) f 1

I *fls-t-1 0
Servo
control Motor’

t
I \
Ic

OLinear acceleration/deceleration after feed interpolation

OLinear acceleration/deceleration before feed interpolation

f!

El
Servo
cl- control

5.6 Linear Acceleration/Deceleration after Cutting Feed Interpolation

Speed

Time
t-i T
C

Fig. 5.6 (a)

In the linear acceleration/deceleration, the delay for the command caused by

the acceleration/deceleration becomes l/Z compared with that in exponential
acceleration/deceleration, substantially reducing the time required for
acceleration and deceleration.
Also, the radius direction error in the circular interpolation caused by the
acceleration/deceleration is substantially reduced.

Ar: Maximum value of radius error (mm)

Command path
v: Feedrate (mm/set)
r: Circular radius (mm)
T1: Acceleration/deceleration time
constant (set)
T,: Time constant of servo motor (set)
c

--
X

Fig. 5.6 (b)

- 51 -
The maximum value of error in this radius direction is obtained approximately
by the following equation.

Ar= ( ;T12+ 32; l2 . . . . . For exponential acceleration/deceleration

r

2
Ar = (&I~+ ;T2; !! .**.a For linear acceleration/deceleration after cutting
r feed interpolation

Consequently, in case of the linear acceleration/deceleration after

interpolation, if an error caused by the servo loop time constant is excluded,
the radius directional error will be reduced to l/12, compared with the
exponential acceleration/deceleration.

5.7 Bell-shaped Acceleration/Deceleration after Cutting Feed Interpolation

Feedrate

Fig. 5.7

AS shown above
in the quadratic curve, it is possible to accelerate and
decelerate the cutting feedrate.
When the acceleration and deceleration section are connected, the composed
curve shapes just like a hanging bell. That is why this kind of acceleration/
deceleration is called bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration.
Considering a time constant as Tc (time spent to accelerate from feedrate 0 up
to commanded feedrate F or time spent to decelerate from commanded feedrate F
down to feedrate 0), feedrate accelerates up to 1/2 of the commanded feedrate
(F/2) for l/2 of the time constant (Tc/2). The acceleration/deceleration curve
OA shown in the figure above can be expressed by the following equation:

f(t) = + t2
TC

The curve AR and OA are symmetric with respect to point A.

The feature of this acceleration/deceleration is that the feedrate change is
small near feedrate 0 and the commanded feedrate.

5.8 Bell-shaped Acceleration/Deceleration after Rapid Traverse Interpolation

The function for bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration after rapid traverse

interpolation increases or decreases the rapid traverse feedrate smoothly.
This reduces the shock to the machine system due to changing acceleration when

- 52 -
the feedrate is changed.
As compared with linear acceleration/deceleration, bell-shaped acceleration/
deceleration allows smaller time constants to be set, reducing the time
required for acceleration/deceleration.

Linear acceleration/ Bell-s haped acceleration/

deceleration for rapid traverse deceleration for rapid traverse
A A
0
2
3
?

L
I I ’ Time
I I I
I I I
I I I
I I I
I I I
I I I
l I I
I I
I I
I I
I <
Time

5.9 Acceleration/Deceleration Function for the Constant Speed Specified by the PMC Axis
Control Function

This function accelerates and decelerates the machining feedrate to maintain

the speed specified by the PMC axis control function throughout the cutting
process.
This function linearly accelerates and decelerates the tool to ensure smooth
operation during the entire cutting process. Also, when the feedrate changes
in the middle of the cutting process, this function automatically accelerates
or decelerates the speed to prevent irregular tool movement.

PMC BMI CNC

Axis Axis control block Axis control

(rotation axis)
eontrol data signal

_:_
Constant Acceleration/ _ Servo _
Constant Constant speed speed deceleration control
speed command control control l

A-
command Rotation speed data
Axis control data
Signal
When this signal turns on,
monitoring
stop Speed command the constant speed rotation
i
command skip signal discontinues.

Fig. 5.9 Block Diagram of System Operation When the Constant Speed Is Specified

- 53 -
5.10 Exact Stop (G09)

Move command in blocks commanded with GO9 decelerates at the end point, and
inposition check is performed. GO9 command is not necessary for deceleration at
the end point for positioning and inposition check is also done automatically.
This function is used when sharp edges are required for workpiece corners in
cutting feed.

5.11 Exact Stop Mode (G61)

When G61 is commanded, deceleration of cutting feed command at the end point and
inposition check are performed per block thereafter. This G61 is valid till G64
(cutting mode) or G62 (automatic corner override) is commanded.

5.12 Cutti.ng/Rapid Traverse Position Check Function

In a block in which a positioning block or an exact stop command is specified,

such as a cutting feed block, the cutting speed is decelerated at the end of
the block to perform the position check. The cutting/rapid traverse position
check function allows the operator to set the effective area size. Using this
function, a small effective area can be specified for cutting feed blocks
requiring accuracy and a large effective area can be specified for positioning
blocks requiring a shorter positioning time.

5.13 Cutting Mode (G64)

When G64 is commanded, deceleration at the end point of each block thereafter is
not performed and cutting goes on to the next block. This command is valid till
G61 (exact stop mode) or G62 (automatic corner override) is commanded.

5.14 Automatic Corner Override (G62)

When G62 is commanded during tool nose R compensation, cutting feed rate is
automatically overridden at corner. The cutting quantity per unit time of the
corner is thus controlled not to increase. This G62 is valid till G61 (exact
stop mode) or G64 (cutting mode) is commanded.

5.15 Dwell (G04)

With the GO4 command, shifting to the next block can be delayed. When commanded
with a per minute feed mode (G94), shifting to the next block can be delayed for
the commanded minutes.
When commanded with a per rotation feed mode (G95), shifting to the next block
can be delayed till the spindle rotates for the commanded times. Dwell may
always be performed by time irrespective of G94 and G95 by parameter selection.

Format
Per second dwell
f-P 7
G94 GO4
KC- 1;
c -J

P- or X- : Dwell time commanded in seconds (0.001 - 99999.999 set)

Per revolution dwell

- : Spindle rotation angle commanded in rev. (0.001 -

99999.999 rev)

- 54 -
6. REFERENCE POINT

6.1 Manual Reference Point Return

Positioning to the reference point can be done by manual operation. With

jogging mode (J), manual reference point return (ZRN) signals, and signal for
selecting manual reference point return axis (+ Jl to + 56) on, the tool begins
to move at rapid traverse mode. When deceleration 1iGt switch mounted on the
machine is turned on, it decelerates, and when it is turned off again, it stops
at the first grid point, and reference point return end lamp lights. This point
is the reference point. By performing manual reference point return, the
machine coordinate system and the work coordinate system are established. There
are the following two methods to perform manual reference point- return:

1) Grid method
A certain grid of the position detector is appointed as the reference point.
The reference point position can be shifted by the grid shift function.
2) Magne-switch method
The rise point of the proximity switch on the machine is appointed as the
reference point.

6.2 Automatic Reference Point Return (G28, G29)

1) Return to reference point (G28)

With the G28 command, the commanded axis is positioned to the reference
point via the commanded point. After positioning, the reference point
return end lamp lights.
If G28 was commanded when reference point return is not performed after
power on, reference point return is done in the same sequence as the manual
reference point return.
Format
G28~ - ;
II?__ ; command intermediate point

2) Return from reference point (G29)

With the G29 command, the commanded axis is positioned to the point commanded
by G29, via the intermediate point commanded by G28.
Format

_ Reference point

001 change was

at R.

Intermediate As seen from the above

example, the programmer
need not calculate a
concrete movement value
from the intermediate
point to the reference
point.

- 55 -
6.3 Reference Point Return Check (G27)

This function is used to check whether the reference point return command was
performed correctly.
With the G27 command, the commanded axis is positioned to the specified
position, reference point return end lamp lights if reference point return is
performed to the correct position, and alarm arises if it is not positioned
correclty to the reference point. This function is available after power is
turned on and reference point return is performed.
Format
G27J'- ;

6.4 Znd, 3rd and 4th Reference Point Return (G30)

With the G3O command, the commanded axis is positioned to the 2nd, 3rd, or the
4th reference point, via the commanded point.
2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference point return lamp lights when positioning ends.
Set the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th reference point position as parameters.
This function is available after power is turned on and reference point return
is performed.
G29 can be used to return from the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th reference point (same as
reference point return, G28).
Format

P2, P3, P4: Select from 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference points.
If not selected, 2nd reference point return is automatically
selected.

6.5 Floating Reference Point Return (G30.1)

It is possible to return the tool to the floating reference point by commanding

the G30.1.
The floating reference point is located on the machine and can be a reference
position of some sort of machine operation. It is not always a fixed position
but may vary in some cases. The floating reference point can be set using the
soft keys of MD1 and can be memorized even if the power is turned off.
In general, tools can be replaced on any position of lathe where there is no
contact with works and tailstocks. However, in order to reduce cycle time, it
is best to replace tools at the location which is not far away from the works.
For this purpose, tool replacement position must be changed for each work shape
and this feature can be easily realized by this function. Namely, the tool
replacement position which is suitable for works can be memorized as the
floating reference point and it is possible to return the tool to the tool
replacement position easily by commanding the G30;l.

- 56 -
Format
G30.1 II’_;

, however IP_;It is the intermediate point to the floating reference point and is
commanded by an absolute value or an incremental value.
When the G30.1 is commanded, the axis commanded is set to the intermediate point
with rapid traverse at first and then is set to the floati.ng reference point
from the intermediate point with rapid traverse. The positioning to the
intermediate point or to the floating point is performed at rapid traverse for
each axis (non-linear positioning).
When the BMI interface is used, the floating reference point return completion
signal is output after completing the floating reference point return.

ference *

Fig. 6.5 Operation with G30.‘l X40.0 250.0 ;

6.6 Digital Adjustment of Origin Deceleration Limit

When adjusting a deceleration dog, the user should be able to adequately match
an electrical grid point with the machine zero point. When the automatic
reference position setting function is used, the grid shift and software
deceleration dog amount can be set automatically by moving from a grid point
where a stop is to take place, to the machine zero point. This movement is
made by turning on and off the automatic reference position setting signals
(RASTl, RASTZ, RAST3, . ..> and by using manual pulse generator).
In reference position return, the grid shift and software deceleration dog
function as fo1lows:
When reference position return is performed, the tool stops at the position
where the first grid signal was detected after the limit switch of the
deceleration dog was passed.
This position is the electrical stop position. It must match the machine zero
point.

[With no grid shift]

Direction of reference position return

1
Deceleration dog Stopped LMachine zero point
1 C9

Grid point 3 =$ =------+

Shifted by grid shift

- 57 -
TO match the electrical stop position with the machine zero point, a grid shift
is set automatically. From the electrical stop position, the grid point can be
shifted by +1/2 of a grid point interval.
[After a grid shift is set]

Direction of reference position return

Limit switch c e
ki

>DecEierafiondogj Stopped Machine zero point

0

Grid point 3 Z =
Furthermore, a software deceleration dog is automatically set (software
extension of the deceleration dog). The software deceleration dog can be used
to match the electrical stop position with the machine zero point by turning
off the deceleration dog’ l/2 of grid point interval from the machine zero
point.

[After a grid shift and software deceleration dog are setI

Direction of rcfcrcncc position return
Limit switch o o
,cz Stopped
l
1
Deceleration dog Softwzlrc dccclcration dog
Machine zero point
1 0

Grid point - S
l/2 of the grid
point intcfVc?l

6.7 Dog-Less Reference Position Setting

In diameter/radius programming, the DXAx bit (bit 3 of parameter 1006)

specifies whether to use diameter or radius programming for each controlled
axis. With this function, the G code can switGh between diameter and radius
programming for axis commands.

- 58 -
7. COORDINATE SYSTEMS

7.1 Machine Coordinate System (G53)

Machine coordinate system is a coordinate system set with a zero point proper to
the machine system. A coordinate system in which the reference point becomes
the parameter--preset coordinate value when manual reference point return is
performed, is set.
with G53 command, the machine coordinate system is selected and the axis is
moved in rapid traverse to the position expressed by the machine coordinates.
Format
G531r ;

7.2 Work Coordinate System (G54 to G59)

A coordinate system in which the zero point is set to a fixed point on the
workpiece, to make programming simple. When actually machining, distance
between machine coordinates' zero point and work coordinates' zero point is
measured and set as workpiece zero point offset quantity via MDI.
6 types of work coordinates can be set and selected with:G54 - G59.
format

7.3 Local Coordinate System (G52)

With G52 commanded, the local coordinate system with the commanded position as
zero point can be set. Coordinates once set is valid till a new G52 is
commanded. This is used when, for example, programming a part of the workpiece
becomes easier if there is a zero point besides the work coordinates' zero
point.
Format
G521r- ;

- 59 -
 .'4Jork zero po.int:
coordinate
offset value L
system)
-/- -41 y
C- / (Work coordinate
Value set by system 6: G59)
-

ne coordinate system)

Reference point

When local_ coordinate system is set, local coordinate system 1 - 6,

corresponding to work coordinate system 1 - 6 is set. Distance between zero
points are all the same preset value. If G52 PO; is commanded, local coordinate
system is cancelled.

7.4 Work Coordinates Systems Change (G92) (With G Code System A: G50)

With the G92 P ; command, work coordinate system can be changed so that current
position of thrtool becomes the specified position.

X X’

16 tion

If G92XlOOZlOO; is commanded when the tool is positioned at (ZOO, 160) is G54

mode, work coordinate system 1 (X' - 2') displaced by vector A is created. At
the same time, work coordinate system with the G92 command, since it is
determined so that a certain point of the tool becomes a certain coordinate
value, the new work coordinate system can be determined irrespective of the old
work coordinate system. If the G92 command is used to determine a start point
for machining based on workpieces, a new coordinate system can be created even
if there is an error in the old work coordinate system.

- 60 -
7.5 Work Origin Offset Value Change (Programmable Data Input) (GlO)

Six work coordinate systems can be set. nut, when that is still not enough, or
when work zero point offset quantity must be set by tape or changed, this GlO
command is used to change work zero point offsets.
When G10 is commanded in absolute command (G?O), the command work zero point
offsets becomes the new work zero point offsets, and when GlO is commanded in
incremental command (G91), the currently set work zero point offsets plus the
commanded work zero point offsets becomes the new work offsets.
Format
G10 L2 PpIf? ;

PP :Specify work coordinates to which offsets are changed P:l - 6

II? : Work zero point offset value

7.6 Work Coordinate System Preset (G92.1) (With G Code System A: G50.3)

The work coordinate system with its zero position away by the work zero offset
amount from the machine coordinate system zero position is set by returning the
tool to the reference point by a manual operation. Also, when the absolute
position detector is provided, the work coordinate system is automatically set
by reading the machine coordinate value from the detector when power on without
performing manual reference point return operation. The set work coordinate may
shift by any of the following commands or operations:
a) When manual interruption is performed with the manual absolute signal off
b) When the travel command is performed by the machine lock
c) When axis travel is performed bv~ the handle interrupt or auto/manual
simultaneous operation
d) When operation is performed by mirror image
e) When the setting of local coordinate system is performed by the G52 or
change of work coordinate system is performed by the G92
f) When origin setting of work coordinate system is performed by the MD1
operation

The work coordinate system shifted by the above operation can be preset by the G
code instruction or MD1 operation the same as conventional manual reference
point return.
1) Work coordinate system preset by G code command
The work coordinate system can be preset by commanding G92.1.
Format
G92.1 IPO;
IPO: The axis address to be preset the work coordinate system
Uncommanded axis is not preset.
2) Work coordinate system preset by MD1 operation
The work coordinate system can be preset by the MD1 operation with soft keys.

- 61 -
8. COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION

8.1 Absolute and Incremental Programming (G90, G91)

There are two ways to command travels to the axes; the absolute command, and the
incremental commad.. In the absolute command, coordinate value of the end point
is programmed; in the incremental command, move distance of the axis itself is
programmed.
G90 and G91 are used to command absolute or incremental command.
G90: Absolute command
G91: Incremental command
X
End Doint

Start point
I

I 1
I

I I
I I
I I
z
40.0 100.0

For the above figure, incremental command programming results in:

G91X40.0&60.0;
while absolute command programming results in:
G90X70.OZ40.0;

Absolute/incremental command, when G code system A (Refer to the item of G

function) is selected, is not distinguished by G90/G91 but is distinguished by
the address word.
f l

Absolute command Incremental command Notes

U X axis move command

W 2 axis move command

V Y axis move command

H C axis move command

Example)
X w:
T CIncremental command (Z axis move command)
-Absolute command (X axis move command)

- 62 -
8.2 Inch/Metric Conversion (GZO, WI)

Conversion of inch and metric input can be commanded by a G code command.

GZO: Inch input
G21: Metric Input
Whether the output is in inch system or metric system is parameter-set when the
machine is installed.
Command GZO, G21 at the head of the program. Inch/metric conversion can also be
done by MD1 settting. The contents of setting data differs depending on whether
G20 or G21 is commanded.

8.3 Decimal Point Input/Pocket Calculatok Type Decimal Point Input

Numerals can be unput with decimal points. Decimal points can be used basically
in numerals with units of distance, speed, and angle. The position of the
decimal point is at the mm, inch, deg position.
Use parameters to select input method; whether to input by pocket calculator
type input, or by the former type decimal point input.

Pocket calculator type Former type

Program command
decimal point input decimal point input

Xl000 1000 mm 1 mm(For IS-B)

x1000. 1000 mm 1000 mm

8.4 Diameter and Radius Programming

Since the work cross section is usually circular in lathes, its dimensions can
be specified in two ways in NC programming:

X axis

Z axis

When the diameter is specified, it is called diameter programming, and when the
radius is specified, it is called radius programming.
The diameter programming or radius programming can be selected by parameter for
each axis.

8.5 Function for Switching between Diameter and Radius Programming

In diameter/radius programming, the DIAx bit (bit 3 of parameter 1006)

specifies whether to use diameter or radius programming for each controlled
axis. With this function, the G code can switch between diameter and radius
programming for axis commands.

- 63 -
9. SPINDLE FUNCTIONS

9.1 S Code Output

The spindle speed is commanded in a 8-digit numeral. with sign after the address
s.
The signed &digit numeral is output in 32-bit binary code. Minus numbers are
expressed in two's complement. This code is kept till the next S code is
commanded. Maximum input digits and use of the minus sign is commanded by
parameters.

9.2 Spindle Speed Binary code Output (At only FS6 interface)

The commanded spindle speed is output in 160bit binary code. For constant
surface speed control (CSSC), the spindle speed after the CSSC is output. This
code is kept till the next S code is commanded, if it is not under constant
surface speed control.

9.3 Spindle Speed Analog Output

When output voltage to the spindle motor is input with sign + 130bit binary
codes, an analog voltage corresponding to the input is output.
Maximum output voltage: + 1OV

9.4 Constant Surface Speed Control (G96, G97)

Command G96 or G97 for constant surface speed control.

G96: Constant surface speed control on
G97: Constant surface speed control off
When constant surface speed control is on, directly commanding surface speed I
with an S code, spindle speeds which make surface speed constant accordirlg to
the changes of tool positions (when absolute coordinate value in the work
coordinates is regarded as the radius), are output in binary codes.
Command surface speed in m/min unit for metric input, and feet/min unit for inch
input. Commandable range is as follows:
- Without decimal point
1 - 999999 m/min or feet/min
- With decimal point
0.01 - 999999.99 m/min or feet/min
When constant sirface speed control is off, spindle speed shall be commanded
with an S code.
When constant surface speed control is on, a constant surface speed control on
signai is output.
Command which axis to perform constant surface speed control with address P in
the G96 block. If P is omitted, an axis set by a parameter is regarded as the
constant surface speed controlled axis.
Pl: X axis P2: Y axis P3: 2 axis
P7: A axis P8: B axis P9: C axis

9.5 Spindle Speed Clamp (G92)

G92S ;
s-;
Maximum spindle speed (unit:rpm)
Maximum spindle speed is set with the above command. The maximum spindle speed
set is output in 16-bit binary code. It is necessary'
_ to clamp the spindle speed
at the PMC side according to the maximum spindle speed output.

- 64 -
9.6 Actual Spindle Speed Output

Actual spidle speed calculated by the return pulses of the position coder on the
spindle is output in 160bit binary code.

9.7 Spindle Positioning

The spindle positioning can be done by the spindle motor, without adding an
extra servo motor for the C axis.
The spindle position is detected by the position coder attached to the spindle
fot the per rotation feed and the thread cutting functions. The spindle motor
speed is output from the spindle speed analog output circuit. It is not
necessary to add new hardwares to the NC for spindle positioning. Whether to
use the spindle motor for spindle rotation (spindle rotation mode) is commanded
by special M codes (set by parameters).

1) Move command
When commanded: GO0 C ; ,
The spindle is positioned to the commanded position by rapid traverse.
Both absolute (G90) and incremental (G91) command is possible.
The decimal point programming is also possible.

2) Increment system
Least increment system: 0.001 deg
Detection unit: (360xN)/4096 deg.
N: Combination ratio of position coder and spindle (N=1,2,4)

9.8 Spindle Speed Fluctuation Detection (G25, G26)

This function monitor spindle speed, detects a higher level of fluctuation than
the commanded speed and signals an abnormality, if any, to the machine side,
using an alarm, thereby preventing the spindle from seizure, for example.
Whether the spindle speed fluctuation detection is done or not is specified by G
code.
G25: Spindle speed fluctuation detection is off.
G26: Spindle speed fluctuation detection is on.
Format
G26P 0 R D :
P :y& fro;Fthe change of spindle speed to the start of the spindle speed
fluctuation detection (Unit: msec)
Q_ : The ratio of spindle speed to the specified spindle speed where spindle
speed fluctuation detection starts (Units: rpm)
R ; Fluctuation ratio regarded as an alarm (Unit: X)
D-;
- Fluctuation ratio which regarded as an alarm (Unit: rpm)

Note 1) The value of P, Q, R and D remains after the power off.

Note 2) The actual spindle speed is calculated by the return pulses generated
from the position coder attached to the spindle.

- 65 -
There are two ways in generating an alarm:
An alarm is generated before the specified spindle speed reaches.
An alram is generated after the specified spindl.e speed reaches.

1) When an alarm is generated after the spindle speed becomes the commanded
speed.

Spindle speed

_ Commanded
speed

Actu al speed

CHECK NO CHECK CHECK

I Time
----
Another speed Check Alarm
Actual speed
is commanded start

Commanded speed: (Speed commanded by S) x (Spindle override)

Actual speed: Speed detected by position coder
q= Allowable rate for starting checkup
r: Fluctuation rate in which an alarm is given
d: Fluctuation width in which an alarm is given

- 66 -
2) When an alarm is generated before the spindle speed becomes the commanded
speed.

Spindle speed

Commanded
speed

P
Actual
spindle speed

CHECK NO CHECK CHECK

Time

Another speed Check Alarm

is commanded start

P: Time between changes in commanded speed and check start.

9.9 Spindle Serial Output

The spindle serial output function is used to control the serial interface
spindles. Information is transferred between the CNC and serial interface
spindle through an optical fiber cable. This enables the transfer of large
quantities of information at high speed, further enabling functions such as Cs
contour control and spindle synchronization.

Up to two serial interface spindles can be controlled. Note, however, that

some functions listed in the table below cannot be used for the secondspindle.

- 67 -
 150TB/TFB l+TTB/TTFB
1st 2nd 1st 2nd

Speed control (S command) 0 0 ,o (*2) 0 (x"2)

Thread cutting, per rotation feed 0 0 Pl) 0 (gc2) 0 F2)

Cs contour control 0 X 0 (*3) 0 PC31

Spindle orientation 0 0 0 0

Spindle output switching 0 0 0 0

Spindle synchronization 0 0
C-axis control switching X 0

Spindle control switching 0 0

Actual spindle speed output 0 X 0 0

Rigid tapping 0 X 0 0
Spindle positioning 0 X 0 X
.
0 0 l Can be used X: Cannot be used

Functions marked * are provided as options.

*l The spindle control switching function is necessary.

*2 The first spindle of the first tool post can be controlled. The second
spindle of the second tool post can be controlled. To control the second
spindle on the first tool post or the first spindle on the second tool post,
the spindle control switching function is necessary.

*3 The first spindle of the first tool post can be controlled. The second
spindle of the second tool post can be controlled. To control the second
spindle on the first tool post or the first spindle on the second tool post,
the C-axis control switching function is necessary.

9.10 Cs Contour Control

This function enables interpolation, such as linear interpolation and circular

interpolation, between a serial interface spindle and servo axis. You can
perform grooving or front notching on a cylindrical cam by using this function
in combination with cylindrical interpolation or polar coordinate inter-
polation.

9.11 Spindle Orientation (with Position Coder)

You can perform spindle orientation simply by mounting a position coder on the
spindle. Stoppers or pins for physically stopping the spindle at a specified
position are not necessary. A spindle can be instantly oriented, even when
rotating at high speed, thereby greatly reducing the orientation time.

9.12 Spindle Output Switching

The FANUC AC spindle servo unit S series, developed for output switching,
feature a spindle motor with two sets of coils. LOW speed or high speed can be
selected by switching the coil set.

- 68 -
9.13 Spindle Synchronization

This function synchronizes two spindles in the following cases:

- When passing a workpiece, held on the first spindle, to the second spindle
while the spindles are rotating

- When accelerating or decelerating two spindles, both holding the same

workpiece

- When passing a workpiece of a complex shape

9.14 C-Axis Control Switching (Only for 15TTB/TTFB)

This function is used to switch the Cs axis controlled by each tool post, by
issuing command on a machine with two tool posts and two spindles that can be
used as the Cs axis. Each tool post can thereby use either spindle as the Cs
axis.

9.15 Spindle Control Switching

(1) For 15TB/TFB

This function enables thread cutting, per rotation feed, and spindle speed
display functions for the second serial spindle also.

(2) For 15TTB/TTFB

This function is used to switch the spindle controlled by each tool post, by
issuing a command on a machine with two tool posts and two spindles. Each tool
post can thereby use either spindle. To use the spindles as a Cs axis on both
tool posts, the C-axis control switching function described in the previous
section is necessary.

- 69 -
70. TOOL FUNCTIONS

10.1 T Code Output

Selection of tools and offset amounts can be done by commanding tool numbers and
offset numbers with an a-digit numeral with signs after address T. The offset
number is specified with the last one or two1 digits of the T code. The tool
number is specified with the remaining digits after excluding the one or two
digits used to specify the offset number.
When the last one digit is used t0 specify the offset number:

TOOOOOOO 0
-Offset number
-Tool number

When the last two digits are used to specify the offset number:

TOOOOOO 80
-Offset number
L Tool number

When the last three digits are used to specify the offset number:

TOO000 000
'1‘ xflii;~; number

The tool number is output in a 3%bit binary code. Negative numbers are
expressed in two's complement. This code is kept till the next T code is
commanded. Maximum input digits and use of the minus sign is set by parameters.

lo.2 Tool Life Management

Tools are classified into groups, and tool life (hours and times of use) is set
for each group. When use of the tool exceeds the preset hours or times of use,
another tool in the same group which has not yet exceeded the preset life time
is selected, If all the tool in a group exceeds the preset life time, a signal
is output to inform the operator that the tools must be changed to new tools.
With use of this function Factory Automation (FA) comes to a reach.
This function has the following features:

1) Tool life can be set in hours or times of use.

2) New tool select signal output

This signal is output when a new tool is selected in a group. This can also
be used for automatic measurement in compensations of the new tools.

3) Tool change signal

When all the tools of a group has exceeded their life time, this signal is
output to inform the operator.

4) Tool skip signal

By inputting this signal, tools still not exceeding their life time, can
also be changed.

- 70 -
5) Tool life management data is display/modified
.
All tool life management data is displayed
. on the CRT screen, informing the
operator of the condition of the tools at a single view. If necessary, the
data can be modified via the MD1 panel.
Number of groups and number of tools per group is selected by parameter from
the following.

I Number of groups I Number of tools

16 16

32 8

64 4

Note) When this function is equipped, the part program storage length becomes
shorter by a approximately 6m.

IO.3 . Turret Axis Control

A turret is indexed and controlled by the servo motor using a controlled axis of'
NC.
The clamp/unclamp of the turret is also controlled.
The turret indexing is simultaneously done with the travel (positioning, linear
interpolation, circular interpolation) of other axes.
When a T code followed by a tool number is specified, the turret is indexed in a
shorter path.
The turret indexing is made at rapid traverse.
If the reference point return of the turret axis is once done, since the turret
position is always stored in the nonvolatile memory thereafter, no reference
point return is required at the time of power on, if the turret position did not'
move mechanically while power off.
The currently selected tool number is displayed on position display.
The machine position of the turret axis can be set to the parameter
corresponding to each tool number.

Tu
Motor Amp.

CNC

- 71 -
11. MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS

11.1 Miscellaneous Functions

When a signed 8-digit number after addreee M is commanded, a 32-bit binary code
is output. The minus number is expressed in a two's complement. This code is
kept till the next M code is output. Specify whether or not to use maximum
input digits and minus sign with parameters.
This function is used for on/off control at the machine side. A single M code
can be commanded in one block. The following M codes are decoded and output:
MOO: Program stop
MOl: Optional stop
MO2: End of program
M30: End of program and tape rewind
The above M codes can also be output in binary codes.
M98 (sub program call) and M99 (return from sub program) are always processed in
the NC, therefore no signal will not be output.

11.2 Second Auxilisry ‘Functions

When a signed 8-digit number after address B is commanded, a 320bit binary code
is output. The minus number is expressed in a two's complement. This code is
kept till the next B code is commanded. Specify whether or not to use maximum
input digits and minus sign with parameters.
This function is used for on/off control at the machine side. A single B code
can be commanded in one block. By parameter setting, C can also be used in
place of address B. However, the same address as the control axes cannot be
used.

11.3 High-speed M/S/T/B Interface .

The communication of execution command signal (strobe signal) and completion

signal in the M/S/T/B function were simplified to realize a high-speed execution
of M/S/T/B function.

The time required

* for cutting can be minimized by speeding up the execution time
ot M/S/T/B function.

The following describes an example of auxiliary function M code command. The

same applies to the T, S, and B (second auxiliary function) functions.

If there is an M command, the NC side inverses the logic level of strobe signal
MF. Namely, low signal is converted to high signal, while high singnal is
converted to low signal. After the NC side inverses the signal MF, it is
considered that the operation of PMC side has been completed if the logic level
of completion signal FIN from the PMC is the same as that of the signal MF.

In the conventional system, if the leading edge (from LOW to HIGH) of the
completion signal FIN of M/S/T/B is received and then the trailing edge (from
HIGH to LOW) of the signal FIN is received, it is considered that the operation
has been completed. However, in this system, the operation is considered to
have been completed by a single change of signal FIN.

- 72 -
Example
Ml0 ;
M20 ;

M command Mxx

Code signal

Strobe signal MF

Operation at PMC side

M function completion
signal MFIN

Fig. 11.3 (a) High-Speed System Time Chart

M command Mxx Ml0 M20

Code signal

Strobe signal MF I 1 I 1,

Operation at PMC side I I I

I I I I
Completion signal FIN

Fig. 1 I .3 (b) Conventional System Time Chart

Note 1) Either the conventional system or the high-speed system can be selected
for communication of strobe signal and completion signal.
Note 2) The high-speed system is valid only for the basic machine interface
(BMI). It cannot be used for the F3 and F6 interfaces.
Note 3) In the conventional system, only one completion signal is available for
all functions of M/S/T/B. However, in the high-speed system, one
completion signal is available for each of M/S/T/B functions.

11.4 l-block Plural M Command

Up to five M codes can be simultaneously specified in one block.

This permits simultaneous machine operations corresponding to these M codes,
reducing the machining cycle time compared with the conventional l-block single
M command.

- 73 -
Example i) l-block single M command
M40;
F150;
M60;
G28G91XOYOzO;

Example ii) l-block plural M command

M40M50M60;
GZBG91XOYOZO

Note 1) The maximum input value of the first M code is +99999999, while the
maximum input values of the M codes from the se&d to fifth M codes
are +9999.
Note 2) A stlobe signal is provided for each of the first to fifth M codes (MF,
MF2, MF3, MF4 and MF5).
When all the operations for the first to fifth M codes are completed,
completion signal FIN is output.

- 74 -
12. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION

12.1 Program Number

A program number is given to each program to distinguish a program from other

programs. The program number is given at the head of each program, with a
4-digit number after the address 0.
Program number of the program currently under execution is always displayed on
the CRT screen. Program search of programs registered in the memory is done
with the program number. The program number can be used in various other ways.

12.2 Program Name

A program name can be given to the program to distinguish the program from other
programs when displaying all the registered program on a screen. Register the
name between the control-out and the control-in.
Any codes usable in the NC can be used for the program name.
The program name is displayed with the program number in the directory display
of registered programs. Note that the program name displayed is within 16
characters.
Example)
01234 (PROGRAM FOR ATC);

12.3 Program Name (48 Characters)

A program name can be extended to 48 characters.

1) Directory display of program names

Program names can be displayed on the directory screen of program using a
maximum of 48 characters.

/
-‘----:=
_ .-=. . ‘.EE: ClF I :I
09103 N00000-

=DEE PAGES : 6487( 1186M1 FREE FILES : 9c

Example of display for 140inch CRT

2) Program search by program name from PMC

A program search can be made by program name through the PMC window.

- 75 -
12.4 Main Program

A program is divided into the main program and the sub program. The NC normally
operates according to the main program, but when a command calling a sub program
is encountered in the main program, control is passed to the sub program. When
a command indicating to return to the main program is encountered in the sub
program, control is returned to the main program.

12.5 Sub Program

When there are fixed sequences or frequently repeated pattern in a program,

programming can be simplified by entering these pattern as sub programs to the
memory. Sub Program is called by M98, and M99 commands return from the sub
program. The sub program can be nested 4 folds.
Format
Sub program call
M98P L :
-p-: Program number of sub program to be called
L-: How many times to repeat the sub program
Return fromsub program
M99;

Main program Sub program Sub program Sub program Sub program

00001; 01000;

M98P2000;
/I 02000; 03000;

M98P4000;
04000;

/
M78PlOOO;
‘\ . M98P3000;
4
\
\
\
M30;
\
\
M99; \ \ M99'9 M99; M99;

I-loop nesting Z-loop nesting 3-loop nesting 4-100~ nesting

12.6 Sequence Number

Sequence number can be given in a S-digit number after the address N at the head
of the program block.
The sequence number of the program under execution is always displayed on the
CRT screen. The sequence number can also be searched in the program by the
sequence number search function.

12.7 Tape Codes

Either the EIA or the IS0 code can be used as tape code. The input program code
is distinguished with the first end of block code (EIA:CR, 1SO:LF).
See the List of Tape Codes for tape codes used.

- 76 -
12.8 Basic Addresses and Command Value Range

Function Address Metric input Inch input

Program number 0 l- 9999 l- 9999

Sequence number N 1 - 99999 l- 99999
Preparatory G 0 - 99 0 - 99
functions
Dimension words k999999.99bnmordeg) -+99999.999
IS-A x,y,WW, k99999.999 rfi9999.9999
IS-B W,A,B,C,I, k9999.9999 -t999.99999
IS-C JJAQ k9999.99999 +999.999999
IS-D
Per minute feed
unit IS-A 0.0001 - 2400000.0 0.0001 - 240000.00
I
mm/min inch/min
IS-B 0.0001 - 240000.00 0.0001 - 100000.00
mm/min inch/min
IS-C F 0.0001 - 100000.00 0.0001 - 10000.000
mm/min inch/min
IS-D 0.0001 - 10000.000 0.0001 - 1000.0000
mm/min inch/min
IS-E 0.0001 - 1000.0000 0.0001 - 100.00000
mm/min inch/min
Per revolution
feed IS-A 0.0001 - 5000.0000 0.00001 - 500.00000
mm/min inch/rev
IS-B 0.00001 - 500.0000 0.000001 - 50.000000
mm/min inch/rev
IS-C F 0.000001 - 50.000000 0.0000001 - 5.0000000
mm/min inch/rev
IS-D 0.0000001 - 5.0000000 0.00000001 - 0.50000000
mm/min inch/rev
IS-E 0.00000001 - 0.50000000 0.00000001 - 0.05000000
mm/min inch/rev

Thread cutting F Same as per revolution Same as per revolution

lead feed feed
Tool functions T O- 99999999 O- 99999999
Spindle S +99999999 k99999999
functions
Miscellaneous M O- 99999999 O- 99999999
functions
2nd auxiliary B,A,C zt99999999 1499999999
functions
Sequence P, Q 1 - 99999 l- 99999
numbers
Per second P, x O- 99999.999 set O- 99999.999 set
dwell
Per rotation P, x O- 99999.998 rev O- 99999.999 rev
dwell
Repeated times L O- 9999 O- 9999

Note 1) : can be used for 0 in IS0 Code.

Note 2) Coordinates maximum command value for inch input/metric output is
limited to:
+39370.078
- inch/+3937.0078
- inch/+393.70078
- inch

- 77 -
12.9 Tape Format

The variable block word address format with decimal point is adopted as tape
format. See List of Tape Format in Appendix 3 for details on tape formats.

12.10 Label Skip

Label skip function becomes valid in the following cases, and "LSK" is displayed
on the CRT screen.

I) When power is put on.

2) When the NC is reset.
When label skip function is in valid, all codes to the first encoutered end
of block (EOB) code are ignored.
The ignored part is called "Reader part", and section after the first end of
block (EOB) code, "significant information".

12.11 Control-i n/Control-Out

Information between the control-in and the control-out are regarded as notes and
are ignored.
The reset codes (IS0 code: %, EIA code: ER) cannot be used in this part.
The ignored part is called "Notes".

IS0 code EIA code

Control-out ( Channel 2-4-5 on

Control-in ) Channel 2-4-7 on

4 1

12.12 Optional Block Skip

When a slash and number (/n) is programmed at the head of a program, and when
the machine is operated with the optional block skip switch n on the machine
operator's panel on, information in the block commanded with the /n
corresponding to the switch number n is ignored.
If the optional block skip switch n is turned off, information in a block with
/n will not be ignored. The block with /n commanded can be skipped by the
operator's selection.
I can be used for n. The 1 of /1 can be omitted.
Example"
/l N12345 GO0 X100.2100.;

12.13 Additional Optional Block Skip

2 to 9 can also the used for the n of the /n.

- 78 -
13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING

13.1 Canned Cycles for Turning

The following three kinds of canned cycle are provided.

13.1.1 Cutting cycle A (G77) (With G code system A: NO)

1) The command below actuates a straight cutting cycle.

G77X-_- 2 F ;
R: Rapid traverse
F: Feed

3(F)
i z
(x---,2--)

2) The command below actuates a taper cutting cycle.

G77X --WV
2 I F ;

R: Rapid travers
F: Feed

4 03
c

3(F)
1(R)i

In the above figure, if the direction of the path 1 is negative in X axis, the
sign of the number following address I is negative. If the sign is reversed,
the reversed taper is cut.

- 79 -
13.12 Thread cutting cycle (G78) (With G code system A: G92)

1) The command below actuates a straight thread cutting cycle.

G78X --- Z F ;
R: Rapid traverse
I?: Thread cutting
r: Chamfering amount
(parameter)
4 (R) \
. X

1 (R)
I- z

2) The command below actuates a tapered thread cutting cycle.

G78X -n-s2 I F ;

R: Rapid traverse
F: Thread cutting
r: Chamfering amount
(parameter)

AP
L- Z

13.1.3 Turning cycle in facing (G79) (With G code system A: G94)

1) The command below actuates a face cutting cycle.

G79X --- 2 F ;

Rt Rapid traverse
F: Feed

1 Z

- 80 -
2) The command below actuates a face tapered cutting cycle.

G79X v---2 K F ;

Q R: Rapid tranverse
1 (R) F: Feed

4 (R)‘I X

3(F) I

In the above figure, if the direction of the path 1 is negative in 2 axis,

the sign of the number following address K is negative.

13.2 Multiple Repetitive Cycles for

. Turning (G70 - G76)

A multiple repetitive cycle is composed of several canned cycles. A tool path

for rough machining, for example, is determined automatically by giving the data
of the finishing work shape. A thread cutting cycle has also been prepared.

132.1 Stock removal in turning (G71)

If a finishing shape of A to A' to B is given in the figure below, machining is

done with the cutting depth Ad and the finishing allowance AU/Z and AW.

I
Ad

d: Parameter

- 81 -
The command is as follows.
(ns) (nf) (AU) (Aw) (Ad) (F) (S)
G71P --P-P--Q U W D F S ;
b>
N(ns) . . . . .
..... .
F- The move command between A and B are specified between sequence
number ns and nf.

Nnf)
P : Sequence number of cycle start. (d
Q .. Sequence number of cycle end. (nf)
u: The relief distance and direction along X axis (AU)
w: The relief distance and direction along 2 axis (AW)
D: Cutting depth (Ad) (specifies without sign)

G96s (constant surface speed control on) and G97s (constant surface speed
control off) in the blocks of move commands from A to B are ignored. A G96 or a
G97 commanded in the same block as G71 or before is effective. The following
four patterns are given depending on the sign of AU and AW as in the figure
below. All of these cutting cycles are made paralled to 2 axis.

A +x

B: u(+)*-• w(+)-•

A'
L-
interpolation are
i-z
0th linear and circular

is possible even
are many pockets.

Any shape is permitted in the tool path between A to A'. The path A' to B must
not steadily increase or decrease and is permitted that there are many pockets.
The cut start face needs not be perpendicular. Any shape is permitted. Both
linear and circular interpolation are possible in the path A' to B.
This function is effective only in memory mode.

- 82 -
The diagram below shows an example of cutting path when there are two pockets.
32
l-

2 axis motion command (including moving amount 0) in the block (cycle start
block) specified by P decides the method of chamfering.

When 2 axis motion command exists: Chamfer along the shape of workpiece
Wnen 2 axis motion command does not exist: Chamfer in 45 deg. direction

d (Set by parameter)
/

45O d (Set by parameter)

% :--
Chamfer along the shape of workpiece Chamfer in 45" direction

Cutting depth (Ad) can be overridden in the range of 1 to 255% in increments of

1%.
An override value is set from the MD1 or a dial on the machine operator's panel.

- 83 -
13.22 Stock removal in facing (G72)

G72P (ns) Q (nf) U (AU) W (AW) D (Ad) f (f) S (s);

As shown in the figure below, this cycle is the same as G71 except that cutting
is made parallel to X-axis.

Tool path

d: Parameter setting

Tape command

For the shape to be cut by G72, the following four patterns are considered. Any
of them is cut by repetition of operation parallel to the X axis of the tool.
The signs of AU and AW are as follows:

“i u(_)...w(-) . . .. ..

.--‘;‘---:.
Both linear and circular
A’ A’ interpolation are
A A
possible.
A A

7
A' A’ It is possible even
there are many pockets.

u(+)*- w(+)-•*
B
This function is effective only in memory mode.

- 84 -
132.3 Finishing cycle (G70)

After rough machining with G71, G72 or G73 the following command actuates
finishing.
N G70P (hs) Q (nf);
PFSequence number of cycle start (ns)
Q: Sequence number of cycle end (nf)

Note) F and S codes specified in the block of G71, G72 or G73 are ignored. But F
and S codes specified in the blocks from sequence numbers (ns) to (nf)
become effective
The function is effective only in memory mode.

13.24 Pattern repeating (G73)

This function permits cutting a fixed cutting pattern repeatedly with the
position being displaced bit by bit. By this cutting cycle, it is possible to
efficiently cut the work whose rough shape has already been made by rough
machining, forging, or casting, etc.

of A’ to B
ed by (Ad> *

-- ----

The sequence of commands is as follows.

A C D E .a. N
The ZGndisas follows.
b> (nf> (i> (k) (AU) (AW> (Ad) (f) (d (t>
G73P --------
Q I K U W D F S-- T ;

N(ns) . . . . .
•~.~o*~~o*; Move commands between A and N are specified in these blocks.
The movement command for ns to nf is done.
N(nf) . . . . .

- 85 -
 P: Sequence number (ns) at canned cycle start
(2: Sequence number (nf) at canned cycle end
I: Distance and direction of relief in the X axis direction.(i)
K: Distance and direction of relief in the 2 axis direction.(k)
U: Finishing allowance for the X axis direction.(N)
W: Finishing allowance for the 2 axis direction.
D: The division number.(Ad)

F,S,T: Any F, S and T functions contained in the blocks between sequence No.
(ns) and (nf) are ignored; however the F, S and T functions in this G73
block are effective.
This function is effective only in memory mode.

13.2.5 Peck drilling in Z-axis (G74)

The following command permits operation as seen in the figure below. Chip
breaking is possible in this cycle. Also if both X(U) and I are omitted, the
machining is done only in the Z-axis resulting in peck drilling.

c k’ _ - k _~ k _ k

A [ O<k’ck )

!3
i
R
/( It-R 1
I
I
C I
03 (F) (F) (F) 03 I i
I 1
I
i
I I
I
I I I

\
[O<i’ZG )
(X-J-) B

The command is as follows:

G74 X-- 2 I (i) K (k) F- D (d);
I: Cutting depth in X direction (without sign) (i).
K: Cutting depth in 2 direction (without sign) (k).
D: Relief amount at the cutting bottom (d).
(0 is assumed when D does not exist) D shall be specified by a positive
value.
F: Feedrate
Return amount can be set thirough MD1 keyboard.

- 86 -
132.6 Grooving in X-axis (G75)

The following tape command permits operation as seen in the figure below. This
is equivalent to G74 except that X is replaced by 2. Chip breaking is possible
in this cycle. Grooving in the X-axis (in this case, 2, W and K are omitted) is
possible.

t
7 R: Rapid traverse

1
-7
F: Feed

Ret urn amount

--____
_

/ d-
(x-,z--> ._k.. __.

The command is as follows:

G75 X 2 I (i) K (k) F D (d);
Both G74xn';i-the G75 are ucd for grooving and drilling and permits the tool to
relief automatically. Four symmetrical patterns are available. Return amount
can be set via the MD1 keyboard.

132.7 Thread cutting cycle (G76)

A thread cutting cycle as shown below can be made.

G76X -- 2 I (i) K (k) D (d) F---A P ;

Eo

c
Workpiece'
I

- 87 -
 I: Difference in thread radius (i). If i=O, ordinary straight thread cutting
can be performed
K: Height of thread (k)
D: Cutting depth for 1st cut (d)
A: Angle of tool tip (Angle of thread)
r: Chamfering (set parameter)
F: Feedrate

The screw thread angle is commanded freely. When the angle (A) is commanded
with decimal point, it is specified every 0.001'. Without decimal point, it is
specified every lo.
There are 4 kinds of cutting method. They are specified by address P as
follows.
PI: Cutting amount constant, single edge cutting
P2: Cutting amount constant, both edge cutting
P3: Cutting depth constant, single edge cutting
P4: Cuttung depth constant, both edge cutting

Tool top
&

Id

- 88 -
 Tool top

Cutting amount constant, both edge cutting (PZ)

Tool top

W-L
B6
O<D'ID

Cutting depth constant, single edge cutting (P3)

- 89 -
 Tool top
/

Cutting depth constant, both edge cutting (P4)

- 90 -
13.3 Canned Cycles for Drilling (G83.1, G84.1, G86.1, G80 -G89, G98, G99)

Canned cycle for drilling is a function to simplify command fot machining

(boring, -drilling, or tapping, etc.).
The canned cycle for dirilling has the positioning plane and the dirlling axis.
The positioning plane is specified with the plane selection of G17, G18, or G19.
The drilling axis is the basic axis (that does not compose the positioning
plane) or its parallel axis.

G code Positioning plane Drilling axis

G17 XpYp plane ZP

G18 ZpXp plane YP

I G19 YpZp plane XP

Xp: X axis or its parallel axis

Yp: Y axis or its parallel axis
zp: Z axis or its parallel axis

The drilling axis address commanded in the same block as the G codes, G80 - G89,
decides whether the drilling axis is the basic axis or its parallel axis.
If the drilling axis address was not commanded, the basic axis becomes the
drilling axis.
Axis other than the drilling axis becomes the positioning axis.
Example)
G17G81 oooo Z ; Drilling axis is Z axis.
l

G18G81 oooo Y-; Drilling axis is Y axis.

l

G19G81 oooo X-; Drilling axis is X axis.

l

It is not always necessary to command G17, G18, G19 in the same block as G80
- G89.

Note 1) Z axis can always be appointed the drilling axis by parameter setting.

Positioning can be commanded with optional axes other than the drilling axis.
The drilling cycle starts after the positioning.
The following explanations are done on the XY plane, and Z axis as the drilling
axis.
The following 12 types of canned cycles for drilling are available.

- 91 -
G code Operation Function

G98 mode G99 mode

1
) I I

G83.1 Peck drilling

cycle (Note)

File boring
cycle (for
canned cycle II

Drilling cycle
(spot drilling)

Drilling cycle
(counter boring)

R Peck drilling
G83 1 R
cycle (Note)

II

I -1
Tapping cycle
Spindle
R Spindle
(~84.1 is CCW
G84.1 j forward fomard
tapping cycle)
zi
Spindle reverse Spindle reverse

- 92 -
 1

code Operation Function

~_-~-- ~__-__-.---~_-.-- -c____ __

!5 aGg81'-i i' ]FA;i; Boring cycle

.A
-
I - I Spindle ,
\ forward
/
R Spindle R
$6 forwnrd Boring cycle
z il zi 1
Spindle stop Spindle stop

i Canned I I
cycle I
’(Note 2) \
--P
Spindle R
?
forward \ Boring cycle
Spindle
ii
i2 1
forward
z
Spindle stop Spindle stop

Canned
cycle IIOSS pL_1
(Note 2) -o=D
c=l
G99 mode cannot be
oss 1 used in canned cycle Back boring
z * G87 (Canned cycle II) cycle

R i* I Spindle
forward

I I
\ Spindle Spindle
-7 forward
R forward
R
Boring cycle
Spindle stop
z P
Spindle stop , 7 z 1
id E

I -I

/ Boring cycle
@' j
v’ I
I

._~~.... Cutting feed 6& .* 0 Oriented spindle stop

l l

Cao*** Rapid traverse (Spindle stops at constant

- a*..* Manual feed L \ rotation position)
.. . .. Dwell T . . . . . Initial point
@
z ..*.* 2 point (Hole bottom ; . . . . . R point
position)

Note 1) "d" of G83 and G83.1 is set by parameters.

Note 2) Set parameter whether to use signals (SRV, SSP) independent of the
output signals from the NC (canned cycle I), or to use the M code
(canned cycle II) for spindle CCW rotation and spindle stop.

- 93 -
When the drilling axis is Z axis, machining data in the canned cycle is
commanded as follows:

GxxX Y 2
v---mm-- R Q P L F ;

Drilling mode Gxx ....a See previous table.

Drilling position data
x, y . . . Command position of the hole. (Positioning command)
l l

z . . . . Specify hole end position shown in the previous table.

0

R ...o* Specify R point position shown in the previous table.

Q ....a Specify cutting quantity with G83, G83.1, and shift quantity
with G86.1, G87.
P ...o* Specify dwell time at the hole button.
L . ..*o Specify how many times to preset.
When specified LO, drilling data will be set, but not drilling
will be done.
F 0 . . . . Specify feed rate for cutting

1) R point level return (G99)

By specifying G99, return point in canned cycle is specified to R point.
The drilling point starts from the end point of the previous block. If the
previous block has ended in the initial point, it begins from the initial
point and returns to the R point.
Exampel) When G81 was commanded under G99 mode

CQ Initial point
R point
-Rapid traverse
+ Cutting feed

Note) The R point level return cannot be specified in G code system A.

2) Initial level return (G98)

By specifying G98, return point in canned cycle is specified to the initial
level. The drilling point starts from the end point of the previous block.
If the previous block has ended in the R point, it begins from the R point
and return to the initial point.
Example) When G81 was commanded under G98 mode

Initial point

4 R point

0
-
*-
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed

Note) In case 0 f G code system A, it is always the initial level return.

- 94 -
13.4 Rigid Tap (G84.2, G84.3)

In tapping, the feed amount of the Z-axis for one rotation of the spindle should
be equal to the pitch of the screw of the tapper. Namely, the folloiwng
conditions must be satisfied for optional tapping:

P = F/S
, where
P: Pitch of screw tapper (mm)
F: Feed rate of Z-axis (mm/min)
S: Spindle speed (rpm)

The rotation of the spindle and feed of the Z-axis are independently controlled
in the current tapping cycle (G84) and counter tapping cycle (G84.1).
Therefore, the above conditions may not always be satisfied. Especially at the
hole bottom, both the rotation of the spindle and feed of the Z-axis reduce the
speed and stop. After that, they move in the inverse direction while increasing
the speed. However, the above conditions may not be satisfied in general since
each acceleration/deceleration is performed independently. Therefore, in
general, the feed is compensated by mounting a spring on the inside of the
holder of the tapper to improve the accuracy of tapping.

The rotation of the spindle and feed of the Z-axis are controlled so that they
are always synchronous with each other in the rigid tapping cycle. Namely, in
other than rigid tapping, control of speed only is performed. In the rigid
tapping, however, position control is also performed during the rotation of the
spindle, that is, the rotation of the spindle and feed of the Z-axis are
controlled as linear interpolation of two axes.

This allows the following condition to also be satisfied during

acceleration/deceleration at the hole bottom and tapping of improved accuracy to
be made.

P = F/S

The rigid tapping cycle and rigid counter tapping cycle are commanded by G84.2
and G84.3, respectively.

Command format

""" /: '-- '-- R-- '_

I "-Dwell time on returning to points 2 and R

(however, when P is valid with parameter selection)
L Coordinate value of point R
Coordinate value of point 2
1 Drilling position

- 95 -
When the G84.2 or G84,3 is commanded in the feed per revolution mode (G95), the
unit of cutting feed rate F- becomes mm/rev or inch/rev. Therefore, the pitch
of the screw tap can be directly specified.

Spindle control
(voltage
calculation of
spindle speed
rpm)

* . 7

-Et
Distributed
Spindle Spindle
ml - Error counter h D/A converter - amplifier --c motor
pulse +
-
. c

r -_ L -- 7
I
i
1 Gear i
I ratio I
II
L-- --JI
1 n:m

DhlR
t
1024 pulse/rev. T
x4 -
::zion
.
*

Gear ratio of spindle to Least command increment

position coder (1: p) (detection unit) deg

1 : 1 0.088 (1x360/4096)
1 :2 0.176 (2x360/4096)
1:4 0.352 (4x360/4096)

‘Fig. 13.2 The control system of spindle during rigid tapping

Even use of the spindle motor incorporating the position coder enables rigid
tapping. In this case, the gear ratio of the spindle motor and the spindle is
set by the parameter. If, however, there are multiple gears between the spindle
motor and the spindle, i.e., if three speed gears (for high, medium, and low
speeds) are mounted between them, only one of these gears enables rigid tapping.
In addition, use of the spindle motor incorporating the position coder enables
rigid tapping but disables threading and per revolution feed.

- 96 -
13.5 Chamfering and Corner R

A chamfer or corner arc can be inserted between two blocks which intersect at a
right angle as follows. An amount of chamfering or corner arc specifies by
address I, K, or R.

Item Command Tool movement

Chamfering GO12 -b I ti ;

z-,x Q t
I
Specifies movement to point lC

b with an absolute or
". _ 4; I’ i
incremental command in the b

figure on the right. Start point f i

45O IC
1
-X

Chamfering GOlX -b K Iti ; Start point

a0
X+2 Q
Specifies movement to point Moves as a + d + c
b with an absolute or I
incremental command in the
figure on the right.

Corner R GOlZ -b R 3-r ;

I
z-,x Q
i
C
Specifies movement to point
I
b with an absolute or :gi:
Start point I
incremental command in the
C
figure on the right.
1

t
-X

Corner R +r ;
GOlX -b R w
0
x-tz 9 Start point
Specifies movement to point 0 Moves as a + d + c
b with an absolute or (For-zmovement,)
incremental command in the
-r>
figure on the right.

-r r

d
w
-zw-- I- -----+z
C b c

- 97 -
Example)

G91GOlZ-70.0;
X30.0R-10.0;
Z-50.0110.0;
X30.0K-10.0;
z-60.0;

13.6 Circular Interpolation by Radius Programming

Radius value of an arc can be directly designated, instead of using I, K; thus

simplifying programming.
For arc of 180" or more, designate a minus value to r. A whole circle cannot be
commanded.

End p
(3 *
rt point
GO~X~QRL;
Z

13.7 Programmable Mirror Image (G50.1, G51 .l)

Mirror image can be commanded on each axis by programming. Ordinary mirror

image (commanded by remote switch or setting) comes after the programmable
mirror image is applied.
1) Setting of programmable mirror image
G51.1 X-- Z--
is commanded and mirror image is commanded to each axis (as if mirror was set
on the axis).
2) Programmagle mirror image cancel
G50.1XOzo--;
is commanded and the mirror images commanded to each axis is canceled.
When shape of the workpiece is symmetric to an axis, a program for machining
the whole part can be prepared by programming a part of the workpiece using
programmable mirror image and sub program.

13.8 Mirror Image for Double Turrets (G68, G69)

Mirror image can be applied to X axis with G code.

G68: Double turret mirror image on
G69: Mirror image cancel
When G68 is designated, the coordinate system is shifted to the mating turret
symmetrical cutting.
To use this function, set the distance between the two turrets at parameter.

- 98 -
Example) Double turret programming

Offset amount of
tool post A 0
7-f-l

Offset amount + of O-
tool post B Toocost B

X40. 2180. TOlOl; l ooe*oee Position turret at a A

G68; l emeeemeeeeee*ee*eoee Shift the coordinate system by the distance to A

B (120 mm), and turn mirror image on.

X8Oe 2120, TOZO2; l oeeeeoo Position turret B at@.
G69; l ~o~eeeeeeo~~ee~ee~ee Shift the coordinate system by the distance B to
A, and turn mirror image on.
X120, Z6Oe TOlOl; l oeeoooe Position turret at@. A

13.9 Direct Drawing Dimensions Programming

Angles of straight lines, chamfering values, corner rounding values, and other
dimensional values on machining drawings can be programmed by directly inputting
these values, In addition, the chamfering and corner rounding can be inserted
between straight lines having an arbitrary angle.
For designating the chamfering and corner rounding, specify them as, C- and,
R- with a comma.

- 99 -
 Command table

Commands Movement of tool

x2 (22 ) L__;

2 %____ z3 - A2 - ;

x2 z2 9 Rl ;

X3-_- z3 ;

3 or

A1 9 q____;

X3_- z3 A2 ;

x2._ z2- Al - ;
as, 23)

~3,~ z3 - ;

4 or

A1 9 Cl ;

X3,_ z3 - A2 - ;

x2 z2 9 Rl’ ;

x3 z3 A2 ;

x4 24 ;

5 or

Al 3 Rl ;

x3_ z3 ._. A- 32 - ;

X4_-- 24 ;

- 100 -
 Commands Movement of tool
pp-_--______

X2 22 9c1 ;
X
If
X3- 23 9 c2 ;

X4- 24 ;

6 or

A1 ’ Cl ;

X3_ 23 _ A2 - 9 c2 _ ;
(Xl, 21)
-Z
X4- 24 ;

X2- 22 9 Rl ;

X3- 23 9 c2 :
:
X4- 24 ;

7 or

Al 9 Rl ;

-x3 23 A2 9 c2 ;

x4 24 -;

X2- 7J2 SC1 ; X

1

X3- Z1w_ 32 - ;
a, z4)
*
X4- 24 ;

8 or

A1 ’ Cl ;

\
X3 23 A2 9 k! I
oLZl>
Z
x4 24 ;

- 101 -
 .

13. IO Three-Dimensional Coordinate Conversion

The coordinate system can be rotated about an axis by specifying the center of
rotation, direction of the axis of rotation, and angular displacement. This
coordinate conversion function is quite useful for three-dimensional machining
using a diesinking machine. BY applying three-dimensional coordinate
conversion to a program generated for machining on the XY plane, identical
machining can be executed on a desired plane.

- 102 -
14. TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION

14.1 Tool Offset

By using this function, shift amount between the reference position assumed when
programming and the actual tool position when machining; can be set as tool
offset amount, thus allowing workpiece machining according to the programmed
size without changing the program.

H Reference position (start point)

X offset amount

2 offset amount ’

The tool offset can be commanded to X and X axes.

Setting value of offset number 1 Setting value of offset number 2

Offset path

1) Offset number
The offset number is specified in the last one, two or three digits of the T
code. Use parameters to select offset number digits (one, two or three).
When offset number is specified with one digit

TOO00000 0
'7 LOffset number I
-Tool number

- 103 -
 When offset number is speciEed with two digits

TOO0000 00
ri -Offset number
Tool number

When offset number is specified with three digits

TOO000 000
LOffset number
Tool number

When the offset number is specified, the corresponding offset amount is

selected, and tool offset strats.
When 0 is selected as offset number, the tool offset is canceled.

14.2 Tool Nose Radius Compensation (G40, (341, G42)

With this function, the programmed tool path can be offset when actually
machining, for value of the tool,radius set in the NC.
By programming machining pattern using this function (measuring cutter radius
for actual cutting, and setting the value in the NC as offset value), the tool
can machine the programmed pattern, via the offset path. There is not need to
change the program even when tool radius changes; just change the offset value.

-a ---__

1
I Tool center path

Profile

Cross points of line and line, arc and arc, line and arc is automatically
calculated in the NC to obtain offset actual tool path. So, Programming becomes
simple, because it is only necessary to program the machining pattern.

1) Tool nose radius compensation and its cancellation (G40, G41, G42)
G40: Tool nose radius compensation cancel
G41: Tool nose radius compensation left
G42: Tool nose radius compensation right
G41 and G42 are commands for tool nose radius compensation mode. The tool is
offset to the left forward in the tool movement in G42 and right forward in
G42. Tool nose radius compensation is cancelled with G40.

- 104 -
 (14 2 X axis
1

Work
. axis

2) Imaginary tool nose

The tool nose at position A in the following figure does not actually exist.
The imaginary tool nose is required because it is usually more difficult to
set the actual tool nose center to the start point than the imaginary tool
nose. (Note) Also when imaginary tool nose is used, the tool nose radius
need not be considered in programming.

\ Start point

When programmed using the tool When programmed using the

nose center imaginary tool nose

The position relationship when the

tool is set to the start point is

432
2 6 1 2 fA 1
shown in the following figure.
The point of tool nose for start 7 o 5 7 O 5

point or reference point i set in a

3 3 !!3P 4
offset memory same as tool nose 2 5 1 2 ati 1

radius compensation amount. 0 0

7 5 7 54

3 4
3 8 ' 8

@ Q?P

Setting point of tool nose

- 105 -
3) Tool nose radius compensation amount and assignment of imaginary tool nose
point (T code)
Tool nose radius compensation amount and imaginary tool nose point can be set
in the tool nose radius compensation memory.
When the last one, two or three digits of T code is commanded as offset
number, corresponding tool nose radius compensation amount and imaginary
tool nose point in the tool compensation memory is applied as the tool nose
radius compensation amount and imaginary tool nose point for cutter radius
compensation.

4) Plane selection (G17, G18, G19)

Cutter radius compensation is done on XY, 2X, YZ planes and on paralled axes
of X, Y, Z axes.
Plane to perform tool nose radius compensation is selected with G17, G18,
G19.
G17 : Xp-Yp plane XP : X axis or the parallel axis
G18 : Zp-Xp plane YP : Y axis or the parallel axis
G19 : Yp-Zp plane ZP : Z axis or the parallel axis
Parameters are used to set which paralled axis of the X, Y, Z
axes is to be the additional axis.
Plane to perform cutter radius compensation is decided in the axis address
commanded in the G17, G18, or G19 block.
Example) (A, B, C axes are parallel axes of X, Y, Z axes respectively)
G17X ; XY plane
G18B-C a
: BC plane
G19 y-c- ;
YC pla ne
If axis azrz s of XP, YP, or Zp was omitted, compensation plane is decided
regarding that X, Y, or Z was omitted.
ZX plane is selected in initial condition (power turning on or reset
condition).

5) Interference check
Tool overcutting is called 'interference'. This function checks whether
interference occurs, if tool nose radius compensation is performed.

Tool nose center path

Overcutting

- 106 -
14.3 Tool Offset Amount Memory

One of the tool offset amount memory, A/B can be selected according to offset
amount.
Tool offset amount range which can be set is as follows:

The supported range of tool compensation values can be selected by setting the
following parameter bits: ORG and OFN of 6002, OUF of 6004, and ONM of 6007.
See the table below for details.

I
L
' Geometry offset
I
I
Wear offset
I
4
ONM OUF OFN ORG Metric input Inch input Metric input Inch input
mm inch mm inch

0 0 0 1
I rt999.99 I rt99.999 I k99.99 I zk9.999 I
0 0 0 0 k999.999 -t-99.9999 k99.999 k9.9999

0 0 1 0 +-999.9999 k99.99999 zk99.9999 t-9.99999

0 1 0 0~~ k99.99999
I__ I dI9.999999 I k9.99999 I -+-0.999999 I
1 0 0 0 1-9.9999 kO.9999999 ko.999999 -+0.0999999

Note) The geometry offsets for tool-tip radius compensation are obtained by
dividing the values in rows C, D, and E by ten.

14.3. I Extended tool compensation

When the extended tool compensation option is provided, the supported range of
tool compensation values can also be selected by setting the following
parameter bits: ORG and OFN of 6002, OUF of 6004, and ONM of 6007. The tool
compensation number is, however, half the normal value. See the table below
for details.

I Geometry offset Wear offset

ONM OUF OFN ORG Metric input Inch input Metric input Inch input
inch mm inch

I 0 0 0 1
I
k9999.99
I
k999.999
I k999.99 I zk99.999 I
I 0 0 0 0
Ik9999.999 Ik999.9999 I-4999.999 I k99.9999 I
I 0 0 1 0 I Ih9999.9999 I k999.99999 I Ik999.9999 I k99.99999 I
I 0 1 0 0 I k9999.99999 I k999.999999 (k999.99999 (k99.999999 (

1 1 0 0 0 I+999.999999 Izk99.9999999 1rfr99.999999

I
1k9.9999999 1
I I 1 1 1

- 107 -
1) Tool offset amount memory A
There is no difference between geometry offset memory and tool wear offset
memory in this tool offset amount memory A. Therefore, amount of geometry
offset and tool wear offset together is set as the offset memory.

Example)

X axis Z axis Y axis Amount of Imaginary

Offset
offset offset offset tool nose tool nose
number
amount amount amount compensation number

01 10.0 100.1 0 0.5 3

I_~~-
02 20.2 1 150.3. 0 0.7 3
L

03 30.4 200.5 0 1.0 8

2) Tool offset amount memory B

Memory for geometry offset and tool wear offset is prepared separately in
tool offset amount memory B. Geometry offset and tool wear offset can thus
be set separately.

X axis
I
geometry offset
1

A- _-
L _ 00 2
--

X axis wear offset

L

Z axis wear offset

T
Z axis geometry offset

Amount Of tool. Imagi_

X axis offset Z axis offset Y axis offset
nose R
amount amount amount nary
compensation
Offset tool
number nose
Geometry Wear Geometry Wear Geometry Wear Geometry Wear
offset offset offset offset offset offset offset offset number

01 10.0 0.0 100.0 0.1 0 0 0.4 0.1 3

02 20.0 0.2 150.0 0.3 0 0 0.5 0.2 2

03 30.0 0.4 200.0 0.5 0 0 1.2 -0.2 8

I

- 108 -
14.4 Number of Tool Offsets

1) 32 tool offsets
Offset numbers 0 - 32 can be used.
2) 64 tool offsets
Offset numbers 0 - 64 can be used.
3) 160 tool offsets
The offset number which can be used is 0 - 160.
4) In case of 15TTB/F, offset numbers range from 0 to 16, from 0 to 32 or from
0 to 80 (on each tool post),

14.5 Changing of Tool Offset (Programmable Data Input) (GIO)

Tool offset amount can be set/changed with the GlO command.

Wheh G10 iS commanded absolute input the commanded offset amount
becomes the new tool offset amount. When GlO is commanded in incremental input
(G91), the current tool offset amount plus the commanded offset amount is the
new tool offset amount.
Format
Tool offset memory A
GlOLllP X 2 Y R Q ;
where P-:-Offsetnumber
x-: X axis offset amount
Z-: Z axis offset amount
Y-: Y axis offset amount
R-: Tool nose radius compensation amount
Q . Imaginary tool point
Tool offset'memory B
Setting/changing of geomzCrj: offset amount
GlOLlOP X Z Y R Q ;
Settinglchangingaftox wear offset amoun .t
GlOLllP --v-v_
X Z Y R Q ;

Note) For the compatibility of previous NC and format, Ll can be commanded

instead of Lll.

- 109 -
15. ACCURACY COMPENSATION FUNCTION

15.1 Stored Pitch Error Compensation

The errors caused by machine position, as pitch error of the feed screw, can be
compensated. This function is for better machining precision.
As the offset data are stored in the memory as parameters, compensations of dogs
and settings can be omitted. Offset intervals are set constant by parameters
(per axis). Total offset points are:
Total offset points = 128 x controlled axes.
Optional distribution to each axis can be done by parameter setting. At each
position:
Offset pulse = (-7 - +7) x (magnification)
Where Offset pulse unit is the same as detection unit
Magnification: O- 100 times, set by parameter (per axis)

15.2 Interpolating Pitch Error Compensation

The stored pitch error compensation function outputs all the compensation
pulses at each compensation point. The amount of output compensation pulses at
each point covers the interval specified with.a parameter. The interpolating
pitch error compensation function, however, outputs the compensation pulses
evenly spaced between compensation points.

15.3 The Second Cylindrical Pitch Error Compensation Method

When the rotary table is rotated using gears, pitch error can occur at two
different intervals: one coinciding with the rotation of the rotary table and
the other coinciding with the rotation of the gears that are rotating the
table. To correct the pitch error occurring in this type of device,
compensation is performed for both the table and the gears. This compensation
method is know as the secondcylindrical pitch error compensation.

When a single gear is mounted between the rotary table and the servo motor, as
in Figure 15.3(a), pitch error compensation for wheel A is performed in the
conventional manner, and compensation for wheel B is performed using the second
cylindrical pitch error compensation method.

When multiple gears are mounted, as in Figure 15.3(b), compensation for pitch
error caused by wheel A is performed in the conventional manner, and the second
cylindrical pitch error compensation method is used to correct cyclic pitch
errors occurring during the wheel A compensation interval.

Rotary table

Wheel A Wheel B

Fig. 15.3(a) Application of Second Cylindrical Pitch Error Compensation

When a Single Gear Is Mounted

- 110 -
 Rotary table

Wheel A

Fig. 153(b) Application of Second Cylindrical Pitch Error Compensation

When Multiple Gears Are Mounted

Though the text in this manual cites the case where a rotary table is used, the
second cylindrical pitch error compensation method can also be applied to error
compensation for a gear-operated linear axis.
Figure 15.3(c) shows an example of such a linear axis. In this example, error
compensation for the ball screw is performed in the conventional manner, and
compensation for wheel A is performed using the second cylindrical pitch error
compensation method.

Table

/
. Wheel A

- c 4

Fig. 15.3(c) Application of Second Cylindrical Pitch Error Compensation for a Linear Axis

15.4 Backlash Compensation

This function is used to compensate lost motions proper to the machine system.
Offset amounts come in a range of 0 - - +9999 pulses per axis, and is set as
parameters in detection unit.
Machining precision can be improved by using different backlash compensation
values for cutting feed and rapid traverse.

15.5 Inclination Compensation

Error caused by machine position, as pitch error of the feed screw, can be
compensated by making an approximate value of three lines. The stored pitch
error compensation is used over sections where inclination compensation is not
enough. A smooth and high-precision compensation can be done with the
inclination compensation. This compensation is also useful in decreasing
setting points in the stored pitch error compensation data, so setting in stored
pitch error compensation becomes easier. The three lines for inclination
compensation can be set by parameters (per axis).

- 111 -
 Compensation value

I C
Approximate the compensated
data with the straight line
AB, BC, CD. Only the A,
B, C, D compensated data
needs to be set.

15.6 Straightness Compensation

To compensate straightness of the machine, other axes can be compensated

according to the move of a certain axis. For example, the 2 axis can be
compensated according to the move of the X axis.
Machine position
of Z axis

Compensate Machine position

the 2 axis of X axis
according to
the machine
position of
X axis.

15.7 Programmable Parameter Entry (GIO, Gil)

Parameters and pitch errors data can be set by tape commands. Therefore,
following uses can be done example.

1) Parameter setting such as pitch errors compensation data, etc. when the
attachment is replaced.

2) Parameters such as max. cutting speed and cutt ing feed time constant can be
ons.
ording to th.e machining con.diti
changed a,cc

This function can be applied for various purposes.

COMMAND FORMAT
GlOL50:
N-I,R--:
N -- P-- R--:
.
.
N R--:
GE
where
G10L50: Parameter input mode
N,-: Parameter input mode cancel
P.M-0 Axis NO. (in the case of axis type parameter)
R-,: Parameter setting value (or pitch errors data)
Note) Some parameters cannot be set.

- 112 -
16. MEASUREMENT FUNCTIONS

16.1 Skip Function (G31)

By commanding axis move after G3]., linear interpolation can be commanded like in
GOl. If an external skip signal is input during this command, the remainder of
this command is cancelled, and program skips to the next block.
G31 is a one-shot command and is valid for the commanded block only.

-Actual movement
Skip signal was ----With no skip signals

The following two feed speed for the G31 block can be selected by parameter
setting.

1) Feed speed commanded by F

2) Feed speed set by parameter
Coordinate value when skip signal is input, is stored in the system variables
#5061 - #5068 of the customer macro, so this function can also be read with the
customer macro function.
#5061 . . . . . . X axis coordinate value
#5062 . . . . . . 2 axis coordinate value
#5063 . . . . . . Third axis coordinate value
#5064 . . . . . . Fourth axis coordinate value
#5065 . . . . . . Fifth axis coordinate value
#5066 . . . . . . Sixth axis coordinate value
#5067 . . . . . . Seventh axis coordinate value
#5066 l*4o*e Eight axis coordinate value
As the skip function can be used when move amount is not clear, this function
can be used for tool measurement with tactile sensor.

16.2 High-Speed Skip Signal Input

Delay and error of skip signal input is 0 - 2 msec at the NC side (not
considering those at the PMC side).
This high-speed skip signal input function keeps this value to 0.1 msec or less,
thus allowing high precision measurement. This signal is connected directly to
the.NC; not via the PMC.

16.3 Skipping the Commands for Several Axes

Move commands can be specified for several axes at one time in a G31 block. If
an external skip signal is input during such commands, the command is canceled
for all specified axes and the next block is executed.
The position for each specified axis where a skip signal is input is set in the
macro variable for the axis (#5061 to f5066).

- 113 -
 Example G31 G90 X100.0 Y100.0 2100.0 ;
x50.0 Y50.0 2100.0 ;

Actual movement
-A---w
When no skip signal is input

16.4 Automatic Tool Offset (G37,l , G37.2, G37.3)

Difference between the coordinate value of tool when tool end has reached the
measuring position and coordinate value of the measuring position is
automatically measured, calculated, and added to the currently set tool offset
amount by NC system. The machine must be equipped with measuring devices, for
example tactile sensor, so that a signal is sent when the tool end has reached
the measuring position.
Three measuring position reach signal inputs are offered. G37.1, G37.2 and
G37.3 are used to command which of the three signals is used for measurement.
G37.1: Measuring position reach signal 1 is used for measurement.
G37.2: Measuring position reach signal 2 is used for measurement.
G37.3: Measuring position reach signal 3 is used for measurement.
Measuring position coordinate value is commanded as follows:
G37.1
G37.2 a--;
( G37.3 !
a: Command measuring position in X, 2, or Y

Start
position !
V
S A

position

- 114 -
 vDeceleration point (parameter)
&: Allowable measuring range (parameter)
The tool is moved from the start position to the deceleration point A in rapid
traverse, tool speed is decelerated to the measurement speed preset by
parameter, and moved on till the measuring position reach signal is output.
In case measuring position reach signal is not output in the allowable measuring
range (from point B to C), and alarm arises.
(New offset amount).= (Old offset amount) + (Measuring position reach signal
detected position) - (measuring position)

16.5 High-speed Measuring Position Reach Signal Input

Delay and error of measuring position reach signal input detection are 0 - 2msec
with the NC only (without considering those of the PMC side).
With this high-speed measuring position reach signal input, this value can be
kept under O.lmsec, thus allowing high precision measurement. This signal is
connected directly to the NC; not via the PMC.

16.6 Direct Input of Offset Value Measured

This is a function of- setting an offset value by key-inputting a workpiece

diameter manually cut and measured from the MD1 keyboard.
First the workpiece is cut in the longitudinal or in the cross direction
manually. When a button on the machine operator's panel is pressed upon
completion of the cutting, the work coordinate value at that time is recorded.
Then, withdraw the tool, stop the spindle, and measure the diameter if the
cutting was on the longitudinal direction or distance from the standard face if
it was on the facing. (The standard face is made as 2 = 0.) When the measured
value is entered into the offset number desired plus 100, NC inputs the
difference between the input measured value and the coordinate value recorded in
NC, as the offset value of the offset number.
The work coordinate system can be shifted using the technique of directly
inputting the measured value for offset. This technique is used when the
coordinate system planned in the program does not match with the coordinate
system set by the G92 command or by the automatic coordinate system setting.
The procedures are the same as those for direct input for offset, except a
difference of using the standard tool.
X X

B free
/
t 1

--I--------rc---f

x-z : Coordinate system

------ -2 planned in the program
0 a
x-z : Coordinate set actually
y A free
4 t .

Cut A or B face and measure R or a. Direct input the measured value.

16.7 Tool Compensation Value Measured Value Direct Input B

By installing the touch sensor and by manually making the tool cantact the touch
sensor, it is possible to set the offset amount of that tool automatically in
the tool offset amount memory. It is also possible to set the work coordinate
system shift amount automatically.

- 115 -
1) Touch sensor
The touch sensor has contact faces in two directions along each axis, and
outputs,the following four signals by contact detection. These signals are
input to NC as offset writing signals.
The contact faces are to be selected according to the shape of the.nose of
the tool to be measured.
i) +MITl (+MITX): Contact the (+) contact face of the X axis
(Contact in the X+ direction) .
ii) -MIT1 (-MITX): Contact the (0) contaxt face of the X axis
(Contact in the X- direction)
iii) i-MIT2 (+MITZ): Contact the (+) contact face of the 2 axis
(Contact in the Z+ direction)
iv) -MIT2 (-MITZ): Contact the (0) contact face of the Z axis
(Contact in the Z- direction)
(0) contact face of X axis
(-MITx)
I

(+) contact face (-) contact face

of 2 axis of Z axis
(+MITZ) (-~1~2)

+x

L +Z
(+) contact face
(+MXTX)
of X axis

Fig. 16.6 (a) Touch sensor

2) Setting method
v

i) Setting of tool compensation value

Previously set the distance from the measurement reference position (a
particular point on the machine ) to the measuring position (the touch
sensor contact face) to the parameter as the reference value.
As the tool of which the offset amount is to be measured is selected and
is positioned at the measuring position (contact the touch sensor), the
contact detection signal (offset write signal) from the touch sensor is
received, and the difference between the machine coordinate value at
that time (= the distance from the measured tool nose tip position at
the machine reference position (machine zero point) to the measuring
position) and the reference value (parameter value) is set in the tool
offset amount memory as the tool geometry offset amount of that tool.
The corresponding tool wear offset amount becomes zero.

1;
-Tool offset Machine coordinate Reference value (value
amount to = value when offset - of parameter)
_be set write signal turns corresponding to
' I HIGH offset write signal

The tool offset amount to be set depends on how to determine the

measurement reference position.

- 116 -
 ii) Setting of work coordinate system shift amount
The work coordinate system'shift amount along the 2 axis is to be set as
follows. After the tool is made to contact the work edge, the value
which is obtained by subtracting the tool geometry offset amount (the
portion to be shifted in the coordinate system by the tool geometry
offset) from the machine coordinate value (= the distance 'from the
measured tool nose tip position at the machine reference position
(machine zero point) to the work edge) at that.time is set as the work
coordinate system shift amount by simple operation of MDT. In this
case the tool geometry offset amount corresponding to the tool must be
programmed previously.

Work coordinate 'Tool geometry

system shift amount offset amount of -Machine
along Z axis to be = Z axis of coordinate value
set (EXOFSZ) 1. corresponding tool .of Z axis (Zt) 1
_(OFSz) I-

By the above procedure the work coordinate system with the work edge
(sensor contact point) being taken as the work coordinate system zero
point of the Z axis (the program zero point) is set when the tool is
selected by the program command (T code).

Machine zero

+x

L - l
+Z
4SOFSZ

OFSx
h I Work coordinate
system zero point
(Program zero point)
t

EXOFSz: Work coordinate system shift amount to be set

OFSz : Tool geometry offset amount
Zt : Machine coordinate value (Distance to work edge)

Fig. 16.6(b) Setting of Work Coordinate System Shift Amount

16.8 Count Input of Offset Values

A position value displayed on the relative position display can be set to the
offset memory.
The relative position and the offset value are on the same screen.
Touch the standard tool to the workpiece or a fixed position on the machine and
set the relative position display to zero.
Select a tool whose offset value is to be measured and touch it to the same
point as touched by the standard tool. Then, the relative position display
shows the offset value of the tool.
The offset value on display can be set to the offset memory.

- 117 -
17. CUSTOM MACRO

17.1 Custom Macro

A function covering a group of instructions is stored in the memory like the sub
program. The stored function is represented by one instruction and is executed
by simply writing the represented instruction. The. group of instructions
registered is called the custom macro body, and the representative instruction,
the custom macro instruction.

Custom macro body

Ordinary

cus

The programmer need not remember all the instructions in the custom macro body.
He need only to remember the representative, custom macro instruction.
The greatest feature in custom macro is that variables can be used in the custom
macro body. Operation between the variables can be done, and actual values can
be set in the variables bv custom macro instructions.

G65P9011AlOI5;

Call custom macro

body 9011, and set
variables #l=lO,
#4--s.
Variables, #l, fl4can b e used
instead of unknwn move amount

- 118 -
 #-1

On the workpieces shown in the above diagram, if a custom .macro body is

programmed using variables #l through #4, no re-programming is needed to machine
the same types of workpieces with different dimensions. Just set actual values
to the variables.
Custom macro bodies may be provided by machine tool builders, but they can be
created by users, too.
With this function, the NC can be graded up by the user himself. Custom macro
bodies may be offered to the users by the machine tool builder, but the users
still can make custom macro himself.
The following functions can be used for programming the custom macro body.

1) Use of variables
Variables: #i (i=l, 2, 3, lbeo****e >
Quotation of variables: F//33 (#33: speed expressed by variables)

2) Operation between variables

Various operation can be done between variables and constants.
The following operands, and functions can be used:
+ (sum), - (difference), * (product), / (quotient), OR (logical sum), XOR
(exclusive logical sum), AND (logical product), SIN (sine), COS (cosine),
TAN (tangent), ATAN (arc tangent), SQRT (square roots), ABS (absolute
value), BIN (conversion from BCD to binary), BCD (conversion from binary
to BCD), FIX (truncation below decimal point), FUP (raise fraction below
deciaml point), ROUND (round)
Example)
#5 = SIN [[#2 + #4] * 3.14 + #4] * ABS [#lo]

3) Variable naming
A name with 8 characters or less can be given to a variable (#500 - f/519).
Confirmation and setting of variables are made easier by naming variables,
as these names are displayed on the CRT screen with the value of the
variable.

4) Control command
Program flow in the custom macro body is controlled by the following
command.
i> If [<Conditional expression>] GOT0 n (n = sequence number)
When <conditional expression> is satisfied, the next execution is done
from block with sequence number n.
When <Conditional expression> is not satisfied, the next block is
executed.
When the [<IF conditional expression>] is committed, it executes from
block with n unconditionally.

- 119 -
 The following <conditional expressions> are available:
#j EQ #k whether #j = #lc
#j NE #k whether flj##k
#j GT #k whether #j >#k
#j LT #k whether &j <r'/k
#j GE #k whether #j 2#k
#j LE #k whether #j s#k
ii) WHILE [<conditional expression>] DO m (m = 1, 2, 3)
.
.
.
END m
While <conditional expression> is satisfied, blocks from DO m to END m
is repeated.
When <conditional expression> is no more satisfied, it is executed from
the block next to
END m block.
Example #120 = I ;
WHILE [#120 LE lo] DO 1 ;

5)
#120 = I!120

END 1 ;
+ 1;

Format of custom macro body

The format is the same as the sub program.
9Repeated 10 times.

0 Macro number;

Custom macro body

6) Custom macro instruction

i) Simple call
G65P (macro number) L (times to repeat) <argument assignment>;
A value is set to a variable by <argument assignment>.
Write the actual value after the address.
Example A5.0 E3.2 M13.4
There is a regulation on which address (A - 2) corresponds to which
variable number.
ii) Modal call A
G66P (macro number) L (times to repeat) <argument assignment>;
Each time a move command is executed, the specified custom macro body
is called. This can be cancelled by G67.
This function is useful when drilling cycles are programmed as custom
macro bodies.

- 120 -
iii) Modal call B
G66.1 P (macro number);
In this macro call mode, command values of each block are all regarded
as arguments, and custom macro commanded by G66.1 is called without any-
execution. It can be regarded that G65P (macro number) is commanded at
the head of each block.
This status is cancelled by G67.
In modal call B, comman value of each block is once sent to the custom
macro as arguments, so execution can be performed after various
decisions and processes in the custom macro.
iv) Macro call by G codes
The macro can also be called by the parameter-set G codes. Instead of
commanding:
N--G65 P--- <argument assignment>;
macro can be called just by commanding:
N--G-- <argument assignment>; .
G code G-0 for calling the macro, and macro program number P--- to be
I
called, are coupled together and set as parameter.
Maximum ten G codes from GO1 to G999 can be used for macro call (GO0
cannot be used).
The G code macro call cannot be used in the macro which was called by a
G code. It also cannot be used in sub programs called by sub program
call with M codes or T codes.
v) Macro call by M codes
A macro can also be called by the parameter-set M codes. Instead of
commanding:
N--G65 P--- <argument assignment>;
a macro can be called just by commanding:
N--M-- <argument assignment>;
M code M-0 for calling the macro, and macro program number P--- to be
called, are coupled together and set as a parameter.
Maximum ten M codes from MO1 to M97 can be used for macro call.
No MF nor M code is transmitted to the machine side the same as M code
for subprogram call.
The M code macro call cannot be used in the macro which was called by a
G code. It also cannot be used in sub programs called by sub program
call with M, S, T and B codes.
vi) Sub program call by M code
An M code can be set by parameter to call a sub program. Instrad of
commanding:
N--G--X--Y--....M98 P----; ,
the same operation can be performed simply by commanding:
N--G--X--Y--....M-- ;.
As for M98, M codes are not transmitted.
The M code M-0 for calling the sub program and the sub program number
P-- to be called are coupled together and set by parameter.
Maximum nine M codes from MO3 to M97 can be used for macro call (M30
cannot be used).
Argument cannot be transmitted. It also cannot be commanded in the
same block as the block with M98 command.
When these M codes are commanded in macro called by G code or in
subprogram called by M code or T code, they are regarded as ordinary M
codes.

- 121 -
Note 1) It is possible to increase the number of common variables. For
details, see "Number of common variables."
Note 2) It is possible to apply write protection for the common variables set
by the parameter.

iii) System variables

A variable with a certain variable number has a certain value. If the
variable number is changed, the certain value is also changed.
The certain value are the following:
a) 128 points DI (for read only)
b) 128 points DO (for output only)
C) Tool offset amount, work zero point offset amount
d) Position information (actual position, skip position, block end
positoin, etc.)
e) Modal information (F code, G code for each group, etc.)
f) Alarm message (Set alarm number and alarm message, and the NC is
set in an alarm status. The alarm number and message is displayed
on the CRT.)
g) Operator's message (A message can be displayed on the CRT screen by
setting an operator's message.)
Kanji, Katakana and Hiragana can be displayed in addition to usual
alphanumeric character and special character as an operator message
or an alarm message made by custom macro.
h) Clock (Time can be known. A time can also be preset.)
i-1 Signle block stop, Miscellaneous function end wait hold
j) Feed hold, Feed rate override, Exact stop inhibition
k) Mirror image status

8) External output commands

Value of variables or characters can be output to external devices via the
reader/puncher interface with custom macro command. Results in measurements
can be output after measurement using custom macro.

9) Limitations
i) Usable variables
7%1 - #33, #lOO - #149, #500 - #549, and system variables.
ii) Usable variable values
+I038 - +10-38
iii) -donstants usable in <expression>
+0.0000001 - +99999999
iv) Arithmetic precision
8-digit decimal number (in trigonometrical functions, some value may
causes fall in precision).
v) Custom macro body call nesting
Maximum 4 folds. Maximum 4 folds for subprogram call, too,
vi) [ ] nesting
Maximum 5 folds.
vii) Repeated ID numbers
l-3

- 123 -
Example
For cutting two diagonal linear with a corner, R, in between.

Custom macro call command

G65 P9912 X x 2 z A CI B B R r ;
r.
X. Coordinate valueof TaxisTend point (absolute command, diameter
specification)
2: Coordinate value of Z-axis end point (absolute command)
Ci: Linear move direction from the start point
f3.. Linear move directin toward the end point
(There must be an angle difference equal to or greater than 1" between 01
and 8.)
r: Rasius of corner arc.

Start point

I Custom macro body

I
09912
#3 = [f/24-#5001]/2;
iI4= #26-f/5002;
#5 = SQRT [#3*#3+#4*#4];
f/6= ABS [#18*TAN[[#2-#1]/2]];
#7 = ATAN [#3/#41;
; = ABS [#5*SIN[#2-#7]/SIN[#2-#l]];
/8
119 = ABS [#5*SIN[#7-#l]/SIN[#2-#l]];
#lo = 3;
IF [SIN[#2-#l] GT O] GOT0 1;
/II
10 2*
Nl #;OO; = 1;
GO1 X[~~5001+[~~8~~~6]*S1N[~~1]*2]2~~~5002~[~~8~~6]*C0S[~1]];
G//10 X[~~24-[~~9-~~6]*SIN[~~2]*2]~[~~26-[~~9~~~6]*COS[~~2]]~~~18~
/I3003 = 0;
GO1 x#24 z//26 M99:

- 124 -
17.2 Number of Common Variables

Select common variables from the following.

1) Common variables A
Common variables #lo0 - #149, //SO0 - #549 can be used.
In case of 15-TTB/F, common variables #lo0 to f149, #500 to #524 can be used
(on each tool post).
ii100- #149 will be cleared when power is turned off, but #500 - 1,549will
be kept after power off.

2) Common variables B
Common variables #lOO - #199, #500 - #599 can be used.
#lOO - #199 will be cleared when power is turned off, but f500 - #599 will
be kept after power off.
In case of 150TTB/F, common variables flO0 to #149, #500 to #549 (on each
tool post) can be used.

3) Common variables C
Common variables #lOO - #199, #500 - #699 can be used.
In case of 150TTB/F, common variables #lOO to f149, #SO0 to #599 can be used
(on each tool post).
#loo - #I99 will be cleared when power is turned off, but #500 - #699 will
be kept after power off.

Note) Part program storage length will become short by 2.2 m.

4) Common variables D
Common variables #lo0 - #199, #SO0 - #999 can be used.
Ho0 - #199 will be cleared when power is turned off, but #500 - #999 will
be kept after power off.

Note 1) 150TTB/F are not equipped with common variable D.

Note 2) Part program storage length will be come short by 7.4m.

17.3 Read/Punch Function for Custom Macro Common Variables

The values and names of the common variables (#200 to #999) retained after the
power is disconnected can be output to an output device in custom macro
statement form.
As shown in the following example, output is in program format. Variable data
can be set by executing this program.

Example) %
i
#500=25600*65536/16777216; ... For a normal value
#501=//O; ..................... When the value is empty
f502=0; ...................... When the value is 0
#503= l***oaeeo**o.;
•*~ee~*~~*~*...;
SETVNSOO[ABC,DEF,,,...] ; . . . For variable names
M2;
0

/ 0

When this custom macro statement program is executed, values and names are set
for the common variables.
As shown in #SO0 in the above example, the values of variables are generally
expressed as mathematical expressions. Since macro variables are handled in
floating-point form in the control unit, such mathematical expressions are used

- 125 -
to accurately express the values stored internally. The user need not by
concerned with this format.

17.4 Interruption Type Custom Macro

When custom macro interruption signal is input during automatic operation, the
block currently under execution is interrupted and the specified custom macro is
activated. After execution of this custom macro, it returns to the interrupted
block and continues execution of the remaining commands.

M96P--0; When custom macro interruption signal is input between M96 block and
. M97 block, custom macro specified by P is activated.

M97;

With this function, custom macro interruption signal can be input on detection
of tool break, tool change cycle can be executed by custom macro, and machining
is continued.

17.5 Key and Program Encryption

To protect programs as custom macro developed uniquely by the users, the

following functions are available.
- The registered programs can be locked in.
- The registered programs can be coded and punched.
- The coded and punched tapes (programs) can be registered.

u Key
For locked programs:
- Part program editing cannot be done to prevent unauthorized access to
knowhow.
- Punching of the program cannot be done.
- Displav of the program cannot be done.
- Uncodeh programs cannot be registered.
- Program number search cannot be done.
2) Program Encryption
- The registered programs can be encrypted and punched.
- The coded and punched tapes (programs) can be registered.
By coding the program, contents of the program can be kept secret. The
coded tape can be attached to the CNC.
The first program number in the tape will not be coded, but characters
thereafter will be punched in codes. A "%I*will be punched at the end of
the tape.

- 126 -
18. FUNCTIONS FOR HIGH SPEED CUTTING

‘18.1 High-Speed Machining (G’10.3, G11.3, G65.3)

The high-speed machining function allows the machining program, which is to be

pre-processed and stored in the memory before the execution, to be called and
executed at a high speed.
By this function, an interruption of the execution of blocks, in which blocks of
minute move commands continue like in a three dimensional machining, is
eliminated.
(Registration)
G10.3LlPpQq;

(C& commands)
.

G11.3
P: High speed machining data number
q: Cluster ID number
(Call)
G65.3PpQq;

18.2 Multi-Buffer (G05.1)

Normally the CNC calculates the next one block while executing a certain block
and transforms it into executable data (execution format).
This is called buffering. By using the multi-buffer function, it is possible to
increase the number of such buffering blocks up to 15.
This prevents stoppage between very small, consecutive blocks.
In other words, if the number of consecutive minute move blocks is 15 or less,
the interruption of the execution between these blocks is eliminated.
Command Format
G05.1; Multi-buffer mode ON

(CNC command)

G;)5.1Pl; Multi-buffer mode OFF

- 127 -
18.3 Feed Forward Control

To reduce the machining shape error caused by the servo follow-up error (delay),
the position loop gain Wp) of the servo may be as high as possible. If,
however, the position loop gain is too high, the servo system will oscillate.
The feed forward control enables reduction of the servo follow-up error without
*
increasing the position loop gain.

Position loop gain ’

Pulse coder
Position command 1
7
3

Position deviation
4

Velocity control
unit and servo motor

Fig. 18.3 Feed forward control

18.4 Feed Forward during Rapid Traverse

Feed forward can be enabled during rapid traverse to reduce the time required
to reach the in-position state.

- 128 -
19. AXES CONTROL

19.1 Follow Up Function

Normally, the machine is controlled to move to a commanded position. However,

when the follow up function is applied, actual position in the CNC is revised
according to the move of the machine.
Follow up funciton is activated when:
- Emergency stop is on
- Servo alarm is on
Follow up is carried out and machine movement during the emergency stop and
servo alarm is followed up in the CNC, so actual position of the machine is
reflected in the CNC. Therefore, machining can be resumed after the emergency
stop or the servo alarm has been deactivated, without performing the reference
point return again.
However, when a trouble has generated in the position detection system, the
system cannot follow up correctly. So present position in CNC does not become
correct value.
By parameter setting, follow up function can also be applied to:
- Servo off
status. It is also valid in cases when the machine is moved with a mechanical
handle.

19.2 Follow-up for Each Axis

The conventional follow-up function performs follow-up for all the axes during
the servo off state if parameter No.1800#2 (FVF) is set to 1.
The new follow-up function performs follow up for all the axes when parameter
N0.1800#2 (FVF) is set to 1. When the parameter is set to 0, however, it
allows the operator to specify for each axis whether follow up is performed.
Parameter No.1802#3 is used to specify whether follow-up is performed during
the servo off state. When the parameter is set to 0, follow-up is not
performed. When it is set to 1, follow up is performed.

19.3 Mechanical Handle Feed

It is possible to move the machine by hand, using the mechanical handle

installed on the machine; not by the CNC (servo motor).
Move distance by the mechanical handle is followed up and actual position in
the CNC is revised. The mechanical handle feed is done by inputting the servo
off signal of the axis fed. Parameter setting is necessary to command follow
up function when servo off signal is on.

19.4 Servo Off

Servo on/off control per axis is possible by signals from the machine side.
This function is generally used with the machine clamp.

19.5 Mirror Image

The MDI-commanded or the program-commanded move direction of each axis can be

reversed and executed.
>G_rror image is set by MD1 setting or by the switch on the machine side.
Mirror image can be applied to all axes.

- 129 -
19.6 Control Axis Detach

It is possible to connect the spindle with a feed motor to make it as a

controlled axis of CNC or to couple the spindle with spindle motor, releasing
the spindle from the member of controlled axes.
It is also possible to detach or attach attachments with this function. Switch
control axis detach signal according to whether the attachments are attached or
detached. When this signal is on, the corresponding axis is excluded from the
control axes, so servo alarm applied to the axis are ignored. The axis is
automatically regarded as being interlocked. This signal is not only accepted
when power turned is on, so automatic change of attachments is possible any time
with this function.
The same switching as with this signal can also be performed with the MD1
setting.

19.7 Feed Stop

This function usually checks position deviation amount during motion. If the
amount exceeds the parameter set "feed stop position deviation amount", pulse
distribution and acceleration/deceleartion control is stopped for the while
exceeding, and move command to the positioning control circuit is stopped.
The overshoot at rapid feed acceleratin is thus kept to a minimum.

Speed
/- \\ *--. .
\ CI. / - Commanded speed
---- Actual speed

- Time

Feed stop

Fig. 19.9

19.8 Synchronous/Independent Switching Function

It is possible to select by the input signal from the machine side either to
move any axis according to the move command given to that axis, as is the normal
practice, or to move the axis in synchronization with the move of the any other
axes.
The synchronous operation is possible during the automatic operation, but it is
not possible druing the manual operation.

- 130 -
19.9 Polygonal Turning (G51.2)

The rotation of the tool in synchronization with that of spindle can be

controlled for performing polygon turning. Based on the rotation detection
pulse from the position coder mounted in the spindle, the rotation of the tool
rotation axis can be controlled in synchronization with the rate of spindle in
response to the rotation ratio of the spindle to the tool rotation axis.
The synchronous start of spindle (rotation axis of work) and B axis (rotation
axis of tool) is commanded by the following commands:

G51.2 P --- Q --- ;

P and Q: Rotation ratio of spindle to B axis

Command range: Integer value of 1 to 9 for both P and Q
When the value of Q is positive, the rotation direction
of B axis is in positive direction.
When the value of Q is negative, the rotation direction
of B axis is in negative direction.

(Example) When the rotation ratio of spindle to B axis is equal to 1 : 2 and the
rotation direction of B axis is positive direction G51.2 Pl 42 ;

When synchronous start is commanded by the G51.2, one rotation signal from the
position coder mounted in the spindle is detected and the rotation of B axis is
controlled while being synchronous with the rate of spindle in response to the
rotation ratio (P : Q). Namely, control is made so that the ratio of spindle to
B axis is P : Q. This relationship continues until the synchronous cancellation
command (G50.2 or reset) are carried out. The direction of rotation of B axis
is determined by the symbol Q and is not affected by the direction of rotation
of position coder.
The synchronization between the spindle and B axis is cancelled by the command
of G50.2.
G50.2 ;
When the G50.2 is commanded, the synchronization of the spindle and B axis is
cancelled and the B axis is stopped. Also, the synchronization between the
swindle and B axis is also cancelled in the following cases:
a

1) Power off
2) Emergency stop
3) Servo alarm
4) Reset

- 131 -
19.10 Axis Control with PMC

Any axis can be released from the control of CNC and directly controlled from
PMC. That is, input of commands such as moving distance and feed rate commands
from PMC allows the axis to move independently of other axes moving under
control of CNC. Therefore, use of an axis of CNC enables control of peripheral
devices such as a turret, and pallet. When of CNC and PMC controls each axis
can be selected by the input signal.
The following operations can be directly controlled from PMC:

i>Rapid traverse with the specified moving distance.

Cutting feed with the specified moving distance.
ii)
o The feed rate and override can also be specified.
o The cutting feed can be started simultaneously with another PMC control
axis.
iii) Reference point return.
iv) Positioning on a machine coordinate point.
v) Dwell

PhK I 1
CNC

BhlI r . . , .

First axis:
PMC axis control _
data
.
First axis
management
J
-
Pulse
distribution -Servo
control-

-0 Notor

Pulse --cServo control - Motor

distribution
Second axis: l

PMC axis control -0

c data

.
Third axis Pulse Motor
---cServo control-
management - distribution
Third axis:
, c-
PMC axis control ’ P -0
data

- 132 -
19.11 Hybrid Control

The semi-closed loop system servo mechanism is stable and easily adjustable
without many factors to determine the control quality in the control loop, as
compared with the full closed loop system servo mechanism. Its positioning
accuracy depends almost upon the accuracy of the ball screw.
Since sufficiently highly accurate ball screws are manufactured, almost all NC
machine tools can obtain satisfactory performance by using this system.
If high accuracy is particularly demanded, the stability of small and medium
machine tools can be fully obtained by using the full closed loop system.
However, it is generally difficult for large machine tools to obtain a stable
and easily adjustable system by the full closed loop system, even if this system
ensures a high gain.
The hybrid control adopts a composite system of both semi-closed loop system
being characterized with its stability and easy adjustment and the full closed
loop being characterized with high accuracy.
When a move command is given in this hybrid control system in FS15, the
semi-closed loop circuit having a high gain mainly functions to position the
motor axis to the commanded position.
If the feedback (representing the machine tool position) from the full closed
loop is different from the feed back (representing the position of the motor
axis) from the semi-closed loop, this differential component is out put together
with the command pulse after feeding it through the one-stage of the first order
lag system, so that the high accuracy position can be done by the feedback of
the full closed loop finally.

19.12 Synchronous Control

When one axis is driven by two servo motors such as in the case of a large
gantry machine, these two motors must be operated simultaneously. This
synchronous control is executed to maintain any asynchronicity between the two
motors to within the allowable range.

Example of a machine having XM and KS synchronous axes

- 133 -
19.13 Roll-Over Function for a Rotation Axis

The roll-over function for a rotation axis prevents a coordinate overflow for
the corresponding rotation axis.
The improved roll-over function for a rotation axis can be enabled or disabled
by using programmable parameter input (GlO).
When the roll-over function for a rotation axis is executed, each absolute
coordinate is kept within the range of 0 to 359.999 degrees.
In the incremental mode, a specified value directly indicates an angular
displacement. In the absolute mode, the specified value is converted to the
remainder obtained by dividing the specified value by 360 degrees. The
difference between the converted value and the current value indicates the
angular displacement. The movement by angular displacement is always made in
the shorter direction. That is, if the difference between the converted value
and the current value is greater than 180 degrees, the movement to the
specified position is made in the opposite direction. If the difference is 180
degrees, the movement is made in the normal direction.

- 134 -
20. AUTOMATIC OPERATION

20.1 Operation Mode

20.1 .I Tape operation

The part program can be read and executed block by block from the control unit
integral type tape reader or from the input device connected to the reader/
puncher interface.

Note 1) To tape operation is available in case of 1%TTB/F.

20.1.2 Memory operation

Program registered in the memory can be executed.

20.1.3 MDI operation

Multiple blocks can be input and executed by the CRT/MD1 unit.

20.2 Selection of Execution Programs

20.2.1 Program number search

You can search through memory for the number of a required program using the
CRT/MD1 unit.

20.2.2 Program search using the program name

YOU can search through memory for the name of a required program.

20.2.3 Sequence number search

The sequence number of the currently selected program can be searched using the
CRT/MD1 unit.
When executing the program from half-way (not from the head) of the program,
specify the sequence number of the half-way program, and the program can be
executed from the half-way block by sequence number search.
The sequence number search function can be done on memory operation programs,
and tape operation programs.

20.2.4 Rewind

After program execution has ended, the program in the memory or the tape reader
can be rewinded to the program head, with this reset 6 rewind signal on.

20.3 Activation of Automatic Operation

20.3.1 Cycle start

Set operation mode to memory operation, MDI operation, or tape operation, press
the cycle start button, and automatic operation starts.

- 135 -
20.4 Execution of Automatic Operation

20.4.1 Buffer register

Buffer register equivalent to one block is available for program read and
control of NC command operation intervals caused by preprocess time.
The buffer register can be made for two blocks by selecting parameters.

20.5 Automatic Operation Stop

20.5.1 Program stop (MOO, MOI)

Automatic operation is stopped after executing the MOO (program stop) commanded
block. When the optional stop switch on the operator's panel is turned on, the
MO1 (optional stop) commanded block is executed and the automatic operation
stops.
The automatic operation can be restarted by the cycle start button.

20.5.2 Program end (M02,M30)

The NC is reset after executing the MO2 (end of program) or M30 (end of tape)
commanded block.

20.5.3 Sequence number comparison and stop

During program operation, when the block with a preset sequence number appears,
operation stops after execution of the block, to a single block stop status.
The sequence number can be set by the operator through the CRT/MDI panel.
This function is useful for program check, etc., because program can be stopped
at optional block without changing the program.

20.5.4 Feed hold

The CNC can be brought to an automatic operation hold status by pressing the
feed hold button on the operator's panel. When feed hold is commanded during
motion, it decelerates to a stop.
Automatic operation can be restarted by the cycle start button.

20.5.5 Reset

The automatic operation can be ended in a reset status by the reset button on
the CRT/MDI panel or by the external reset signal, etc. When reset is commanded
during motion, it decelerates to a stop.

20.6 Restart of Automatic Operation

20.6.1 Program restart

This function allows program restart by specifying the desired sequence number,
for example after tool break and change, or when machining is restarted after
holidays. The CNC memorizes the modal status from the beginning of the program
to the sequence number.
If there are M codes necessary to be output, output the M code by the MDI, press
the start button, the tool automatically moves to the start position, and the
program execution restarts. The block counter value can be specified for
restart.
CNC counts the number of blocks from the beginning of the program and displays
it on the CRT screen. This number of blocks also includes blocks made by CNC

- 136 -
(such as the block to perform the operation of each fixed cycle).
Specifying the block counter value enables restart of the operation from the
block with no sequence number or from the midpoint of the cycle
* operation.

20.6.2Program restart function and output of M, S, T, and B, codes

The program restart function enables the following operations after searching
for the block to be restarted 0 l

(1) Before moving the tool to the machining restart position

(a) The program restart function automatically outputs the last M, S, T,

and B codes to the PMC.
If the last S code is the S code (maximum spindle speed) specified in
the block containing G92, the program restart function outputs this S
code as the maximum spindle speed signal (MRO to MR15). If the S code
is the other S code (specified spindle speed), it is output as the
specified spindle speed signal (RO to R15).
Only the S code specified last is displayed on the program restart
screen regardless of whether it is in the same block as a G92.
(b) While searching for the block to be restarted, the program restart
function automatically outputs all the sampled M codes and the last S,
T, and B codes to the PMC. The function can sample up to 35 M codes.
When the number of M codes sampled exceeds 35, the function outputs
the latest 35 M codes to the PMC.
Specify whether the function performs operation (a) or (b) with the
MOAL bot (bit 6 of parameter 7620).

20.6.3Restart of block

Machining can be stopped half-way a block by feed hold, when for example tool
breaks. The tool is then taken away from the workpiece for tool change, offsets
of the new tool is set, and machining with the new tool is restarted from the
point where machining was interrupted.

01
Interruption
position
d point@ Tool change
position
0 3 Restart position

Fig.
20.6.2

20.6.4 Tool retract & recover

These functions are used for replacing tools damaged in machine shops,
retraction of tools for confirming the cutting conditions, and recovering the
tools efficiently to restart the cutting.
Also, the escape operation can be performed with the tool retract signal by
previously setting the escape amount (position) with a program. This can be
used for retraction for detecting tool damage.

1) Input the tool retract signal during executing the automatic operation.
Then, the escape operation (retraction) is performed to the escape position

- 137 -
 commanded by the program.
2) Input the tool retract signal to initiate the retract mode.
3) After that, switch the automatic mode to the manual mode to move tools for
replacement of tools or inspection of cutting objects with manual operation
such as the jug feed, incremental feed, handle feed, and manual numeric
command. A maximum of 10 points can be automatically memorized as travel
path.
4) Input the tool recovery signal to return the tool to the retraction position
in the opposite direction along the path moved by manual operation
automatically (return operation).
5) Perform the cycle start to return the tool to the position where the tool
retract signal was entered (repositioning).

63) : Position where the tool retract signal was input

a : Programmed escape position
0 : Position memorized by manual operation
--_ : Retract path
- : Manual operation
B-__-_-__
. Returning operation
l

-v_t. . Repositioning

!I ?f
/
__-m-___

7_
O4
/ /I
/-----__
-0
1 /-

4
/ X
/
/
/

Command the escape amount using the G10.6.

G10.6 Ip- ;

The escape data sorted by G10.6 is valid until the next G10.6 is commanded.
Command the following to cancel the escape amount:

GlO.6; (Single command)

) where
The G10.6 is the one-shot G code.

The tool can be retracted to a special location of work coordinate system when
the escape amount is command by the ABSOLUTE (G90). When the escape amount is
commanded by the INCREMENTAL (G91), the tool can retract by only the commanded
escape amount.
Also, it can always be regarded as the incremental command regardless of the
Absolute/Incremental commands (G90/G91) by parameter setting.

- 138 -
1) Thread cutting and retract
The chamfering direction and distance are to be commanded as escape amount
during thread cutting.
When the retract signal is input, chamfering is performed in the commanded
direction of 45 degrees by the commanded distance. After chamfering is
completed, thread cutting continues and stops when it is completed.

__------
?\li\
1) 0

J
The operation after stop is the same as that of normal retract.

2) Thread cutting cycle and retract

The operation is the same as in the conventional thread cuttig cycle retract
during the thread cutting cycle. Also, it is the same as normal retract
after the stop.

3) Canned cycle and retract

The following tool retract is performed during the canned cycle for drilling
(canned cycle):

a) Operation 1 l 0 . Positioning of X and

Y axes

n b) Operation 2 l 0 . Rapid traverse to

point R
d Operation 3 0 Drilling
l l

d) Operation 4 0 0 Operation at the hole

l

bottom position
d Operation 5 b . . Escape to point R
f> Operation 6 . . . Rapid traverse to
initial point

-----cO Initial point

- 139 -
 (Retract)
l'he following retract is performed by inputting retract signal during the canned
cycle:
a) During execution of operation 1
Retract is executed in the similar manner as in the normal retract function.
(Travelling is carried out by the escape amount (position) set by the GlO.6)
b) During execution of operation 2
The operation 2 is suspended, travelling to the initial point and then it
stops.
, c) During execution of operation 3
The operation 3 *is suspended, the remaining cycle operations d), e), and f)
are executed, travelling to the initial point is made, and then it stops.
d) During execution of operation 4, 5, or 6
The operation 4, 5, or 6 continues and then it stops after travelling to the
initial point.
The travelling by G10.6 is not performed even if the retrace signal is input
between the cases b) to d) above.
Also, the retract mode is initiated after travelling to the initial point.

20.7 Manual 1nterruption during Automatic Operation

20.7.1 Handle interruption

During automatic operation, tool can be adjusted by the manual pulse generator
without changing the mode. The pulse from the manual pulse generator is added
to the automatic operation command and the tool is moved for the recommanded
pulses. The work coordinate system thereafter is shifted for the pulse
commanded value. Movement commanded by handle interruption can be displayed on
the CRT screen.

20.7.2 Automatic/manual simultaneous operation

When auto/manual simultaneous operation selection signal is set on, automatic

operation (tape, MDI, memory, or tape editing) and manual operation (manual
feed, incremental feed, or manual handle feed) are simultaneously performed.
This function allows, for example, staging of the next workpiece during
automatic operation.

- 140 -
21. MANUAL OPERATION

21.1 Manual Feed

1) Jogging
Each axis can be moved in the -t or - direction for the time the button is
pressed. Feed rate is the parameter set speed with override of:
O- 655.34%, 0.01% step.
The parameter set speed can be set to each axis.
2) Manual rapid feed
Each axis can be fed in a rapid feed to the + or - direction for the time
the button is pressed.
Rapid traverse override is also possible.

21.2 Incremental Feed

Specified move amount can be positioned to the + or - direction with the button.
Move amount of:
O- (least command increment).x 99999999
can be specified. The feed rate is that of manual feed.
It is also possible to specify (least command increment) x (magnification) (not
optional move amount) by selecting parameters
The possible magnifications to be specified are as follows.
xl, x10, x100, x1000, x10000, x100000.

Table 21.2

Increment system Metric input Inch input

IS-A 0.01, 0.1, 1.0, 10.0, 0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 1.0,

100.0, 1000.0 mm 10.0, 100.0 inch
IS-B 0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 1.0, 0.0001, 0.001, 0.01, 0.1,
10.0, 100.0 mm 1.0, 10.0 inch
IS-C 0.0001, 0.001, 0.01, 0.00001, 0.0001, 0.001,
0.1, 1.0, 10.0 mm 0.01, 0.1, 1.0 inch
IS-D 0.00001, 0.0001, 0.001, 0.000001, 0.00001,
0.01, 0.1, 1.0 mm 0.0001, 0.001, 0.01,
0.1 inch
IS-E 0.000001, 0.00001, 0.0000001, 0.000001,
0.0001, 0.001, 0.01, 0.00001, 0.0001, 0.001,
0.1 mm 0.01 inch

21.3 Manual Handle Feed (1st)

By rotating the manual pulse generator, the axis can be moved for the equivalent
distance. Manual handle feed is controlled 1 axis at a time, The manual pulse
generator generates 100 pulses per rotation. Move amout per pulse can be
specified from the following magnifications:
xl, x10, xM.
M is a parameter set value of 1 - 1000. Move distance is:
(Least command increment) x (magnification)

- 141 -
 Table 21.3

Increment system Metric input Inch input

IS-A 0.01, 0.1, M/100 mm 0.001, 0.01, M/1000 inch

IS-B 0.001, 0.01, Ml000 mm 0.0001, 0.01, Ml0000 inch
IS-C 0.0001, 0.001, Ml0000 mm 0.00001, 0.0001,
Ml00000 inch
IS-D 0.00001, 0.0001, 0.000001, 0.00001,
M/100000 mm M/l000000 inch
IS-E 0.000001, 0.00001, 0.0000001, 0.000001,
M/l000000 mm M/10000000 inch

It is also possible to specify the following magnifications by selecting

parameter.
xl, x10, x100, xM

21.4 Manual Handle Feed (2nd, 3rd)

A Znd, as well as 3rd manual pulse generator can be rotated to move the axis for
the equivalent distance. Manual handle feed of 3 axes can be done at a time.
Multiplier is common to lst, 2nd and 3rd manual pulse generators.

21.5 Manual Per-Rotation Feed

The feed rate for manual continous feed and incremental feed can be designated
by the per-rotation feed (feed value per spindle rotation).
Speeds (mm/rev, inch/rev or deg/rev) set by parameters are overridden in the
range of 0 to 655.34% in increments of 0.01%.
The rate is set per each axis by parameter.
In rapid traverse, the tool is fed at rapid traverse not by the per-rotation
feed.
During the dry run, the tool is fed by per-minute feed.
The manual continuous feed and the incremental feed cannot be fed by per-minute
feed with this function.

21.6 Manual Numerical Command

Program format data commanded via the MD1 can be executed in JOG feed mode.
Manual numerical command can be executed any time the JOG feed is availalbe.
The following commands can be executed:
- Positioning (GOO)
- Linear interpolation (GOl)
- Automatic reference point return (G28)
- 2nd referece point return (G30)
- M, S, B (2nd miscellaneous function)
Activation of the commanded data is the same as cycle start in automatic
operation.
When feed hold is commanded during manual numeric command execution, the move
command will stop but execution will continue till the M, S, B (2nd
miscellaneous function) ends.
Move command once stopped cannot be continued.

- 142 -
21.7 Manual Absolute On/Off

When tool is moved by manual operation when input signal ABS is on, the move
distance is added to the absolute coordinate value.
When tool is moved by manual operation when input signal ABS is off, the move
distance is ignored, and is not added to the absolute coordinate value. In this
case, the work coordinates is shifted for the amount tool was moved by manual
operation.

- 143 -
22. PROGRAM TEST FUNCTIONS

22.1 All Axes Machine Lock

In machine lock condition, the machine does not move, but the position display
is updated as if the machine were moving* Machine lock is valid even in the
middle of a block.

22.2 Machine Lock on Each Axis

Machine lock can be commanded per axis.

22.3 Auxiliary Function Lock

This function inhibits transmitting of M, S, T, B function code signals and

strobe signals to the machine side. The decoded DMOO, DMOl, DM02, and DM30
signals can be transmitted under this miscellaneous function lock.

22.4 Dry Run

In this dry run mode, commanded cutting feed rate is ignored and axis is fed at
feed rate specified with the jogging rate dial. Rapid feed command (GOO) is
done in rapid feed rate, and rapid traverse override is valid.
Dry run can also be commanded to rapid feed command (GOO) by parameter setting.

22.5 Single Block

The program can be executed block by block under automatic operation.

- 144 -
23. CRT/MD1 AND EXTERNAL POSITION DISPLAY

23.1 CRT/MD1 Panel

The following CRT/MD1 panels are available.

Reference
Kinds of CRT/MD1 panel Model to be applied
drawing

g” Small type Fig. 23.1(a) 1%TB

(grr CRT/MD1 monochrome)
(9” PDP/MDI)
(9” CRT/MD1 color)

9" Standard Fig. 23.1(b) 150TB, 150TTB

(9” CRT/MD1 monochrome)
(9" PDP/MDI)
(9” CRT/MD1 color)

10" Vertical type Fig. 23.1(c) 150TB, 150TTB

(10" LCD/MD1 color)
(10" PDP/MDI)
10" Horizontal type Fig. 23.1(d) 150TB, 1%TTB
(10" LCD/MD1 color)
(10" PDP/MDI)
14" Vertical type Fig. 23.1(e) 150TB, 1%TTB
(14" CRT/MD1 color)
14" Horizontal type Fig. 23.1(f) 150TB, 1%TTB
(14" CRT/MD1 color)
10" Vertical type, Fig. 23.1(g) 1%TFB, 150TTFB
with symbolic key
(10" LCD/MD1 color)
(10" PDP/MDI)
10" Horizontal type Fig. 23.1(h) 150TFB, 1%TTFB
with symbolic key
(10" LCD/MD1 color)
(10" PDP/MDI)
14" Vertical type Fig. 23.1(i) 150TFB, 1%TTFB
with symbolic key
(14" CRT/MD1 color)
14" Horizontal type Fig. 23.1(j) 150TFB, 15-TTFB
with symbolic key
(14" CRT/MD1 color)

- 145 -
Fig. 23.1 (a)

Fig. 23.1 (b)

- 146 -
POWER

Fig.23.1 (c)

0 c
I 3
r I

r I

POWER

$
L J
\ /

[ 01(1(1100000010 ]

Fig.23.1 (d)

- 147 -
Fig. 23.1 (e)

Fig. 23.1 (f)

 Fig. 23.1 (g)

POWER

Fig. 23.1 (h)

- 149 -
 Fig. 23.1 (i)

I 000000000000 I

POWER

e l

8 e 8

Fig. 23.1 (j)

- 150 -
Soft keys
The lo-inch LCD, lo-inch PDP or 140inch CRT has 10+2 keys (10 soft keys and a
"Function Menu" key and a "Operation Menu" key at both sides of the 10 keys).
The "Function Menu" and "Operation Menu" keys are used to select functions in
the soft keys.
The g-inch CRT has 5+2 soft keys.
These soft keys can be assigned with various functions, according to the needs.
Calculation key (CALC)
The following operator and formula can be used.
i) Operator
+ (Sum) - (Difference) x (Product) / (Quotient)
ii) Function
SIN (sine), COS (cosine), TAN (tangent), ATAN (arc tangent), SQRT (square
root), ABS (absolute value), ACOS (arc cosine), ASIN (arc sine), LN
(natural logarithm), EXP (exponent)
Characters input via keys are once input in the key-input buffer and displayed
on the lower part of the CRT screen.
When the CALC key is pressed, operation command in the buffer is executed.

Example 1
Key-in buffer data
X[100*5 + 200/5].
When the CALC key is pressed, the key-input buffer data becomes as: X540.

Example 2
Key-input buffer data
[IO i- 20 * 30 + 400/81
When the CALC key is pressed, the key-input data becomes:
660.
Tool post selection key (HDl/HD2) (150TTA, 15-TTF only)
A MDI/CRT panel is used for two tool post. On which tool post the operations
and displays are done is selected by w the tool post selection key (HDl/HD2).
Following operations and displays are selected between two tool posts by this
key.
1) Program
2) Part program editing
3) Setting and displaying tool compensation values
4) Display of command values
5) Inputting and displaying a program for MD1 operation
6) Setting and displaying custom macro variables

The following fucntions are mainly available via the CRT/MD1 panel:
1) Actual position display and actual position presetting
2) Contents of program display, program directory display (display of program
number, program name, part program storage length left, number of programs
left)
3) Program editing
4) Offset amount display and setting
5) Commanded value display, MD1 input
6) Parameter setting and display
7) Alarm message/operator message display
8) Custom macro variables display and setting
9) Tool life management data display and setting
10) Diagnosis
11) Others

- 151 -
23.2 Manual Data Input (MDI)

The following data can be input via the MD1 panel.

a). Program input (multiple-block command is possible)
b) Setting data input (for tool compensation data, etc.)
c) parameter input (rapid traverse rate, acceleration/deceleration time
constants, etc.)
d) Dignosis data input
e) Tape storage and editing operation
f) Other operations

23.3 Display

The following data are displayed on the CRT screen. The 9” CRT can display 680
characters (40 x 17 lines). The 10" LCD, 10" PDP, and 14" CRT can display 1998
characters (74 x 27 lines).

1) Status display
Status of the control unit (alarm, editing) is displayed.
Status display can be seen on the bottom of the CRT screen (one line above
the soft key display).

@ @I@ 0 @@O @@
16 TAPE JOG STOP READ MIN FIN 16:52:1X @ ALM
17
. (Soft keys)

40

The above figure is the 9” CRT. The same display is done on the 14” CRT
(from the left).
The display has ten fields from 0 to 9, and the following is displayed
in all types of FANUC NCs.

0 Automatic operation mode selection (MEM MD1 TAPE EDIT or ****)

The currently selected automatic operation mode is displayed. When
automatic operation is not selected, the "****" is displayed.

@ Manual operation mode selection (JOG HND INC J+H REF or ***)
The currently selected manual operation mode is displayed. When manual
operation is not selected, the "***" is displayed.

@ Automatic operation status (RSET STOP HOLD STRT MSTR or SRCH)

Displays what status the automatic operation is.
REST - Resetting
STOP - Automatic operation stop
HOLD - Automatic operation hold
STRT - Automatic operation start
MSTR - Manual numeric command start
SRCH - Sequence number searching

@ Program editing status (READ PNCH VRFY SRCH COND EDIT or ****)
Displays what status the program editing is.
READ - Registering
PNCH - Punching
VRFY - Verifying
SRCH - Searching
COND - Arranging memory

- 152 -
 EDIT - Other editing operation (INSERT, ALTER, etc.)
**** - No editing done

0 lJxis move, dwell status

a) In case other than 15-T (MTN, DWL or ***)
"MTN" is displayed when axis in moving, "DWL" when dwelling, and
"***" in other cases.
b) In case of 150TT (M/M, D/D, */*)
"M" is displayed when axis in moving, "D" when dwelling, and "*" in
other cases for each tool post.
Indication left to the slash "/" shows the status of the 1st tool
post and right to the slash the 2nd tool post.
Example)
M/M: Axis is moving at 1st and 2nd tool posts.
D/M: Dwelling at 1st tool post and axis in moving at 2nd tool
post.

8 M, S, T, B, functions' status
a) In case other than 150TB (FIN or gc>k*)
When miscellaneous function as M, S, T, B, functions are under
execution (waiting for end signal from the PMC), "FIN" is
displayed, and "***" in other cases.
b) In case of 150TTB (F/F or */*, etc.)
When miscellaneous function as M, S, T, B, functions are under
execution (waiting for end signal from the PC), "F" is displayed,
and *'*'Iin other cases for each tool post.
Indication left to the slash I'/*' shows the status of the 1st tool
post and right to the slash the 2nd tool post.
Example)
F/** Miscellaneous function is in progress at the 1st tool post.
It is not in progress at the 2nd tool post.

@‘@’ Emergency stop status (EMG)

When emergency stop is commanded, display of @ and @ is not done
but "--EM&-" is displayed with inverted.

0 Current time display

The current time is displayed in units of hour, minute and second.
Example) 16 : 52 : 13

@ Non-volatile memory write status (@ or space)

"@'Iis displayed when data is being written in the non-volatile memory
for parameter, tool offset and NC part program etc.

@ Alarm or label skip status (ALM BAT WRN LSK or ***)

"ALM (inverted blinking display)" is displayed when an alarm occurs.
"WRN (inverted blinking display)" is displayed when a warning message
is issued on the CRT.
"BAT" is displayed when a signal predicting battery down is sent out.
After changing the battery and pushing the RESET key, "BAT" is erased.
The battery is used to back up memory contents to prevent erasure, such
as parameter, tool offset and NC part program etc.
"LSK" is displayed when tape reader is under label skip status, and
when all of alarm, warning and battery alarm does not occur.
'?***'I
is displayed, when it is not above status.

2) Key input display

Data input via the address keys or the numerical keys are displayed at the
left lower part of the screen.

- 153 -
3) Program number, sequence number display
Program number, sequence number is displayed on the right upper part of the
screen,

4) Alarm display
Alarm number and its contents are displayed briefly.

s> Warning mes sage display

Warning mes sage contents are displayed.

6) Present position display

Relative position and position in the work coordinates are displayed in
3-times magnified characters.

7) Total position display

Relative position, position in the work coordinates, position in the machine
coordinate, and remaining move distance are displayed in one screen.

8) Command value display

The following two displays are performed.
i) Previously commanded modal value (LAST)
ii) Command value executed (ACTIVE)

Setting (parameter set by the operator) display

Displays setting value.

Tool offset amount display

Displays offset value. Relative position is also displayed at the same
time.

11) Program display

1) Display of program for editing.
ii) Display of program currently under execution.
iii) Display of program list.
A list of program number, program name, and size of programs stored in
the memory is displayed.
Remaining memory size is also displayed.

12) Parameter display

13) Self diagnosis result display

14) Custom macro variables display

15) Operator message, external operator message, external alarm message display

16) Actual speed

i) Actual feedrate per minute (mm/min or inch/min)
ii) Actual feedrate per rotation (mm/rev or inch/rev)
iii) Actual spindle speed (rpm)

17) Program check screen

The following are displayed on one screen.
i) Program number on execution
ii) Sequence number on execution
iii) Program text on execution
iv) Current position
v) Model G codes
vi) Model M codes

- 154 -
vii) T code
viii) Actual feedrate and spindle speed
ix) Status

(F7?aBw 08881-
08881 I410G91 GO1 X123. 2123. F288. :
>tQ0 662 X100. 2188. RlBB. F188. ;
Ms8;
%
(RELnTIEI CDIST TO GOI CG> CM)
X 231.334 x 91.666 (362 G94
z 225.487 z 97.512 G97 648
G91 669
622 me
CL) 0
cs> cm.!51 a
CF> 186. CFICT. F) BCWV?IIN~
CT) CW)

Fig. 22.3

- 155 -
23.4 Language Selection A/B

The Japanese, English, German, French, Italian, Spanish and Swedish are pr.epared
as display languages. Select the language to be displayed by parameters.
Both Japanese and English are supported by the standard system. In addition,
the language selection A option also provides German, French, and Italian. The
language selection B option provides Spanish and Swedish.

C0: *7 i:R’,) nJcsa< c0:oFF 1:clN)

(0: Is0 l:EIW KNmaxnz (0: Iso 1:EIW
(8: 8’J 1: 4-A) IWUT WIT = 0 (0:r?l 1: INM)
c1~3:R!5232c ItauTDEvIcE = 2 Cl-3:f?S232c
10: RMT-ELF 11:RsR 13:R!s422)
ouTFlJTDEvI(I= 2 (l-3:Rs232c
11:RsR 13:RS422)
IwuTDEuIcE = 3 -EL ED1T-
anFuTDflrIcE= 3 -a;. EDIT-

MD1 l *. ST@=’ l m.e . . . . . . 11:16:54 La

-_) SERVICE rEssFy;E

Japanese English ’
Y
I EINSTEL(N)
RmBGE(~IR>
TupFzLa = 1 c0:ws l:EIN> c0:m? l:rn?)
SrFHxxlDE = 0 c0: ISO 1:EIW tERIF TV
amEPw=o
= I
= 0 c0: 1% 1:EIR)
EIH#IEIt+fT = 0 C0:rn l:za_L)
EIW = 2 cl~3:Rs232c LNIT ENTIE = 0 <0:r?l l:PlmcE)
DISP D’m = 2 c1~3:Rs232c
10: FUIT-RF 11:fxs 13:Rs422) 11:&R 13:RS422)
10: RIIT-RF
s= 2 Cl-3: RS232c Cl-3:F?S232c
1l:QSR 13:RS422) -IL SORTIE = 2
11:RSR 13:Fs422)
EItGWEBXT = 3 -Hi. EDIT-
wSmmxsm= 3 -H3. EDIT- DISP D’ENl’= = 3 -BG. EDIT-
WREIL SORTIE = 3 -BG. EDIT-

~&s-WE *...
FIE_ l *8 **a 10:sg:52Ls<
CHPITR+

German French

I l?fGaJzcm) 08601-
INST LLW+CER)
-IF TV = 1 C0:DISIN 1: I&) 1= (0:&J 1:e >
m1c PEW0 = 0 c0: Is0 1:EIA)
= 0 (0: Is0 1:EIA)
lN1m IH4 = 0 c0:m l:fxc_IcE>
1-T EM. = 0 c0:rTl 1:TLm
DIP Im = 2 (1~3:Fs232c
10:RlT-BLF 11gas? 13:F?S422) iH#T. UTR = 2 Cl-3:RS232c
Fpp#K: USCITR = 2 <1~3:Rs232c lfa:RplT-RF ll:w? 13:RS422)
ll:f49? 13:Fs422> lJT0 t+zamlm = 2 <1~3:P4sz?c
= 3 -BG.EDIT- ll:Qs? 13:F!S422>
DISP IH3R
IH#T. UTR = 3-BR.RED-
WF%RC USCITh = 3 -BG.EDIT-
uTIjMsLmzusT= 3-BR.RED-

Italian Spanish
FIJACIONCFRUU -1N86888
WRIF W = 1 c0:DESc l:aEo
amrcr, PERF = 0 (0: Iso 1:EIA)
WIDfw ENmw?= 0 c0:rrl 1:FuA.a
DIP ENTRAm = 2 C1_3:~S23x
10:RMT-BLF ll:Rs? 13:RS422)
DIP SFLIDFI = 2 c1-3:RS232c
1l:QsR 13:m22>
DIS' ENTRNm = 3 -EDI-m PRIo-
DIS, SLIDR = 3 -EDI-NoFJ!?Io-

Swedish

- 156 -
23.5 Clock Function

The Series 15 incorporates a clock to display the time in the hour/minute/second

format on each display screen. Some screens allow display of the year, month,
and day.
The custom macro system variable can be used to read the time.
PMC will be told the time through the window.

23.6 Run Hour and Parts Number Display

This function displays the integrated power-on time, the integrated cycle
operation time, the integrated cutting time and timer on the CRT display screen.
The integrated cycle operation time, the integrated cutting time and timer can
be altered and preset, using the MDI.
In addition to the above, this function displays the count of the total number
of parts machined, the number of parts required and the number of parts on the
CRT screen. Each time 1102, M30 or a parameter set M code is executed, the
count of the total number of parts and the number of parts stored in memory is
incremented by 1.
If a program is prepared so as to execute M02, M30 or a parameter set M code
each time one part machining is completed, the number of parts machined can be
counted automatically.
If the count of the number of parts reaches the number of parts required, a
signal is output to the PMC side.
It is possible to change and preset the number of parts required and the number
of parts counted, using MDI. The number of parts required and the number of
parts counted can be read and written, using external data input/output function
and custom macro variables.

PWTS TOT%
PFlRTS
f=WTS
REQUIRED
COlNT
41 30

34HsPl
ET% TIME 12Hml
a_I?7-Iffi TIPE 1H 59M
FREEFmmSE ai2B-l

DNE = 1w @l/ 18
TIME = 20: 17: 17

23.7 Load Meter Display

The load values (torque values) of spindle motor and servo motor are displayed
in bar chart on the CRT. When the 140inch CRT is used, fluctuation waveform of
load value is also graphically displayed.
The most recent sampling values and fluctuation status (for one minute) are
displayed in bar chart display and waveform display, respectively. If the rated
load value of motor corresponding to each load meter is set to parameters, the
load meter displays 100% when the load value is the rated load value.
The load meter, position in the work coordinate system, command rate, real rate,
override value, number of cutting parts, and run hour are displayed on the load
meter display screen.
The load meter can be displayed up to three servo motor axes and a parameter can
be used to select any one of three axes.
It is required that the load current of spindle motor should be informed to the
A/D converter of CNC to display the load of spindle motor.

- 157 -
 m-1 It& roJl Top
00123 N0000o
1 b4RsactTE ) (FEEI~QTE 91ru~Edrn~ (RlfTTB%~

k 123.4% MD. f : ;18BB. lea. 864

b 234.56’: a3.F: tt(t’?lf?llN) 2.

2 345.678
cm.5: 4fa.m
Kl. s: la(Gul)

(Tim?) PWTS: 60
CPEFwllffi TIK : 9H2w4f33
cm1t& TltE : yc 1m 14s
FqERReosE : m2mBzs

ml l m. SmT .... .-a FIN ... ~4( l . .

WJSIT~ PFzotRA CFFYT pRQ?m SETTIN SERulC WSSG ml OFPTE

.. 04 m MO< G E E C R

23.8 Menu Switch

Instead of the switches on the machine operator's panel, on/off commands of the
functions will be made possible via setting on the CRT/MDI. This function will
vastly decrease number of switches on the machine operator's panel.
On/off commands of the following function are available on the CRT screen.
1) Single block (SBK)
2) Machine lock (MLK)
3) Display lock (DLK)
4) Auxiliary functions lock (AFL)
5) Dry run (DRN)
6) Optional block skip (BDT 1 - 9)
7) Mirror image (MIX, MIZ, M13, ---)
8) Absolute switching (ABS)
Signals from the machine side is still valid with this function. When
corresponding signal commanded "I", the function will be "on".

23.9 Software Operator’s Panel

In this function, functions of switches on the machine operator's panel is done

by operation on the CRT/MD1 panel. Mode selection and jogging override, etc.
can be operated by setting operation via the CRT/MD1 panel with this function,
thus allowing commitance of corresponding switches on the machine operator's
panel.
This function is valid only when the screen is displayed with operator's panel.
Move cursor with the cursor operation keys, and select various operations,
viewing the screen.
The following operations can be done via the CRT/MD1 panel:
Modal selection

Manual pulse generator feed axis selection

Manual pulse generator move distance per pulse selection

Rapid traverse override

Jogging speed override
Feed rate override

Operational block skip (block delete)

Single block
D
Machine lock
Dry run

- 158 -
 E Memory protect

F Feed hole

G Jogging
Manual rapid traverse selection/incremental feed axis direction selection

H General purpose switch: Eight general purpose switches are provided and
each of these switches can be named by up to
eight alphanumeric characters.

There is a parameter per groups A - G shown above, which decides validity of

operation function by CRT/MD1 panel.

23.10 Graphic Display Function

This function allows display of tool path on the CRT screen, making program
check easier. The following functions are offered.
1) Tool path of the machining program can be displayed. Machining process can
be checked just by viewing the tool path drawn on the CRT screen.
Program check before machining can be done by displaying the programmed
locus on the CRT screen.
2) Display is possible with the X2 plane or 2X plane and scaling of the screen
is also possible.
Note) 14” color CRT/MD1 is required.

N00300
X exl.eae
z 4ea.m

F 0
S 0
lee.

7 T 404

8.063 Se.888 1m. 888 158. BBB

m . . . sm .... ... FIN . . . L9( . . .

STCP EWISE SHIFT ENmG

E
SfFlRf
WIN
aam4 GEleN
n

23.11 NC Format Guidance

A guidance for programming with NC format.

i) List of G code.
ii) Standard format 1 block for G code guidance can be displayed on the CRT
screen. In case if you have forgotten the G code or G code format, for
example, by referring to this guidance, it eliminates the trouble of
referring to the operator's manual.
Thus, it reduces the programming time.

- 159 -
 (671 : ROUGH CUTTIffiCTUlr\(Iffi)l
671P--Q-U--W-D-F-S--T-:

P:lST N FOR SI-WE U:X m

Q:W N FOR S-W% w:Z (y113wFwcE
D:CUITINGIEPTti

EDIT l ** STOP ++++ +++ +++ 15:28:@p LsK

fU-ER INSERT DELETE IX_T_WD BGEDIT+

23.12 NC Format Guidance with Picture

Standard format of 1 block for G code guidance can be displayed on CRT screen
with picture.

~irlEMYW)
01111 NOOOOO

I
1’2
0:.
t
* 'R
(GE7 : BmlffitlwuL))
Gm x- Y- z- R- o- f- L- :

2:t POINT o:san tlw5 2)

R:R POINT

Note) This function is only available for 10" LCD/MDI, 10" PDP/MDI, or 14”
CRT/MDI.

23.13 Simple Conversational Automatic Programming Function

The NC part program can be created by selecting the menu displayed on the
CRT or inputting data according to the menu instead of programming by using
the NC format. Namely the programmer selects in the processing order those
required for the actual cycle from among the menus each representing such
turning processes as the rough cycle, thread cutting, etc. or such drilling
processes as boring, tapping, etc. Furthermore, the data required for each
process, for exampie the hole position, the hole depth, etc. is asked in the
menu. The programmer can create the program by simply inputting numeric
values in reponse to these questions.
Basically this function is realized by the custom macro to be created by
each machine tool builder. Since the machine tool builder can freely decide
on the menu of which processes to prepare or how to prepare the menu of the
data required for each cycle, he can utilize a function incorporating his
original processing know-how.

- 160 -
Note 1) To order this function, it is also necessary to order the following
options:
i) Custom macro
ii) 80 m of part program storage length
Of the part program storage length, 35 m are used for the simple
conversational programming program registration area, etc.
Therefore, the part program storage length of a normal NC format is
35 m less than the total length. As these require the part program
storage length of the custom macro for the cycle which was created
by the machine tool builder, the part program storage length which
the end user can program in the NC format is obtained by subtracting
such a part program storage length.

Note 2) This function is applicable only to the 9" CRT/MDI. It is not

applicable to the 14” CRT/MDI.

23.14 Data Protection Key

A data protection key can be installed on the machine side for protection of
various NC data. The following three input signals are offered, according to
type of data to be protected.

1) KEY 1
Allows input of tool compensation amount and work zero point offset amount.
2) KEY 2
Allows setting data input, and absolute coordinate value preset.
3) KEY3
Allows part program input and editing.

23.15 Directory Display of Floppy Cassette/Program Fife

File names in the floppy cassette (FANUC CASSETTE Fl) and program file (FANUC
PROGRAM FILE Mate) can be listed on the CRT displasy (directory display). Each
file name of up to 17 letters can be displayed in directory display.
Files in the floppy cassette are:
NC command program, NC parameter/pitch error compensation data, tool
compensation data, and etc.
When NC program in part program memory is written into the floppy cassette,
program number can be given to it as a file name. When NC parameter/pitch error
compensation data is written into the floppy cassette, "PARAM AND PITCH" is
given them as a fixed name. When tool compensation data is written into the
floppy cassette, "OFFSET" is given to it as a fixed name.

23.16 /Machining Time Stamp Function

Up to 10 machining times counted each main program are displayed on the program
machining time display screen in time, minute, and second. When more than ten
programs are operated, programs are discarded in the order of older ones.
In the memory operation mode, the time from the initial start to the next reset
or to the M02/M30 can be counted after reset.' The excution time for M, S, T and
B functions are added, but the time during operation stop is not added.
The machining time being displayed can be inserted (stamped) in the program
stored into the memory as comments. The machining time is inserted after the
program number as a comment.
The machining time inserted after the program number can be displayed instead of
the tape length of program (amount of used memory) on the program directory
screen. The display between machining time and tape length can be selected by
the setting.

- 161 -
When the program6 86 shown above are resigtered, if “SHAFT” is specified, a
directory shown below is displayed.

DIRECTORY(GROtP) 01110 tsxEp@

08881 C%k%=T-1888. PRIN 1: 10 FEES *

CEGEG?C-T-2BB. P-WIN 1: 5pAGES
01888 CSWFT-1888. SUB 1: 25-s
01010 CSHVT-1881. SUB >: 1fwEs
01110 E!-QFT-2888. SUB ): 11 FRGES

FEEPQGE: 6739C 1232H) FREE FILE: 71

EDIT +** STW +*** *+* *** 15:08:33 LSK

Iti

Fig. 23.17 (b) Directory display on each group

23.18 Run Hour Display

Run time of automatic operation is calculated in second' unit, and the

cumulative value is displayed in hour, minute, seconds. Cumulative value is
kept after power is turned off. Two types of display are possible; a type in
which the operator can reset the time to 0, and a type in which the reset cannot
be done. This function is useful for process management, and periodical checks.

23.19 Function for Displaying Multiple Subscreens

At times, the operator may want to see the data of two or more CNC screens at a
time. For exa.mple:

l When the operator wants to check the current program on the graphic screen

This function displays subscreens on the main screen.

The current position, current program, cutter compensation value, alarm, and
other data can be displayed on a subscreen. There are very few restrictions on
the data items that can be displayed on a subscreen and on the position and
size of the subscreen. Simple input and editing are permitted for data on a
subscreen. (On the position subscreen, for example, the origin/preset opera-
tion is permitted. On the cutter compensation subscreen, a compensation value
can be input. Program editing and other complicated operations are not
allowed.)
Multiple subscreens are displayed as shown below:

- 163 -
 Tool. orrscr 00010 N00005
NO. MfA No. MIA

01') 1.so0

I
001 l.SOO 00010 ,
002 0.000 011 0.000 c70 cs5 I x 0.000
001 0.000 Ol? 0.000 coo x0 YO , Y 0.000
004 0.000 010 0.000 150. I t 50.000
005 2.000 011 0.000 C&l HI I

001 0.000 021 0 .ooo CC2 X30. Y10. 03 I

(HAcnrwc)

007 0.000 021 0.000 210. I I 10.000

001 0.000 024 0.000 COLY')O.
011100 I Y ao.000
009 0.000 0 . x10. I L s0.000
Cl4

LIIlI’l
010 0.000 0 c90
011 0.000 0 coo f

011 0.000 0 Cl7 ho.c1 IC%l)

011 0.000 0 c40 X m
014 0 .ooo 00s Ml Y 10.000
01% 0.000 0 f 100
t 0.000
011 0.000 0 s 100

t
?-xx- PPO- 01ILrn l o- srr- SCRVIC nu- C-Hr
flrn c&u CMUK TItc t sue c

On a single main screen, up to five subscreens can be displayed. Information

describing a displayed subscreen (data items, displayed position, and size) is
stored. These items need not be specified each time the power is turned on.
(Information on subscreens for up to all 30 main screens can be stored.)

23.20 Help Function

The help function displays detailed information about the alarm state of the
CNC unit and soft key operation in a window on the CRT screen. This function
can display the following:

(1) Alarm help

Alarms are issued when the operator makes an error in operating the CNC
unit or a failure occurs in the CNC unit. The help function explains the
cause and location of the error in detail. It also explains action to be
taken to cancel the alarm condition.

(2) Soft key help

The soft keys displayed on the CRT screen depend on the operating state of
the CNC unit. The help function explains in detail the function of each
soft key that is currently displayed. It describes when a soft key needs
to be pressed and what happens to the CNC unit when the key is pressed.
While operating the CNC unit, the operator can obtain necessary
information from the window on the CRT screen without referring to the
manuals.

23.21 Parameter Setting (RS-232-C) Screen

It is possible to specify the parameters for the RS-232-C interface, remote

buffer, and RS-422 interface the same screen.

23.22 Operation History

This function always collects history data for keys pressed by the NC operator,
the states of signals set by the NC operator, and alarms that occurred. In
addition, this function enables the operator to monitor history data when
necessary.
The main features of this function are:

(1) Colle
_ cting the following history data items:
(iJ Procedures in which the NC operator pressed MD1 keys
@ Changes in the states (on or off) of the input/output signals
@ Alarm data

- 164 -
 @ Time stamp (time and date) r.

(2) ing for the following data items:

Search'
@ Input/output signals
@ Alarm data
@ Time and date

(3) Outputting the following data items (punch-out):

@ All history data items
@ A selected range of history data items

(4) Selecting signals

Up to 20 input/output signals can be selected for history data collection.

(5) Alarm history data check

Details of alarm history data, including the time and date of alarm
occurrence, can be checked.

23.23 Waveform Diagnosis Function

Waveform diagnosis functions are classified into the following two types:

(1) Single-shot type

This type of waveform diagnosis function enables graphic display of
waveforms that represent variations in the following data items.
This function can generate triggers for sampling data when a machine
control signal rises or falls. This facilitates the adjustment of servo
and spindle motors.
[Data items for servos]
Servo errors, number of pulses to be generated, torque, electric current
commands, heat simulation, and composite speed for all axes
[Data items for spindles]
The speed of each spindle and the value of the load meter for each spindle
[Data items for signals]
On or off states of machine control signals specified by signal addresses

(2) Servo-alarm type

This type of waveform diagnosis function triggers terminating data
sampling when a servo alarm occurs or when the specified machine signal
rises or falls. The termination of data sampling can be delayed by a
specified time since the trigger is generated, thus facilitating detection
of faults.
Recorded data items can be input or output to or from an external device
using the reader/punch interface.
[Data items for servos]
Servo errors, number of pulses to be generated, torque, electric current
commands, heat simulation, and composite velocity for all axes
[Data items for spindles]
None
[Data items for signals]
None

23.24 CRT Screen Saving Function

The CRT screen saving function clears all data items on the CRT screen when the
power is on and the CRT has not used within a certain period of time. This
function is effective for extending the life of the screen.

- 165 -
(1) Small CRT/MD1 Panel
To clear all data items on the CRT screen, press the <SHIFT> and <CAN>
keys simultaneously. To subsequently redisplay data items on the CRT
screen, press any key.

(2) Panels Other than the Small CRT/MD1 Panel

To clear all data items on the CRT screen ) press any function key and the
<CAN> key simultaneously. To subsequently redisplay data items on the CRT
screen, press any key.
The following function keys can be used.

23.25 Displaying Internal Position Compensation Data

This function displays CNC internal data, related to the following functions,
while each function is being executed:

Tool-tip radius compensation

Tool position compensation [only for TT series]
Canned drilling cycle
Programmable mirror image [only for T series]

23.26 Displaying Data Related to Coordinates

This function displays the following coordinate data:

(i) Manual shift of the coordinate system when the manual absolute signal is
off

(ii) Shift of the coordinate system by manual interrupt in automatic/manual

simultaneous operation

(iii) Offset for the workpiece coordinate system whose origin is set by the G92
command (G50 for G code system A) or MD1 operation

(iv) Offset for the local coordinate system, set by the G52 command

(V> Shift in the coordinate system by a move command in the machine lock
state

- 166 -
24. PART PROGRAM STORAGE AND EDITING

24.1 Foreground Editing

The following part program storage and editing is possible.

1) Program tape registration to the memory.

- Single program registration
- Multi program tape registration
- Additional program registration to registered programs
2) Program input via MDI.
3) Program deletion.
- Single program deletion
- All programs deletion
4) Program punching.
- Single program punching
- All programs punching
5) Program editing.
a) Change
- Word change
- Change of l-word to multi-words
b) Insertion
- Work insertion
- Multi words, and multi blocks insertion
c) Deletion
- Word deletion
- Deletion to EOB
- Deletion to the specified word
6) Part program collation
Collation of program stored in the memory and program on the tape can be
done.

24.2 Background Editing

Part program storage and editing can be done during machining. The same
functions as foreground editing can be performed.

24.3 Expanded Part Program Editing

The following editing is possible.

1) Conversion
- Address conversion
An address in the program can be converted to another address. For
example address X in the program can be converted to address Y.
- Word conversion
A word in the program can be converted to another word. For example, a
programmed MO3 can be converted to M04.
2) Program copy
A program can be copied to make a new program.
- Copy of all the program
- Copy of part of a program
3) Program move
A part of a program can be moved to make a new program.
4) Program merge
A new program can be created by merging two programs.
5) Copy and move to the key-in buffer
A part of a program can be copied or moved to the key-in buffer.

- 167 -
6) Sequence number automatic insertion
The sequence number, where a certa3.n increment value is added to the
sequence number of the previous block can be automatically inserted at the
head of each block in preparation of programs by the part program editing.
The initial value of sequence number and a certain increment amount can be
set.
This is a new feature of existing option: Expanded part program editing

24.4 Number of Registered Programs

Note 1) Requires 80 m or more part program storage length.

Note 2) Requires 320 m or more part program storage length.

24.5 Part Program Storage Length

The following part program storage length can be selected.

40/80/160/320/640/1280/2560/5120 m

Note) Part program storage length may decrease according to options selected as
follows.

1) Custom macro common variables

Table 24.5 (a) Common variables and shortened part program length

I Common Variables Shortened Part Program Length Remarks

I
Common variable A Om #lOO - I%149 #so0 - #549

Common variable B Om I?100- #199 #500 - #599

Common variable C 2.2 m #IO0 - #199 0500 - #699

Common variable D 7.4 m #loo - /I199 !I500- #999

*

- 168 -
2) Number of offset pairs.

Table 24.5(b) Offset pairs and shortened part program length (15TB)

Shortened part
Offset memory Offset pairs Notes
program length
I

32 om No differences between
geometry/wear
64 1.5m

160 5.9m

B '32 1.5m Differences between

geometry/wear
64 4.4m

160 13.2m

Table24.5(c) Offset pairs and shortened part program length (STTB)

Shortened part
Offset memory Offset pairs Notes
program length

16 Om No differences
between geometry/wear
A
32 1.5 m No differences
between geometry/wear

16 1.5 m Difference between

geometry/wear
B
32 4.4 m Difference between
geometry/wear
, 1
3) Tool life management
- Part program length shortens by 5.9m.

24.6 Play Back

Program can be prepared by storing machine position obtained by manual operation

in the memory as program position. Data other than the coordinate value (M
codes, G codes feed rates, etc.) are registered in the memory by the same
operation as part program storage and editing.

- 169 -
24.7 External I/O Device Control

Part program registered and punch can be commanded externally.

1) Program registration
A part program can be registered in memory through the input device selected
for foreground editing (in case of part program edit mode) or through the
input device selected for background editing (in case of other than part
program edit mode) using the external read start signal.
2) Program punch
A part program can be punched through the output device selected for
foreground editing (in case of part program edit mode) or through the output
device selected for background editing (in case of other than part program
edit mode) using the external punch start signal.

24.8 High-speed Part Program Registration Function

This function speeds up the registration of part programs in the foreground

mode (EDIT mode). In the background mode, part programs are registered at
normal speed.

24.9 Function Selection with Hard Keys

Function selection can be performed with not only soft keys, but also with the
following hard keys:

These hard keys correspond to the following function selection items:

POS Current position

PROG Program
OFFSET : Offset
P-CHECK Program check
SETTING Setting
SERVICE Service
MESSAGE Message
OTHERS : Screen selected by parameter 2215

24.10 Multi-Edit Function

The multi-edit function allows two programs to be edited at the same time by
displaying them in the left right halves of the program text screen.

- 170 -
25. DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS

25.1 Self Diagnosis Functions

The CNC checks the following itself.

1) Abnormality of detection system
2) Abnormality of position control unit
3) Abnormality of servo system
4) Overheat
5) Abnormality of CPU
6) Abnormality of ROM
7) Abnormality of RAM
8) Abnormality of data transfer between CRT/MD1
9) Abnormality of part program storage memory
10) Abnormality in tape reader read function
11) Abnormality in data transfer between PMC

Signals from position coder, input/output signals, and inner status of the NC
can be displayed on the CRT screen.

25.2 Failure Diagnosis Guidance

As computer technology has developed, research and development of Artificial

Intelligence (AI) has greatly progressed in various fields. There are many AI
applications such as automatic translation, picture recognition, audio
recognition, and intelligent robots. Among these applications, expert systems
have already reached the most practical level.

Series 15 introduced this expert system as a numeric controller for the first
time in the world. This expe*rtsystem is used for failure diagnosis of the CNC
machine tool. The failure diagnosis guidance function of Series 15 has various
features as shown below.

1) By storing know-how of experts who master troubleshooting and measures

against various failures occurring in the machine in the CNC memory, the
reasoning engine built into the CNC troubleshoots the failure cause of the
machine based on the stored know-how in the same process used by the
experts.

2) The operator may only perform simple conversational operations such as

inputting the failure phenomena through the CRT/MD1 unit and answering
questions given from the CNC if necessary, while the CNC diagnoses the
failure instead of an expert.

3) The functions for reading data in the control unit which are the parameter
contents and the command values such as the feed rate and G code and the
data transferred between the machine and the control unit, can be built into
the know-how data base to allow establishment of advanced and real time
failure diagnosis.

4) Various commands for graphic display can also be built into the know-how
data base. The questions and the instruction of the failure cause given to
the operator can be made easy to understand by illustrating the machine
parts on the screen with these graphic display commands.

- 171 -
5) The expert know-how can be programmed in easy descriptions using the FANUC
Mm. The rule for expressing the know-how is prescribed in an
easy-to-understand format called a production rule "IF . . . . . THEN 0 . . . ” The
know-how described in the program is stored in the CNC know-how data base
after being converted into the object format on the FANUC MMC.

Each know-how can be handled as an independent module to allow easy

addition, correction, and deletion of know-how.

7) The failure diagnosis contents can be changed by changing the know-how data
base contents only to enable construction of the original failure diagnosis
expert system meeting the needs of each machine.

- 172 -
 Series 15 Machine tool

Reasoning engine

Operator
l Backward
reasoning

Q 4

Know-how data base.

o Production tool
(If . ..a THEN . . . .
o Functions to
retrieve internal
status (Such as I/(
signals,
parameters, and
command values)

FANUC MMC

o Porgramming the expert

know-how in simple
Floppy disk

0
descriptions.
o Converting the program into
the object know-how data
0 base object program.
0

- 173 -
26. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT

The NC has the following input/output data.

These data are input/output via various input/output devices as CRT/MDI, tape
reader, etc.

1) Input data
The NC has the following input data.
- Part program
- Tool compensation amount, Work zero point offset amount
- Tool life management data.
- Setting data
- Parameters

2) Output data
The NC has the following output data.
- Part program
- Tool compensation amount, Work zero point offset amount
- Setting data
- Parameters

26.1 Tape Reader

26.1.1 Tape reader without reels

1) Reading speed 300 ch/sec (60Hz) or 250 ch/sec (50Hz)

2) Reading method Opto-electrical (LED)
3) Tape capacity 2Om
(When installed inside the control unit cabinet)

26.1.2 Tape reader with reel

1) 300 ch/sec +10% (50/6OHz)

Reading speed
2) 600 ch/sec TlO% (50/60Hz)
Winding speed
3) Opto-electrical (LED)
Read method
4) Reel radius 187mm dia.
Reel capacity
150m of tape (tape thickness 0.108mm) windable
5) Tape capacity 2Om
(When installed inside the control unit cabinet)
6) Tape rewinding function
Automatically rewinds up to % (IS0 code) or ER (EIA code) by
M30 command.
(This feature is effective with reels.)
Only in case of free standing type cabinet, a tape reaer can be mounted in the
cabinet.

- 174 -
The following tape can be used in this NC.

Table 26.1.2 Specification of paper tapes used in the CNC

Item Tape reader with/without reels

Kind of tape 8-channel paper tape (Mylar tape cannot be

used)

Light transmission rate I 40% or less

(Transmission light)
x 100%
(including light)

Color of tape Any color is usable as long as light

transmission percentage is 40% or less
(black, grey, blue, pink, white).

Standard Material JIS C 6243 or EIA RS-227-A or IS0 1729

(Provided that light transmission rate of
item 2 is satisfied).

Dimensions and JIS C 6246 or EIA RS-227-A or IS0 1154

locations of hole

26.2 Reader/Puncher Interface

The following can be input/output via the reader/puncher interface.

a) Part program registration
b) Tool offset amount, work zero point offset amount, tool life management d&a
input
C) Parameter input
d) Part program punch
e) Tool offset amount punch
f) Parameter punch

26.3 Input Device

The following Input/Output devices are prepared, which are connectable to the
reader/puncher interface.

26.3.1 Portable tape reader

The portable tape reader is a carrying type paper tape reader. Used to load
program, data, and parameter t'o the NC. The main feature of the portable tape
reader is as follows: For the outline dimensions, refer to Appendix 4 Fig. 18.
Read speed: 300 ch/sec (6OHz), 250 ch/sec (50Hz)
Read method: Opto-electrical (LED)
Interface with the NC: Reader/puncher interface

26.3.2 FANUC PROGRAM FILE mate

The built-in hard disk enables data to be stored and it can be connected to the
reader/puncher interface to input data to CNC. This hard disk has a large
storage capacity of approximately 250,000 m of paper tape data, so it can
register a maximum of 1024 command programs.
It can be connected to the remote buffer to achieve high-speed transfer of' a
maximum of 920 kbps (Synchronous method).
The hard disk is sealed-to be continuously used in a factory environment.

- 175 -
26.3.3 FANUC Handy File

The FANUC Handy File is a handy, multifunctional floppy disk drive unit. It
enables programs to be transferred or edited by the operation on the unit or by
remote control from a connected device.

Dimensions : 192 X 250 X 50 mm (excluding protrusions)

Weight : About 1.4 kg
Floppy disk to be used : 3.5” (maximum formatted capacity: 1.44 MB)

- 176 -
27. SAFETY FUNCTIONS

27.1 Emergency Stop

With the emergency stop, all commands stops, and the machine stops immediately.
Connect the "emergency stop" signal both to the control unit and to the servo
unit side.
When emergency stop is commanded, servo excitation is also reset, and servo
ready signal will also turn off. Move distance of the machine will still be
reflected in the actual position and machine position will not be lost (Follow
up function). After resetting the emergency stop, operation can thus be
continued without need of another reference point return.
Whether to reset the NC by emergency stop or to rise an alarm without resetting,
is selected by parameter.

27.2 Overtravel Functions

27.2.1Overtravel

When the movable section has gone beyond the stroke end, a signal is output, the
axis decelerates to a stop, and overtravel alarm is displayed.
All directions on all axes has overtravel signals.

27.2.2 Stored stroke check 1 ,

The movable section of the machine is parameter set in machine coordinates

value. If the machine moves beyond the preset range, it decelerates to a stop
and alarm is displayed. (This function is valid after manual reference point
return at power on.)

The shaded area is

the forbidden area.

This function can be used instead of hardware overtravel limit switch. When
both is equipped with, both area valid,

- 177 -
272.3 Stored stroke check 2,3

1) Stored stroke check 2

Inside the area specified by parameters is the forbidden area.

This shaded area is

the forbidden area.

2) Stored stroke check 3

The designation of the forbidden area can be specified by parameters or
program.
The forbidden area can be changed for each workpiece. Selection between
inside or outside as the forbidden area is made by parameters.

(LEO (I,K)

Outside is forbidden area Inside is forbidden area

Program
G22 x 2 I K ;
Storedstzkecheck 2 and 3 can be made effective or ineffective by G code.
G22: Stored stroke limit function ON
G23: Stored stroke limit function OFF

27.2.4 Stroke check before move

Before starting block move, end point coordinate value is checked according to
actual position of the machine and commanded move distance, to check whether
machine will move in the inhibition area of stored stroke check 1, 2 or 3. If
machine will invade the inhibition area, the machine is stopped right after move
in the block starts and an alarm is displayed.
This function checks whether the end point of the block invades the inhibition
area, but checking of the whole path is not done. When the machine enters the
inhibition area in the half way, an alarm will arise by stored stroke check 1, 2
or 3.

- 178 -
Example)

c- cH a
HKC
//
RC
//
9
Start point
Stops at point (a) by
stored stroke check 2

nt

Stopped right after move started,

by input range checking.

27.3 Interlock

27.3.1 Interlock per axis

Axis feed commanded to each axis can be stopped separately. If interlock is

commanded to any axis during cutting, all axes of the machine movement will
decelerate to a stop. When interlock signal is reset, the moving starts.

27.3.2 All axes interlock

Feed of all axes can be inhibited. When all axes interlock is commanded during
move, it decelerates and stops. When all axes interlock signal is reset, the
moving restarts.

27.3.3 Automatic operation all axes

Feed of all axes in the automatic operation can be inhibited. When automatic
operation all axes interlock is commanded during move, it decelerates to a
complete stop. When the automatic operation all axes interlock is reset, move
restarts.

27.3.4 Block start interiock

Start of the next block can be inhibited during automatic operation. Block
already started will continue to execute to the end. When block start interlock
is reset, execution starts from the next block.

- 179 -
27.3.5 Cutting block start interlock

Start of blocks with move commands other than positioning can be inhibited.
When cutting block start interlock is reset, execution of the next block is
restarted.
In case when spindle rotation was activated, or when spindle speed was changed,
cutting can be done in the correct speed by commanding, cutting block start
interlock till the spindle accelerates to the commanded speed.

27.3.6 Door interlock

The main power turns off if door of the NC cabinet is opened. (supported only
for free-standing cabinets) .

27.4 External Deceleration

Feed rate can be decelerated by an external deceleration signal from the machine
side. A feed rate after deceleration can be set by parameter.
External deceleration is prepared every axis and every direction. When the tool
is to be moved in‘the reverse direction futile time may not be washed since no
external deceleration is applied.
Conditions to make this signal effective are set by parameter:

1) Whether this signal is applied to rapid traverse only or to all feeds

2) Whether external deceleration in the + direction is made effective (each
axis)
3) Whether external deceleration in the - direction is made effective (each
axis)

This function allows the maximum of valid strokes and keeps shock to the machine
to a minimum, to stops at stroke end. This function is also useful when
overtravel of the machine from the stroke end in, for example, ATC or reference
point return, must be kept to a minimum.

- 180 -
27.5 Chuck/Tail Stock Barrier

It is used for checking the interference between the chuck and tail stocks and
preventing the damage of machines.
Set the area of entry prohibition from the exclusive setting screen according to
the shapes of chuck and tail stocks.
When a tool enters the area of entry prohibition during cutting, the travelling
of tool is stopped and an alarm message is displayed. The tool can be escaped
from the prohibition area by moving in the opposite direction to that on entry.
The Yes/No of this function is selected by the G22 (Stored stroke limit on),
G23 (Stored stroke limit off), and signal of machine side.

\ l

G code Machine signal Chuck barrier Tail stock barrier

G22 LOW Yes Yes

G22 HIGH Yes No

G23 Irrelevent No NO

The shape of chuck or tail stock is defined on the setting screen.

1) Dimension definition of chuck

Outer diameter Inner diameter

0 : Work coordinate system origin

- 181 -
 Symbol Description
1
I L Length of chucking claw
I
W Size of chucking (radius input)

Ll Holding length of chucking claw

Wl Holding difference of chucking claw (radius input)

I
CX Position of chuck (X axis)

CZ Position of chuck (2 axis)

2) Dimension definition of tail stock

x
+ t-Ll

@ : Work coordinate system origin

Symbol Description

I L 1 Length of tail stock I .

D Diameter of tail stock (Diameter input)

I
Ll Length of tail stock (1)

Dl Diameter of tail stock (1) (Diameter input)

1

L2 1 Length of tail stock (2)

D2 1 Diameter of tail stock (2) (Diameter input)

I
D3 Hole diameter of tail stock (Diameter input)

i
TZ Position of tail stock (2 axis)
A

- 182 -
27.6 Abnormal Load Detection

When a cutting tool collides with the machine body or is damaged during
cutting, the load torque applied to the servo motors is larger than during
normal feeding or cutting. The abnormal load detection function calculates the
load torque and transfers the value from the CNC to the PMC. If the load
torque is larger than the value set in a parameter, the function stop the motor
or reverses the motor rotation to retract the tool by the distance set in a
parameter. In this way, damage to the machine is prevented.

- 183 -
 28. STATUS OUTPUT

28.1 NC Ready Signal

This signal is sent to the machine side when NC power is on and control becomes
’ possible. Sending of this signal will be stopped when NC power is turned off.

28.2 Servo Ready Signal

This signal is sent to the machine side when the servo system becomes
operatable. Axes necessary to be braked must be braked when this signal is not
sent.

28.3 Rewinding Signal

This signal shows that tape reader or main program in memory is rewinding.

28.4 Alarm Signal

This signal is transmitted when the NC comes under an alarm status. Alarm type
signal is also sent out.
By this alarm type signal, differences between the "overtravel alarm", "over
heat alarm", "servo alarm", "program error alarmU or "control unit abnormality
alarm" are distinguished.

28.5 Distribution End Signal

This signal is sent out when pulse distribution of the M,S,T, or B functions has
ended, so that they can be used after move of the commanded block ends.
Note) In case of 150TTB, this signal is output on each tool post.

28.6 Automatic Operation Signal

This signal is sent out when it is under automatic operation.

28.7 Automatic Operation Start Lamp Signal

This signal is sent out when automatic operation is being activated.

28.8 Feed Hold Signal

This signal is sent out when automatic operation is holded by feed hold.

28.9 Reset Signal

This signal is sent out to show that the CNC has been reset.

28.10 I nposition Signal

This signal shows that an axis is under inposition status. This signal is
output for all axes.

28.11 Move Signal

This signal shows that an axis is moving. This signal is sent out for every
axis.
This move signal can be combined with the interlock signal to automatically
clamp and unclamp the machine, or control on/off of the lubricating oil.

- 184 -
28.12 Axis Move Direction Signal

This signal is output to show move direction of each axis. This signal is
output for each axis.

28.13 Rapid Traversing Signal

This signal shows that the move command is done under rapid traverse.

Note) In case of 150TTB, this signal is output on each tool post.

28.14 Tapping Signal

This signal is output to show that tapping cycle (G74, G84) is under operation.

28.15 Thread Cutting Signal

This signal shows that the machine is under thread cutting mode (G33).

Note) In case of 150TTB, this signal is output on each tool post.

28.16 Constant Surface Speed Control Signal

This signal shows that the machine is under constant surface speed control mode
(G96).

Note) In case of 150TTB, this signal is output on each tool post.

28.17 Inch Input Signal

This signal shows that input is done under inch input mode (G20).

28.18 DI Status Output Signal

To inform the exterior of the states of menu switch, software operator's panel,
which are set via CRT/MDI, and machine operator's panel, following DI state
output signals are sent.
- Mode selection signal
- Single block signal
- Manual absolute on/off signal
- Dry run signal
- Machine lock signal
- Displav lock signal
- Auxili&y function lock signal
- Optional block skip signal
- Mirror image signal

- 185 -
29. EXTERNAL DATA INPUT/OUTPUT

The external data input/output function allows NC operation by data sent from
outside the NC (for example from the machine side).
The following external data input/output are available.

1) External tool compensation

2) External program number search
3) External sequence number search
4) External work coordinate system shift
5) External machine coordinate system compensation
6) External alarm message
7) External operator message
8) External custom macro variable value input
9) External tool offset amount output
10) External program number output
11) External sequence number output
12) External work coordinate system shift amount output
13) External machine coordinate system compensation amount output
14) External custom macro variable value output

29.1 External Tool Compensation

In this function, offset number is specified from outside to change tool offset
amount.
The input signal designates whether the input tool offset amount is:
- absolute or incremental
- geometry offset or tool wear offset
- cutter radius compensation amount or tool length compensation amount
When 0 was specified for offset number, the offset number currently selected for
use is selected.
If the machine is equippped with automatic measurement devices of tools and
workpiece, error can be input to the NC with this function.
External tool compensation amount range is:
0 - +999999
in least-command increment.

29.2 External Program Number Search

A program number from 1 - 9999 can be given from outside to the NC to call the
corresponding program from the NC memory.
In machines with automatic loading function of various workpiece, this function
can be used to automatically select and execute program suitable to the
workpiece.

29.3 External Sequence Number Search

A sequence number from 1 - 99999 is given from outside to the NC, and the
sequence number is searched from the current selected program.

- 186 -
29.4 External Work Coordinate System Shift

The work coordinate system can be shifted for the shift amount given from
outside.
The input signal specifies whether the input shift amount is:
absolute or increment
- for which axis
- for which work coordinate system (G54 - G59), or for all coordinate
systems
This shift amount is not lost by power off.
The shift amount range is:
O- +99999999
in least Command increment.

29.5 External Machine Coordinate System Compensation

The machine coordinate system is compensated by offset amount given from

outside.
This offset amount always take absolute value; never an increment value.
The offset amount range is:
0 - +9999
in detecTion unit
When offset amount is input, the actual machine move distance is the difference
between the previous offset amount and current offset amount.
This function is used to compensate the machine coordinate system error caused
by mechanical deformation.

29.6 External Alarm Message

By sending alarm number from outside, the NC is brought to an alarm status; an

alarm message is sent to the NC, and the message is displayed on the CRT screen
of the NC. Reset of alarm status is also done with external data.
Up to 4 alarm numbers and messages can be sent at a single time. Alarm numbers
o- 999 can be sent to the NC, though the NC will display the number with an
"EX" to distinguish from the internal numbers.
Up to 30 characters of alarm message can be sent with a single alarm number.

29.7 External Operator’s Message

Message to the operator is given from outside the NC, and the message is
displayed on the CRT screen.
The message is sent after the operator message number (0 - 999). up to 4
messages with message numbers can be sent at a single time.
The message numbers 0 - 99 are displayed on the CRT screen along with the
message. An "EX" is put before the number when displayed on the screen.
Message numbers 100 - 999 will not be displayed on the CRT screen; only the
messages will be displayed on the CRT screen without the numbers.
Maximum 128 characters can be used for a single message. An external data will
clear the operator messages.

29.8 External Custom Macro Variable Valuelnput

By specifying Custom Macro Variable Value Input

By specifying custom macro common variable number from outside, the variable
value can be changed. Variable value of 0 - -4-99999999can be input.

- 187 _-
29.9 External Tool Offset Amount Output

A specified offset number of the tool offset amount can be output by a request
from outside the NC. When 0 is specified as offset number, the currentlv J
selected offset number will be output.

29.10 External Program Number Output

Main program number currently under execution can be output by an external

request.

29.11 External Sequence Number Output

Sequence number of the currently executed block can be output by an external

request.

29.12 External Work Coordinate System Shift Amount Output

Offset amount of the specified axis in the specified work coordinate system can
be output by an external request. When 0 is specified as the work coordinate
system number, the currently selected coordinate system number will be output.

29.13 External Machine Coordinate System Compensation Amount Output

Compensation amount of the specified axis in the specified machine coordinate

system can be output by an external request.

29.14 External Custom Macro Variable Value Output

Variable value of the specified common variable number can be output by an

external request.

- 188 -
 .

30. EXTERNAL WORK NUMBER SEARCH

Ry specifying work numbers of 01 - 31 externally (from the machine side, etc.),

program corresponding to the work number can be selected.
The work number and the program is corresponded in either of the following
methods according to parameter selection.

1) The work number equals the program number.

For example when work number 21 is specified, program, 00021 is selected.
2) The first 2 digits of the program number is optional, and the last 2 digits,
the work number.
3) The first 2 digits of the program number is the parameter set number, and
the last 2 digits the work number.

Note) In case of 150TT, work numbers 01 to 31 can be specified on each tool

post*

31 . POSITION SWITCHING FUNCTION

This function outputs a signal when machine coordinates along a control axis
are in the range specified by a parameter.
Specify in parameters a control axis and the range for machine coordinates in
which the position switching signal is output.
The position switching signal can be output on up to ten lines.

- 189 -
32 . MACRO COMPILER/EXECUTOR

The macro compiler compiles a program described in macro language into an

executable program. The executable program is then written into the F-ROM
(flash ROM), then executed by the macro executor. Compiling a macro program
into an executable program provides the following advantages:

(1) Fast execution of programs reduces machining time.

(2) Eliminating the possibility of damage caused by incorrect operation

increases reliability.

(3) No memory has to be used for tape storage, thus enabling memory to be used
for other purposes.

(4) Proprietary information incorporated into programs is protected because

executable programs are not displayed on the screen.

(5) Executable programs are simple to call.

(6) A range of interactive macro functions are provided to enable the creation
of a custom-designed screen on which NC programs can be interactively
created. The main interactive macro functions are as follows:

- Macro instructions (same as custom macros)

- Screen display (character screen and graphic screen)
- Reading entered keys (or soft keys)
- Registering CNC programs
- Interactive macro variables window (for alarm information, etc.)
- Reading PMC addresses ’
- RS-232C control

- 190 -
33 . MACHINE INTERFACE

33.1 Basic Machine Interface (BMI)

All functions of the Series 15 can be used with this interface.

Note) In case of 150TTB, only this interface is applicable.

33.2 3T Interface

This interface is compatible with the SYSTEM 3T.

There are limits to functions. For details, see Table 2. When used with I/O
cards, physical interface will be the same as the SYSTEM 3T.

33.3 6T Interface

This interface is compatible with the SYSTEM 6T.

There are limits to functions. For details, see Table 2. When used with
connection unit, physical interface will be the same as the SYSTEM 6T. *

- 19L -
34. PROGRAMMABLE MACHINE CONTROLLER (PMC-N)

Magnetic sequence circuit of the machine side can be incorporated in the CNC,
maximum input of 1024 points and output of 1024 points can be processed.

Connection Operator's panel

connection unit

Maximum Input Point 192 points 1024 points 96 points

Maximum Output Point 128 points 1024 points 64 points

Program PMC user program A Ladder; 8000 steps; Pascal; 0 KB

steps
PMC user program B Ladder; 16000 steps; Pascal; 32 KB

PMC user program C Ladder; 16000 steps; Pascal; 128 KB

PMC user program D Ladder; 16000 steps; Pascal; 384 KB

I PMC user program E I

Ladder; 16000 steps; Pascal; 936 KB

In addition to the sequence expression by conventional ladder diagram,

expression by PASCAL language has become possible, thus allowing more complex
control logics.
The sequence programs are stored in the PMC cassettes for high reliability and
easy maintenance.

Note) For the dedicated PASCAL area, PMC control B is required as basic option.

34.1 PMC Instruction

There are two types of PMC instructions, basic and functional.

1) Basic instruction

Basic instructions are used most extensively in the design of sequence

program and command to perform one-bit operations, such as AND, or OR, there
are 12 types.
The mnemonic language 1s as rollows;

W RD.NOT, WRT. WRT.NOT

AND, AND.NOT, OR, OR.NOT,
RD.STK, RD.NOT.STK,
AND.STK, OR.STK

2) Functional instruction

Functional instructions ease programming of machine interfaces that are

difficult to program with-basic instructions. There are 57 types. See the
following table.

- 192 -
 . ,
No Symbol Function No Symbol Function
L
1 END1 First level program end 30 XMOV Indexed data transfer
I
2 END2 Second level program end 31 XMOVB Binary indexed data transfer
,
3 END3 Third level program end 32 ADD Addition

4TMR Timer processing 33 ADDB Binary addition

I
5 TMRB Fixed timer processing 34 SUB Subtraction

6 TMRC Timer processing 35 SUBB Binary subtraction

,
7 DEC Decoding 36 MUL Multiplication

8 DECB Binary decoding 37 MU-LB Binary multiplication

!
9 CTR Counter (processing) 38 DIV Division
.
10 CTRC Counter processing 39 DIVB Binary division
,.
11 ROT Rotation control 40 NUME Constant definition
.
12 ROTB Binary rotation control 41 NUMEB Binary constant definition
L
13 COD Code conversion 42 DISP Message display
I
14 CODB Binary code conversion 43 DISPB Extended message display

15 MOVE Data transfer after AND 44 EXIN External data read

I
16 MOVOR Data transfer after OR 45 POSl Simple positioning module
. control
17 COM Common line control
4 46 Pos2 ’ Positioning module control
18 COME Common line control end I
I 1 47 POSDP Positioning module status
19 JMP Jump data read

20 JMPE Jump end 48 POSDO Positioning module control

I data output
21 PAR1 Parity check
1 49 SPCNT Spindle control
22 DCNV Data conversion
t 1 50 MONI Monitor control
23 DCNVB Extended data conversion
1 1 53 WINDR Window data read
24 COMP Comparison
1 54 WINDW Window data write
24 CoMP Comparison
4 55 LIBRY Library
25 COMPB Binary comparison
9 56 Library end
26 COIN Coincidence check
t 1 57 FNC9X Optional function
27 SFT Shift register comxnand(X p 0 - 7)
, k-
28 DSCH Data search
1
29 DSCHB Binary data search
A 4

- 193 -
34.2 NC Window

In addition to the former PMC functions, a large window between the PMC and the'
CNC is offered, for the machine tool builders to make software and incorporate
abundant new know-how. The following functions are available in the PMC through
the window.
b Read of MD1 key data.
Display of data on the CRT.
l

. Use of the non-volatile memory.

. Read of CNC data.
Machine position, skip position, servo delay amount,
acceleration/deceleration delay amount, custom macro variables, parameter
value, feed rate, diagnosis value, alarm number, tool offset data, modal
data.
. Change of CNC data
Manual pulse generator interruption amount, custom macro variables,
parameter value, feed rate, tool offset data.
b Format conversion of CNC command programs.
0 Input/output of CNC command programs
0 Input/output of data through reader/puncher interfaces

34.3 NC Window B

The PMC can process the following operations through the window.

1) Read out of tool management data

2) Graphic drawing
The 14” color CRT/MD1 unit is required.

34.4 Key Input from PMC

By allowing input signals from the PMC side-to the CNC side to turn on and off,
the same operation as operating keys on the CRT/MD1 panel can be performed. The
following applications are possible, for instance. After allowing to travel the
tool at an arbitrary machining position by using the playback function (option),
when to store its positions as the program command, X, Y, 2, INSERT, etc. must
be input via key operations. However, these operations can be realized simply
by depressing a switch on the operator's panel at the machine side. Namely,
just like same effects can be obtained by allowing key input signals such as X,
Y, 2, INSERT, etc. to turn ON/OFF at the PMC side, when a switch is depressed.

34.5 Output and Setting of PMC Parameters

The PMC parameters can be output through the reader/puncher interface. Also,
'the output tape can be read for setting the parameter again.

- 194 -
35 . MAN MACHINE CONTROL (MMC)

In the 1500TA, the CRT/MD1 is replaced by the man machine controller @MC).
Machine tool builders can incorporate highly advanced man-machine interface
functions such as conversational automatic programming or conversational
operation based on much knowhow.

35.1 Hardware Specifications

Item Specifications

Processor 320bit microprocessor.

Arithmetic processing unit can be optionally mounted.

Main memory 512 KB (including O/S area).

@AM) It can be expanded up to a total of 832 KB optionally.

Auxiliary ROM file 512 KB/l MB/Z MB

memory (including O/S area)

Data file Bubble memory

512 KB/l MB

Battery backup RAM

128 KB/256 KB/512 KB

Floppy disk Both-sided high density (format capacity

(option for 1MB) ’
developing 5-l/4 inch floppy disk x 2
softwares)

Display 14 inch color CRT (commonly used with the CRT/MD1 of CNC and
PMC)

Character display Alphanumeric/Kana (Japanese alphabets)

characters. 80 characters x 27/21 lines JIS
first-level Kanji (Chinese Character)
40 characters x 27/21 lines Color (x7),
inversion, and blinking can be specified for
can be specified for each character.

Graphic display 640 x 432 dots

Color (x7) can be specified for each dot.

Keyboard Built-in keyboard (commonly used with the CRT/MDi of CNC and
PMC)

ASCII configuration full keyboard (option for developing

softwares)

Interface Reader/puncher Serial port (x 3)

interface

Printer interface Centronics specifications parallel port (x 1)

- 195 -
35.2 Software Specifications

Item Specifications

Operating Single user multi-task O/S, editor, assembler, and debugger are
system also included.
(o/s)
Multi-task It is supported by the O/S. These functions
- can be utilized by any language for
Graphics development.

Language BASIC interpreter Standard attachment. Hardware-dependent

for portion such as graphics is also supported
development by the language level.

C compiler Purchased separately.

PASCAL compiler Nearly all languages for development marked

- for the above O/S are available.
Relocatable
assembler

Otehrs-

FANUC The following functions can be supported:

library o MMC/CNC window
o MMC/PMC window
o Expanded graphics function

35.3 MMC/CNC Window

A large window is prepared between CNC and MMC.

The following operation can be performed at the MMC side via the window. For
details, refer to the MMC Operator's Manual.

o CNC system data input

o Output of CNC command data for operation
o Output of CNC command data for registration
o Output of CNC command data for verification
o CNC command data input
o Specified program search
o Specified program delete
o All programs delete
o Tool offset input
o Tool offset output
0 Parameter input
0 Parameter output
o Setting data input
o Setting data output
o Custom macro variable input
o Custom macro variable output
o Skip position input
o Servo delay input

- 196 -
0 Acceleration/deceleration delay input
0 Model data input
.
0 Diagnosis input
0 A/D conversion data input
0 Alarm status
0 Program No. under execution
0 Sequence No. under execution
0 Actual speed
0 Spindle speed
0 Absolute position
0 Machine position

35.4 MMC/PMC Window

The following functions are available at the MMC side through the MMC and PMC
window:

o DI/DO image input

o Data input
o Data output

Note 1) The MMC cannot be installed in the 150TFB, 150TTB, 15-TTFB.

Note 2) The MMC cannot be installed partially (Simple conversational automatic
programming and 9” CRT etc..)

- 197 -
36 . CONTROL UNIT

36.1 Control Unit

There can be the following four kinds of control units of Series 15 and the one
of best be selected according to the system configuration.

1) Kind and size of control unit

3 slots : 202 (W) x 380 (H) X 172 (D) mm

4 slots : 254 (W) x 380 (H) x 172 (D) mm
6 slots : 366 (W) x 380 (H) x 172 (D) mm
8 slots : 478 (W) x 380 (H) x 172 (D) mm

36.2 Power Supply

The input power source of Series 15 is as follows.

200 VAC + lo%, -15%, 50/60 Hz L-1 Hz, 1 phase

;;;O VAC + lo%, -15%, 60 Hz +l Hz, 1 phase

36.3 Environmental Conditions

1) Ambient temperature
0°C - 45°C when operating
-20°C - 60°C when stored or delivering

2) Change in temperature
Max. l.l"C/min

3) Humidity
75% or less (relative humidity) generally non-condensing
Max. 95% for a short time

4) Vibration
0.5 G or less when operating

5) Circumstances
When using in places with thick dust, cutting oil, or organic solvent,
consult us.

37. SERVO

A connectable servo motor and the servo amplifier are as follows.

Servo motor : FANUC AC servo motor

(With serial interface pulse coder)
Servo amplifier : FANUC AC servo amplifier
(Digital servo)

38. POSITIONING DETECTOR

A connectable position detector is as follows.

For semi-closed control : Serial interface pulse coder

(Servo motor built-in type)
For full-closed control : Pulse coder/Optical stall
(20phase pulse interface)

- 198 -
39. SPINDLE

A connectable spindle motor and the spindle amplifier are as follows.

Servo motor 0
0 FANUC AC spindle motor, etc.
Servo amplifier : FANUC AC spindle amplifier, etc.

40. MACHINE INTERFACE

Series 15 has the interface to connect FANUC I/O Link.

The device such as I/O Unit-MODEL A with FANUC I/O Link can be connected.

- 199 -
41 . POSITION CODER

A position coder is connected to the spindle and generates square wave voltage
signal the frequency of which is proportional to the spindle speed. This
synchronizes the feed with the spindle speed.

1) Position coder A
a) Number of square waves per revolution
1
Channel Number of square waves

1 ch. 1024 pulses/rev (A, x, B and g phases)

2 ch. 1 pulse/rev (A and z phase)

1 *
b) Maximum response revolutions
4,000 rpm
c) Range of operating temperature
0" - 50°C

2) Position coder B
a) Number of square waves per revolution

I Channel_ Number of square waves

I
1 ch. 1024 pulses/rev (A, A, B and g phases)

2 ch. 1 pulse/rev (A and A phase)

.
b) Maximum response revolutions
6,000 rpm
c) Range of operating temperature
0" - 50°C

- 200 -
42 . FUNCTIONS FOR 4-AXIS LATHES (150TTB, 15-TTFB)

42.1 General

150TTB and 150TTFB can independently operate two tool posts and control a lathe
which simultaneously cuts and machines on the two tools posts.
It can be applied to the lathe which simultaneously machines a single workpiece
with one spindle on two tool posts and the lathe which machines two workpieces
with two spindles on them.

Single spindle and two tool posts Twin spindles and two tool posts

Application to lathes with Single spindle and two tool posts

The system can be applied to turning tasks in which a single workpiece attached
to a single spindle is machined using two tool posts simultaneously. For
example, while one tool post performs machining of the outer diameter, it is
possible to machine the inner diameter with the other tool post. The result is
a sharp savings in machining time.

Application to lathes with twin spindles and two tool posts

The system can also be applied to turning tasks where two workpieces attached
to twin separate spindles are simultaneously machined using the two tool posts.
Because machining can thereby be performed with one lathe with equal efficiency
to two conventional lathes, a dramatic increase in nroductivity can be achieved. A

CNC
CNC operator’s panel

Program for 1st tool

Program
-\
for 1st tool post -

Pr opram
ior 2nd tool post

Program memory

- 201 -
Simultaneous, independent control of two tool posts

Using the tool post selection key on the NC operator's panel, the operator
selects the programs for each of the two tool posts from among the programs
registered in the memory.
When the start signal is issued, the system simultaneously and independentl)
executes the two selected programs, controlling the X Z1 axes and X
1’ 2' Z2
axes respectively.
Only one operator's panel is provided for the two tool posts. Panel operation
and display functions for each tool post are determined by the tool post
selection key provided.

Tool post waiting function

The movement of each of the two tool posts can be programmed independently, as
in the case of an ordinary two-axis lathe. M codes control the first and
second tool posts to wait for each other during machining,, Or only one tool
post to machine.

Program for 1st tool Program for 2nd tool

post post

01223 : 02543 :
G50X Z .
. G50X z :
GOOX - 2 .
. GOOX Z .
. Simultaneous independent
SlOOMK: SlOOM03 t operation
..

MXXX
..
I
-Wait
s150 : s150 :
GOOX 2 .
. GOOX z .
. 1 Simultaneous independent
.. .. operation

MXXX
..
Mxxx
..
I
-Wait
SlOO :
GOOX Z .
. Operation of 2nd tool
post only
1
MXXX i-Wait
s120 :
GOOX 2 .
. Operation of 1st tool
.
. post only
..
/
MXXX MXXX -Wait
s200 s200
GOOX z GOOX z :
.. .. ) Simultaneous independent
.. . operation
M30 : M30 :

- 202 -
42.2 Balance Cut (G68, G69)

When machining the workpiece shown in the figure below on a four-axis lathe,
machining the workpiece with cutters appl.ied to its sides simultaneously
prevents sagging of the workpiece, which would be caused by machining from one
side only. This results in more accurate machining. If, however, the cutters
do not move synchronously, the workpiece will chatter, resulting in no correct
machining. The use of this function permits easy synchronization.

G68: Balance cut mode

G69: Balance cut mode cancel

42.3 Interference Check Function

A 4-axis lathe controlled by 11TT is normally provided with two tool posts.
When a blank is concurrently machined by using these two tool posts, it is
possible that a part of each tool post approaches each other very closely. If
two tool posts should make contact with each other due to a machining program
failure or other setting failures, a serious accident like the damage of tools
”

or the breakage of the machine tool itself, may happen.

Tool post 2

Tool post 1

- 203 -
III. AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION

(15-TFB, ISTTFB only)

1. GENERAL

The Symbolic FAPT TURN (US PATENT) is an epoch-making NC automatic programming

system which can produce NC command data immediately according to instruction
on the graphic display CRT. The parts figure can be input simply by depressing
corresponding symbol keys on the operator's panel according to the profile of a
workpiece described on design drawings. When dimensions and various data are
input, various pieces of reference information are illustrated on the CRT from
time to time, and questions are given to the operator using daily language.
When data are input, the figure of blank and parts profile are drawn
immediately, and automatic calculations of NC command data are started. Tool
paths are concurrently displayed as figures. We have developed a control unit
by incorporating this "Symbolic FAPT" functions into CNC to enable an operator
to execute both programming and machining concurrently at a site. This latest
control unit is incorporated in 150TFB and 1%TTFB.
The CNC for controlling two or three axes is 150TFB and that for controlling
four of five axes is 150TTFB.

The 150TFB and 150TTFB provides an MD1 input CNC function by conventional NC
data formats as well as the programming function by the Symbolic FAPT, and its
major features are as follows.

1) Programming can be done by conversing with the 10" or 14" color graphic
display while reading a drawing.
2) NC data can be prepared by only inputting parts figure, when automatic
process decision function (option) is used. Process or tool is
automatically decided, so the beginner also can program.
3) This system can input such a parts figure as its start point and end point
are not specified on drawings. Automatic intersection point computation
function is provided, so no previous manual calculation is required.
4) This system can execute arithmetic operations are functional operations.
5) Programmed results are sequentially drawn as a figure on the CRT, and a
programming failure, if any, can easily be found and corrected.
6) This system can easily check interferences due to tool paths and parts
figure and interference due to tool figures and parts figure on the CRT.
7) The blank figure is drawn by a dotted line, while the parts figure is drawn
by a solid line. The remaining part is easy to be known.
81 Animation drawing function (option) allows simulation to the actual
machining.
9) Sub cycle B function (option) will perform the exclusive machining.
10) Material files, tool data, and tooling informations can be loaded into sub
memory or floppy cassette or papertape using PPR.
11) Prepared programs can be stored sin the sub memory or floppy cassette or
papertape using PPR, as a family program and they can be called whenever
required.
12) The next programming can be done concurrently during machining without any
idle producing time of a machine tool.
13) This system provides high-accuracy high-performance CNC functions equivalent
to those of 150TB or 150TTB.

- 207 -
The 150TFB and 150TTFB functions can roughly be divided into the Symbolic FAPT
programming functions and NC machining functions.
The Symbolic FAPT mode and NC machining mode are selectable by depressing
either "MMC/FAPT" or “NC/PC” key on the operator's panel. The 140inch CRT is
shared for both Symbolic FAPT .programmi.ngand NC machining, and the graphic
display is selectable by the "MMC/FAPT" key or "NC/PC" key at any time. These
functions remain effective, irrespective of the selection of graphic display
pictures.
Accordingly, the part to be machined next can be programmed by using the
Symbolic FAPT in the FAPT mode even during NC machining.

- 208 -
2. OPERATOR’S PANEL OF SYMBOLIC FAPT TURN

There are two selection keys for symbolic FAPT mode and NC machining mode on the
operator's panel, so the mode changing fs always available.
By pushing m] key, CRT comes to be for Symbolic FAPT, and programming is to
be input. Machining parts figure can be input by pushing the symbol keys on the
operator's panel along design drawings.

2.1 MDI Key

MD1 keys of the 150TFB and 15TTFB are the right part of the Fig. 2(a) - cd),
respectively. The shadowed part of MD1 keys in those figures is used in
Symbolic FAPT.

2.2 Soft Key

There are twelve soft keys below the screen. For Symbolic FAPT EXECUTION
functions are displayed at the bottom of the screen in each display panel.
Press the soft key under the display which suits for the purpose.

lzl
POWER
cl
OlwLs

MBQEL
Ll
El
cl
m..ElE

cl
UTFR
CUC

rl
NSERT

Fig. 2.1 (a)

- 209 -
 Fig. 2.1 (b)

~~

Fig. 2.1 (c)

- 210 -
- 211 -
3. SELECTION OF JOBS BY SOFT KEYS

SYSTEM EDITION 5EOO'@l

M886

Various jobs can be selected by depressing soft keys when "SYMBOLIC FAPT TURN"
is displayed on the graphic display CRT. This CRT screen display is called
initial pattern4
The following soft keys are available on initial pattern.

FAPT . . . . . FAPT EXECUTION

EXEC
rl Depress this soft key for NC programming, while monitoring
graphic display CRT.

FAMILY ..... FAMILY PROGRAM

PROGRM
r-l Depress this soft key when you call a family program from the
submemory, the memory cassette or paper tape, or load it into
them.

DATA . . . . . SETTING
SET
r-l Depress this soft key for inputting/outputting/setting of
"system parameters", "setting data", "tool data", and "machine
tool file", or inputting/outputting of "material file" and
"tooling file".

AUXILI ..... AUXILIARY WORK

r-lARY

- 212 -
 4. Symbolic FAPT PROGRAMMING

4.1 Operation Procedure

NC data are prepared while monitoring the graphic display CRT as described, and
. this process can roughly be divided into the following;
- Input of information on blank and part
- Input of information on the machine home position and index position
- Input of information on machining methods
- Preparation of NC data
It is also possible to return to an optional process after finishing a work.in a
certain process or skip an intermediate process halfway, if data are set.

- 213 -
 Symbolic FAPT Flow

Programing start _ _ _ _. _ _ _ _ - - -. - -- - - - (xz)

- - -

t-
I

I
Selection of material.
I Specification of standard
I surface roughness *
I
I
Selection of drawing method
I Specification of figure of
I blank
I
Designation of ---_-- -\
J
I
,
material and part I

i Specification of fainal parts

1 figure
1

Designation of
reference point of_____. _-- Reference point of machine
machine and turret and turret position
turning position

I' Selection of machining

I process
,
t
/ 1 Input of tool data
I
I
I
I
Machining definition---- - ,’ 1Specification of cutting area 1

!This process is not I

,
necessary when I Input of cutting condition
optionally automatic I , .
\.
process decision I
/
___-_-___ I Drawing of
1 preparation of NC data
tool path and I
preparation----- I

IChecking by animation drawing I

* These inquiries and

screens are skipped
by parameter setting.

- 214 -
4.2 Programming start

- FAPT EXECUTION PROCESS -

- NC SIDE .
I
0 0000
SELECTION OF MATERIAL & SETTING OF BLACK SIZE
N 00000

X-AXIS
INPUT OF PART FIGURE ( INPUT OF BLANCK FIGURE )
200.000

Z-AXIS
SETTING OF HOME POSITION / INDEX POSITION 200.000

s 00000
T 0000
M 000

NC DATA PREPARATION

MACHINING SIMULA-

METRIC

END 4 5 6 EXEC
1 2 3

Press the ]EXEC]on the initial screen to allow this screen to be displaved.
This screen is called the main menu screen.
The menu of programming work details is displayed on this screen.
Select the work that you wish to perform by pressing the corresponding
Software key.

Note) However, no NC data creation can be selected without entering the parts
figure.

- 215 -
4.3 Designation of Material and Part

... KU+. WP F’WT +++ 01-01’

*NC SlIE*
No. WTERIQ_
1 54x 0 oooo
mTERI& No. . . . . . . . ,. . . . . . ‘*‘a = 1 ’ 2 sC?l N80000
STUIDARD SU-KE RaGmEss M? = 2 3 FC
~16 FCX?fWT . . . . . . . . . . . . DF = 2 4 AC . X-WIS
&FN( FlWRE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BF=l s sus 200.ooO
RW SIZE 6 WTER I AC6
D I -TER . . , . . . . . D = 160. 7 I’WTER I Gu_7 Z-AXIS
8 WTER I AL8 288.800
LEffiTH . ..*...... L = 158. 9 MATER I Gum9
B&SE Lit-E .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ZP = 5. 10 WfT’ERIQL10 S ecam
11 MF\TERIACll T 8880
12 PQTERIAC12 M 888
13 PMATERIAC13
DEPTH OF kWCKING . . . . . . . l . zc = 0. 14 WTERIQL14
1s MTERIALlS
16 fWTERIFY.16
17 mTERICY.17

r?J = _ m1c
4
ESCWE MAT. cLRslY? clJRsa?
t 4

1) Selection of material
Select a material of the blank to be lathed out of the materxals menu
displayed on the CRT, and input menu No. when the system asks m .
When the material is specified, the cutting conditions are automat%cally
determined. Since the cutting conditions thus automatically determined are
displayed on the respective columns when the system asks the cutting
conditions in the machining definition of process, they are optionally
changeable at that time.
When 18 or more material names are defined, depress [MAT. NAME ) to display
*them.

- 216 -
2) Designation of standard surface roughness
Select standard surface roughness. The system will ask you m . Input
the number of V marks (1 - 4) specified on your machining drawings. Check
the machining drawing for producing an NC tape, and designate the surface
roughness which is specified most frequently on the drawing. The system will
ask you the surface roughness every figure element when you input a parts
figure. You have only to change the surface roughness, if it differs from
the value designated by the above display.

Note) The inquiries can be skipped by setting the system parameter.

3) Designation of drawing format

Select the coordinate system to entry method of the dimensions on design
drawings. Input the numbers from the keyboard when the system asks
o If you desire to employ the preset value as it is, depress the 1-1
key.

Note) The inquiries can be skipped by setting the system parameter.

4) Input of blank figure

The figures of blank to be lathed are divided roughly into a cylinder, a
hollow cylinder, and a special figure. For selecting one of these figures,
key in number (1 - 3) when the system asks m at the bottom stage of
the CRT.
After determining the figure of blank, the system asks m m 9 or
m Input the dimensions of blank from the keyboard as an answer.
Input a value' from the keyboard when the system asks m in order to
specify the material position with reference to the coordinate axes.
If you have selected a special blank (BF=3), the system asks the surplus
thickness (TX and TZ). When data are input, the blank is regarded to have
definite surplus thickness. If they are left undefined, the figure of blank
is optionally designable.

When the drawing format is defined or .blank figure input inquiry, by pressing
the software "HELP' key, the screen becomes a discriptive .drawing. Press the
"HELP' key whenever the meaning of the inquiry is in doubt..

Screen when 'HELP"is Screen when "HELP"

pressed when the pressed in blank figure
drawing format is input
defined

- 217 -
5) Input of part figure

l ** SELECT sOCT KEY l **

METRIC

E%FaE BACK CClRR.8 CORRE- =W LIST Dt?%NG Y-AXIS C-WIS EXT

PACE ERQSE CTION MODE RANGE MENU MnJu F'QSE

The coordinates are drawn on the CRT according to the selected coordinate
system, and the figure of blank is displayed by a dotted line. The CRT size
is automatically decided so that the CRT is fully filled with the blank.
Part figures comprises (1) figures to be newly defined, (2) figures to be
employed by modifying a part of the input figures and dimensions and (3)
figures to be employed 'by -modifying a part of the in
t?IxCRT one. Select one of these cases by pressing
lC0RR .& ERASE].

- 218 -
HOW TO INPUT PARTS FIGURES WHILE MONITORING A BLUE PRINT

The parts figures are input by depressing figure symbol keys according to the
profile of a part. The ten keys for inputting figure and numerical value, and
alphabetic keys 0 (Chamfering),
q (Rounding), a (Threading), B (Grooving), and m (Necking) serve as
figure symbol keys.

,
2 t /’
7 8 9
a Chamfering El Grooving

-4 5 6- q Rounding El Necking

m Threading
1 2 3

Input the following keys along the blue print for the figure illustrated above.

For every inputting of parts symbol key, the CRT asks the necessitated
dimensions.

If there are plural number of chamfering parts having the same value, the
chamfering parts can be input later together.

- 219 -
 _-
ELmEM sYMmL . . . . . . . fZ =4

ES = METRIC

ESCWE END EL~ENT PATm GRApH LIST - asENT

DELETE FIGWE NODE MODE BACK FU?URD

The system asks you necessary dimensions, each time you depress a figure
symbol key.
After the coordinate axes and a blank figure have been drawn on the CRT,
"FIGURE ELEMENT..." is displayed on the upper part of the CRT, the cursor
flickers on the right column of the above display, and also the system asks
on the bottom stage of the CRT.
Depress figures symbol keys on the console panel according to the figure on
the designing drawing. The system will ask necessary dimensions on the CRT.
Input the dimensions described on the blue print from the keyboard The
figure of the machining part is drawn on the CRT according to the input
dimensions. Proceed to the next step after checking if the drawn figure is
correct or not.

- 220 -
 / \

I
I X-AX Is
I
I 280.0C33
I
I
I
I
Z-QXIS
I
I
288.888
I
I
I
I
S88880
I
I
T8880
I
4 r-l ma
z

ENDPOINT.... : = 120. ANGLE FROtI 2. A = 38.

z = ---.Dn
TWXNT tEXT , TN = 0

Dr. = _ PETRIC
t
EY,e BACK GRAPH LIST ORStY? CuRsoR tEXT
-GE MODE MODE t 1

The input figure symbol is immediately displayed in the "FIGURE ELEMENT" at

the upper part of the CRT, and its necessary dimension is asked from the
system. Input necessary dimension from the keyboard according to the
question. The input dimension value is displayed on the corresponding column
on the CRT at once. After all necessary dimension values have been input, a
figure is illustrated instantly.
If the dimensions asked by the system is not found on the blue print, depress
-1 key to proceed to the next step. If a data is not found at the
specified place, the system informs you of an error on the blue print or a
failure caused by the excess of the processing range of Symbolic FAPT.

- 221 -
 ... &I%* WI! PART l ** MT FIGURE S= 0.96 01-16
FIGURE ELEFENT , . . . . . . ~?I~C~+-T~I++CITC+ lrrC SllE*
w-w-- ___--- ___________~___~___-~~-~~~~~~~

1 0 a!ca
N0C%300

Z-AXIS
288.800

04 LHICH ELEENT ....... EE = 0 1’ST .. KC =C CU = 0.2

DIRECTION .............. DN = t 2’ND .. KC =I CU = -.m
WIDTH ......... WT = 4. 3’RD .. KC =I CU = m. m
DEPTH ......... DT = 2.3 4’TH .. KC =C CU = 0.2

( 0:LRST l:NEXT >

EE = _ FETRIC

ESr,APE EQCK GRFPH LIST CURSOR CLRSOR rEXT

P&E ffiDE MODE 1 1

It is possible that a line circumscribed with a circle, corner R, chamfering

part9 and a groove concaved halfway are not determined until the figure and
dimensions of the subsequent work are all specified. In such a case, input
necessary information only according to the questions from the system, and
proceed to the next stop.
These parts figures will be drawn at once when the subsequent figure ,and
dimensions have been specified.
When dimentional values are input from ten keys, those described on design
drawings cannot be employed as they are, but four arithmetic operations are
required in most cases. If these values are calculated in advance or
mentally calculated on the occasion, such an operation may require
troublesome procedures or it may cause an error.
In Symbolic FAPT, four arithmetic operations and functional operations are
employable for inputting dimensions in the same way as in calculators.
Parentheses ( ) are applicable up to the quadruple.

- 222 -
 ... &_* aru) PART l ** #‘MT FIGCRE S= 0.s 01-w
F I W?E ELEF~ENT . . . . . . . 4?1<l+-T~1+G+ClTC+t3#~~~
____--_______________-____------
q- I

0 amJ
NW330

ELEENrsYMmL . . . . . . . EZ=I

L
ES = rETR1c
r

E’XFpE END ELMENT PRTTfW U?WH LIST ELHENT ELMENT t&T

DELETE F IGLRE KIDE MODE BACK FORWRD

The dimension of the part is asked from the system, each time a figure symbol
key is depressed. As soon as you key in each dimension according to the
question, its corresponding parts figure is immediately drawn.
Then, the next dimension of the part is asked again.
If the drawn figure is correct on the CRT when all parts figure have been
input by repeating the above operation, depress the INEXT PAGE] key, and
proceed to the next work.
If you want to correct a certain place, depress [ELMENT FORWARD ] or m
'm] key.

- 223 -
 - 2 z = m.m
8 p 2 DX = 123.8 Z = 71. TL = OTN = BA = 30.
X-wlS
9 - 2 z= 38. 200.w3

10 T EE= 0 LT = 35.3 LD = 2. NT = 1 z-WlS

DT = 1.299 280.800
11 ‘a 2 DX = 120. z =---_.mTL= 0TN= CM= 30.
SEX333
12 1 2 DX = 112. T 8ooo
M ma
13 - 2 z = 25.

_- =
ELEE~syMBoL ,,. . . . . =I 4

ES = _ PETRIC

ESCGPE END ELMENT PQTTRN GRWH LIST ELPENT ELENT =T

DELETE FIGURE MODE MODE BFICK FORWD

If JLIST MODEJ key is depressed, the list of input data is displayed.

Also, data can be modified on this screen.

- 224 -
 I 280.880

S88880
T 8088
M 000

l ** SELECT
SOFT KEY +++
ETRIC

ESCWE BQCK coRf?E- NEW LIST DRQbNG Y-AXIS C-Fu(IS *XT

CTION MODE RAfJGE MENU rl3-u lwx

If you have selected a special blank (BF=3) and the surplus thickness (TX and
TZ) are left undefined, the figure of blank is optionally designable. The
way of data inputting is the same as keying in parts figure.

When machining such items as castings, since the figure definition can be
matched to the actual blank figure, an efficient NC statement can be prepared
with no blank feeding.

- 225 -
 I Z-QxlS
I
I 280.880
I
I
I
I S88880
I
1 T 8080
\I
I r-l 880
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I

l ** SELECT SOFT KEY l **

F1ElRIC
t
/ESwE Emx CORR. 8 CORRE- NEW LIST DRAWJC Y-AXIS C-AXIS -T
l KIDE RAM;E MENU w PiWE ,
P&E ERASE CT ION

Parts figure is displayed with reversing x-axis and z-axis for easy inputting
the figure for vertical lathe.

- 226 -
4.4 Home Position and Index Position

HIIrE POSITIBJ
DXH = s80.
ZH = 300.
Z-AXIS
It-Ex POSITION 78o.ooO
DXl = 288.
21 = 200. S8oooo
T 8ooo
f-l ooo

The coordinate values at the home position of the machine are asked from the
system. Input respective values by depressing ten keys when m
and a were asked.
Note) If it is not desired to start machining from the home position,
leave it in the undefined condition without inputting data.
The inquiries can be skipped by the setting of the system parameter.

When the coordinate values (DXI, 21) at the turning position of the turret
were asked by
and m from the system, input these values from the keyboard.
Note) The inquiries can be skipped by the setting of the system parameter.

When the inquiries of both the home position and the turret turning position
are skipped, this screen itself is skipped.

- 227 -
 4.5 Machining Definition

Pm:, 01 KPILLItJG TO1O1 x 200. z 280.

WCC.02 ROLXSHING OF OUTER FIGWE ma202 x 200. z 200. 0 mc@
a.03 R~JGHING OF IbeEf? FIGWE T0303 x 200. z 200. ‘J 0ccm
F-x.&w FINISHING CF CUTER FIGLRE T1212 X =. 2 280.
fwx.05 FINISHING OF It+ER FIGURE T1313 X 2ca z xX3. x-60: I s
mx.86 GROWING OR bECK1t-G T0404 X 288. z 280. 20O.ooO
WK. 07 GROWING OR NECKIN T0505 x 2cZQ. z 200.
l-K.88 Tt+?EQDIffi T8808 x 200. z 288. Z-WIS
WK.09 TH?EADIffi T8989 x 200. z 200. 280.800
__
__ -
__

l ** SELECT SOFT KEY +++

METRIC
,
ESCWE FRX. CENTER TURN GRmu. C-QXIS cu?soR clRsu?
DELETE HOLE THREAD t 1

Various machining processes to be required to machine a part on a lathe are

provided.

By pressing the ICENTER HOLE 1 key, the softkey display will be as shown below.
1

CENTER I DRILLING SUB

DRILL. CYCLE

By pressing the [TURh']key, the soft key display will be as shown below.

ROUGH S-FIN. FIN. ROUGH S-FIN. FIN. SUB

O.D. O.D. 0;D. I.D. I.D. I.D. CYCLE

By pressing IGROOV. THREAD ] key, the soft key display will be as shown below.

GROOV. ROUGH. FIN. CUT THREAD SUB

NECK. GROOV. GROOV. OFF ING CYCLE

By pressing (1 key, the soft key display will be as shown below.

, 7

C-AXIS C-AXIS C-AXIS C-AXIS FACE SUB

C.DRILL DRILL. TAP. GROOV. MILL. CYCLE

I I I I I I I I 1 I I
or

Y-AXIS SUB
DRILL. CYCLE

- 228 -
Special machining is realized by sub cycle. When the automatic process
decision function is provided, machining process is automatically prepared by
pushing PI. The Process, used tools, cutting direction, or cutting
range, etc, are automatically decided by using this function, so the keying
in the machining definition is almost unnecessary. To manually define a
machining process, select the machining type by using the soft keys. The
selected machining type is registered in the process list and the following
TOOL DATA screen appears.

) Tool data

/ \

t 0 Q880
Toa sELECT.ra. . .. TN = CT3 Da = 158. N -
mlmN3. . . . T?l=09
TUIL ID.rO. . .. . . .. ID = SD0 x-e:s
a. 888
TOOL n:tE TP :EE=L
z 4-v. : s
MSE %CIE ....... ffl= 8.8 a. 888
CUTTIN EEE . . . .. . cy: = 8.
NOSE c+cs . . . .. .. . FH = * 75. SWXEB3
mcn-ECTImwGl_E.. w= I T bi
UIRTW_TELPOS.. )oI= 0.8 n cmx%m
2?4= 0.6
SETTIN &GE . . . . . 6G = -98.
SETTIM XfSITI(N .. Xs = 8-
2s= 0.

HXDER Kl. .. . .. . . . K = 13
L

Select a tool registered in the tooling information by entering the

corresponding tool number (TN).
If the system is equipped with the automatic process decision option a
tooling information is searched and a tool to be used in this process is
automatically selected.

By pressing the II
TOLING INFOR keYa The tooling data menu can be displayed.
Pressing the TOOL DATA soft key displays the tool data menu.

- 229 -
2) Specification of cutting area

CD = E’PIC

A desired cutting direction and cutting area can be specified using the arrow
key.

- 230 -
3) Input the cutting conditions

/ \

S--c;;'lS
,
aam
,t I

-___w
t--~-~-~-~~--~-~-_ l
S-
r-
nctBm3
CEmfwcE .. .. . . . cx = 2. CUTYfcG ‘SPEEO . . . u = 14s.
Q= 2. pEE> mTE . . . . . . . Fl = 0.6s
FJ?JJSr. bX_LW TX = 0. m= 0.32
lz= 0. F3= 0.6
EPIHman . . . . D = 3. FN3~&RwEa7..04=1

e-w?:FFQJJT... u = I.

Various cutting conditions are asked on the CRT from the system. If the
material of work have already been input, the cutting conditions are
automatically determined and displayed on the CRT.
If you employ these predetermined values as they are, depress "INPUT" or
"NEXT PAGE" key only without inputting any data, when the cutting speed,
feedrate, etc. were asked from the system.
If these numerical values are input according to respective questions, preset
values are replaced with new values.
The shape of the workpiece excluding the area to be cut is displayed on .
the screen, allowing the operator to check the portion to be left.

- 231 -
4) Process editing (150TTFB only)
Process editing to simultaneously cut both turrets can be done simply using
soft keys.
When NC data is prepared, waiting M codes are inserted in proper portions
according to the result of process editing.

. . . E@CHJIJJNG EFJNJTION +*+ fWCHINIffi PLAN m-01

PROC. 01 WILLING T0101(1> x 280. z 280.

m.@ -1% Of OUTER FIGURE T0202(1> x 288. z 208.
FFtX.03 RcsuwIrJc F IMR FIGURE T0303C2> x 280. z 280.
p~0c.m FINISHIt- OF OUTER FIGURE T1212(1~ X 288. 2 200.
m.05 FINISHING OF 1-R FIGURE T1313(2> X 200. z 280.
pRoc.cs GRaXIffi OR bECKIffi T0434(1) x 200. z 200.
pRoc.07 GROOVING OR NECKIffi T0S05C2> x 200. 2 288.
m.88 TH’?EQDIffi T080f3(1) x 288. z 288.
F’ROC.09 TWEfWlffi T0909C2) x 288. 2 288.
PROC. 10

l ** SELECT SOFT KEY +*+

E’XFPE CORR.8 NEW ca?RE- sxf

OUT CTION PkGE

c3 "NEXT PAGE"

... K MTQ PREPAR(ITION l ** KINDS OF MINING W-51

NJ. i FERD
1) (eaD2) SpINaX SPEED
01 m1LL. GsM 553.582 ma3 (1)
02 Rfua-L OFCUT. RCUGH.OFIN. G97U 14s. m3 (1)
03
04 FIN. F m. FIN. W IN. GYaJ 29s. m3 Cl)
05
06 GRUJ. a? teX. GRW. OR EECK. cY7u 80. M03 (11
87
06 TwEm. Tt-RERD. G97u 100. ma3 (1)
__
_-

- 232 -
4.6 Preparation of NC Data

1) Input of program number

\ x-w:1s
2a3.m
n IL
Z-WIS
280.000

S80880
T 8880
< fl 880
2
f4xEiRm No. . . . . 0 = 0001

o= _ FETRIC
7
EXFPEPROC.RECIS- NC PROC. SINGLE TOOL ANIME-DEUWNG STCRT
i LIST TER DATA STOP STEP PATH TION RANGE

v .
Input program number. This program number is necessary for machining a blank
by selecting an optional one out of several kinds of programs previously
stored into the program memory of machine control unit.
Depress -1 or -1 key after program number input, and the system
starts calculating the tool path in the sequence of the process program list,
and prepares NC data.
For NC data check, depress m] key. When JREGISTER] key is depressed,
the prepared NC data are saved in the NC machining memory.
When processing begins, the tool path is displayed on the CRT, and various
data as well as NC tape information can be also displayed on the CRT.

- 233 -
 r---- ____________________~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
t -L

Gooc3.099 x300.2380.
G92X72.5782-22.
*xX. 5982-22. M30
rA30aaIzm. %
To980
MO1
l ** PRESS SOFT KEG .+.

E’SW=‘E FRX. RESET

LIST

The coordinate axes and parts figure are displayed on the CRT, and the tool
path is drawn on the illustration. The rapid traverse is drawn by a dotted
line, while the cutting feed is drawn by a solid line. You can check if NC
data are correct or not from this CRT.
If you want to correct data while monitoring the tool path drawn on the CRT
return to an optional point to change a desired correction point only, and
confirm it by drawing the tool path on the CRT again, since all pieces of
information answered according to the questions from the system referring to
the blue print are being stored in the system.

- 234 -
2) Displav
w of machining time

-ESS LIST
lN: EiX*

CUTTING RAPID
IQlLLltG 2’16 0’88
mrtX3 Cr OUTER FIGURE 2’15 0’14
m1tG OF It+G’ FIGWE 0’21 0’09
FItJISHltJG Of OUTER FIGWE 0’49 0’08
F1tJISHItG OF lt+ER FIGWE 0’10 0’07 z-w I5
WW.‘ltjG W tECK1tX; 0’35 0’88 200.ooO
EPCXXJlffi OR bECKlN6 0’20 0’07
w?Em I rJG 0’33 0’ 12
TWEQDIffi 0’11 0’09

TO-J-Q_ t%XHINIrJc TlME 7’ 31 1’21

0.. PpESS SOFT KEY l -e

PEl-RIC

By depressing ]PROC. LIST] key after completion of NC data preparation, the

machining time using each tool and total machining time are displayed.
These machining time values show theoretical values when NC data were
automatically produced. Accordingly, actual machining time varies according
to the feedrate override, etc.
Also the machining time is displayed on each process with bar graph on the
upper side of the screen. This feature allows the rate of machining time of
each process to be viewed at a glance.

- 235 -
 i
4.7 NC Data Checking (Animated Drawing Function)

.
QfoC CRICI- ACA TOOL pcrz#s
fTW7 m PATH ETER

A prepared program is simulated by the animated drawing function.

The blank, chuck, tailstock and tool profiles are painted out on the screen.
When the tool and chuck or the tool and tailstock interfere with each other, it
is informed on the screen. Therefore, the NC program can be checked without
moving the machine. Of course, it is possible to use it as a monitor while
machining.

- 236 -
5. INPUT/OUTPUT OF FAMILY PROGRAM

=*=FW?Jl_Y pRoGRFm =*=

1. FWIILY PRouKm aJ-fpur

2. FCPIILY Pf?mFwl 1raJ-r
3. SUB CYCLE SETTING
4. smcKLEouTpuT
5.smcKLEI~

0. END

No. = _ METRIC

FILE

NC data can also be automatically produced by calling programs which have been
already produced by Symbolic FAPT and loaded into the submemory, memory cassette
or paper tape by using FANJC PPR and then, by modifying dimensional values and
machining method as required. This program is called family program.
The CRT display for family program input/output is obtained by depressing
[FAMILY PRGRM] key during the display of initial screen after programming was
made by using the Symbolic FAPT. Select a menu number according to the menu on
the CRT.
It is recommended to load several sets of family programs for convenient uses.
Family program can be loaded and stored into the submemory which is built-in NC
unit. And the memory cassette, paper tape are used as an input/output medium
for family programs, FANUC PPR is required for using paper tape.

- 237 -
6. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA

61. Tool Data

/ \

Tm_ IC.?O. .. . . .. .. . Ml = 513

Ta=t T-.‘FE . . . . . . . . . . . I-P = 5

‘%1tcDs
‘2 woxs5 .. . . w =1d* a. I
rcrx Palus . . . . . . RH/pT = 0.4
CUTTIM EIIX . . . . . . . . K = -S. 1
tcx F1J%E . . . . . . . . . . FIN = -7%
tO!X IJIL’TH . . . . . . . WUDO = U.n
UIPTLQL ma_’ Pm . mw_T = 0.4
2wLE = -9.4
FPC)TECTIOI wi_E . . . . w = 3.
STTltG &Xii-E . . . . . . . 6G = -Fo.
SETT1t-G PQSITICN . . . . NS = 0.
x= 8.
‘1: rlIR9 IWS . . . . . . )91= 63
Y’ltrPLE DlFECTlOd . . . 9> = 8
W_fEP ;%I. . . . . . . . . . . H_ = 15

t&J= _ tCTfR[I:

You can preset data of the tools which are presumable to be employed for
machining. These preset data comprise the tool nose radius (RN), cutting edge
angle (AC), tool nose angle (AN), and others. You can also preset data on
installation (tooling information), if required.
These tool data are storable into the submemory. Also a floppy cassette or a
paper tape is employable as an input/output medium for these tool data. FANUC
PPR is required for using the paper tape.

- 238 -
6.2 Tooling Information

/ \

Trn l--F5 TP: GaEPfx

rm CFFSET .. . . . .. . l-h = OF,

TUB_ lD.tO. . . . . .. . . ID = s/x3 .

KINGS F FPCKESS . . . KP = 3. 4. I
rEE WI~JUS . . . . . fa+vT = 0.8
CUTT Itc; EIrf . . . . , . . CT= 8.
tCI!Z FI+XE . . . . . . . . . FH = S
: FWIEC-ICNMUE . . . cP= 3.
YlF!Tuk Tcu_ Pas MT = O-8
md_E= 0.8
=SETTltG a4%E . . . . . . cd = -3.
‘ZSTTItt f3SITlCFJ . . . X5 = 0.
7s= 0.
1.: MlPPO~ 1ny-f . . . . . lm = 0
Y’ItlRE DIFECTIUI . . SO = 0
Hxrw a........... H_ = 13

Set tooling data about the installation of tools mounted on the turret.
The tools present on the tooling information CRT screen can be stored in to the
submemory collectively as tooling files.
Also, a memory cassette or a paper tape is employable as a input/output medium
for these tooling files. FANUC PPR is required for using the paper tape.

- 239 -
6.3 Material Data

... FA~~~TEP I: TriTQ SET l ** WTERIFy, 05-01

ta. NE W WTERIFL
1 545:
2 SCM
7J FC
4 k
5 sus
6 PSiTER I Fc6
7 WaTER I a7
6 MTER I AC8
9 M?TER 1CL9
10 WTERIFI,10
11 MATERI&
12 rWTERlFL12
13 tWTERIFL13
14 WUERIAL14
15 m?TERIFLlS
16 WTERIrY.16
17 WiTERIfXl’?

I?9TERIFLW. 1 = - . METRIC

SET cu?sm CURSOR END

DATQ t 1

Material data are provided to facilitate programming by presetting the machining

conditions of the blank to be machined.
These machining conditions comprise the following.
- Centering
- Drilling
- Rough cutting
- Semi finish cutting
- Finish cutting
- Grooving and necking
- Threading
You can prepare these conditions in advance according to the kinds of machining
and load these data as collective files or call them from the files.
Submemory is used for loading and storing material files. When the rest
capacity is not enough, you can load and store several sets of material files by
using the memory cassette and paper tape as an input/output medium for material
files. FANJC PPR is required for using paper tape.

- 240 -
 6.4 System Parameter

... WCTETER SETTING l ** 01-01 -

*NC s:nE*

cm1
cm2
0cQ3
011ieJ000
I
I z-4:-: 1s
I 20Q.ooO
-1
S8oooo
8010 88811110 T ooo0
8011 M cm
a312 1&:
8013 0
0014 6.4
Sol5 88018881
8016
8017

m.88008= - PETf?Ii

sax P&E PffiE SEARCH CURSOR CLRSOf? END

Et 111 1 1 No. 1 1

System parameters are employed for operating the Symbolic FAPT.

By these system parameters, the optional screen skip, method of sequence number
’ output, and etc. are specified.

- 241 -
6.5 Setting Data

3
8081 5.
0m2 1.
8803 1.
8ooil 101.
0
8010 0.
0011 0.
8812 0.
S808oo
8821 10;: T 0CX30
8022 D.111 r-l 080
0188 3
0101 4
0102 I
0103 I
0104 a
0105 I

No.fi2ax%2= PETRJC

PCGE PffiE SERH cuRsoR CuRsm END

’ END t 1 NO. t 1

Setting data are the information necessary for automatic process decision
function and for setting the various constant for inputting data.

- 242 -
7. SUBMEMORY

EEG15TERED FILE6Y-E Ol-06*

*NC SIDE*
USED
ErKP>
0.86 7. 0 cum
‘3.58 :; NO3OCC
9.3s :.
11.91:i X-k-. 1s
11.56 5; r’Kx3. ooo
10.07 :;
2-g.: 15

L200.000

TOT% 47.33 :;

FILE t-43. 1 = _ PETRIC

cm CURSOR END
I t 1

The memory in which the programs (family program) prepared using Symbolic FAPT
are loaded is called submemory. This system can automatically prepare NC data
by calling these programs as required and then modifying dimensional values and
machining methods. In addition to family programs, material files, tooling
files and sub cycle file can also be loaded into submemories.
Data in these submemories are held by dry batteries, even if power supply is
turned off. File names loaded in the submemory and the amount used or the file
memory can be displayed.

- 243 -
8. PARTS FIGURE INPUT EXAMPLE

The Symbolic FAPT TURN enables even unexperienced NC programmers to prepare NC

tape simply by pushing keys according to the instructions on the graphic display
CRT, and it is no longer necessary to keep promises on NC tape and NC automatic
programming language in mind. A distinguished feature of this Symbolic FAPT
TURN is the easiness of parts figure input.
The CRT asks you dimensions of parts figure as you push symbolic keys on the
operator's panel along machining parts figure. According to these questions,
input dimensional values described on a drawing.
If a size is not specified on the drawing, proceed to the next step without
inputting any data. When the next parts figure is input with dimensional
values, the Symbolic FAPT TURN automatically calculates dimensions retroactively
which are not covered on the drawing to previous steps.
The following examples show the programming of typical figures in turning. You
will understand how Symbolic FAPT TURN is excellent by comparing this symbolic
system with conventional manual calculation system or automatic programming
system using a language.

- 244 -
 Typical turning drawing

,s
70

Symbolic FAPT system

Data to be calculated in advance in
manual calculation system
Questions Key input

ELEMENT SYMBOL Calculation of intersections Pl, P2, P3,

B
P4 of a straight line and an arc.

START POINT SDX 70 Xl = 70

SZ 0 21 25' - ((90 - 70)/Z)'

= 12.078

q 45
ELEMENT SYMBOL
END POINT DX
RADIUS R 25 x2 = 45
2 2
CENTER CDX 90 25 - ((90 - 45)/Z)
CZ 35 = 24.103

q
SELECT
PE
END POINT
ELEMENT SYMBOL - 45)12)2
B
= 45.897
x4 = 75
ELEMENT SYMBOL
q 24 - 75)/Z)'
END POINT DX 75 = 58.848
RADIUS R 25
CENTER CDX 90
cs 35
SELECT
PE H
END POINT
ELEMENT SYMBOL
END POINT Z 70

- 245 -
 Typical turning drawing

Symbolic FAPT system

Data to be calculated in advance in
manual calculation system
Questions Key input

ELEMENT SYMBOL ES Calculation of rounding start point at the

H
beginning of an arc Pl
START POINT SDX 70 Calculation of rounding end point at the
beginning of an arc P2
SZ 0 Calculation of rounding start point at the
end of an arc P3
Calculation of rounding end point at the
end of an arc P4
ELEMENT SYMBOL ES I?
RI B1

82 10

al
25 5 A 5
5
3ADlUS R 5
fi
0
cl 2
3LEMENT SYMBOL ES RI = (25 = 5) - (10 .+ 5j2 = 25.981
CADIUS R 25 132 = 131 - 131 x 5 = 21.651
25 + 5

ZENTER CDS 90 cil = (10 + 5) x & = 2.5

CZ 35
SELECT Calculation of Pl
PS
;TART POINT Xl = 70
H
21 = 35 - 25.981 = 9.019
ILEMENT SYMBOL ES ’ Calculation of P2
lzl
X2 = 70 - 2 (5 - 2.5) = 65
IADIUS RI 5 , 22 = 35 - 21.651 = 13.349
I I Calculation of P3
ELEMENT SYMBOL ES x3 = 65
. H 23 = 35 + 21.651 = 56.651
3ND POINT DX 70 Calculation of P4
I
I X4 = 70
z 70 24 = 35 + 25.981 = 60.981
i
I

- 246 -
 Typical turning drawing

Symbolic FAPT system

Data to be calculated in advance in
manual calculation system
Questions Key input

ELEMENT SYMBOL ES \ Calculation of taper end point .

cl

START POINT SDX 20

4o”
Rloj
SZ 0

END POINT Z 50

ANGLE FROM 2 Z 10

ELEMENT SYMBOL ES
cl
R

RADIUS R 10 Z value = 50 - 10 x tan 40" x cos 10"

ELEMENT SYMBOL ES
clf = 41.736

3ND POINT DX 70 X value = 20 + 2 (50 x tan 10" - 10 x

tan 40" x sin 10")
= 34.718

ELEMENT SYMBOL ES El X value at the arc end

END POINT Z 70 X value = 20 + 2 t50 x tan 10" + 10 x

tan 40")
= 54.415

- 247 -
 Typical turning drawing

Symbolic FAPT system

Data to be calculated in advance in
manual calculation system
Questions Key input

ELEMENT SYMBOL ES Contact calculation of R40 and-R14, and

H
end point calculation of R14
START POINT SDX 20 a3
40

SZ 0 2
al 14
a2
END POINT SZ 15
;
81
ELEMENT SYMBOL ES 0
cl al = 7o - 'O = 25
9

END POINT DX 70 ~12 = 40 - (25 - 14) - 29

SENTER CDX 100 (31= (40 + 14>2 - 2g2

CZ 15 = 45.552
40
SELECT 132= (31x 4. + 14 = 33.742
PE
END POINT
40
ELEMENT SYMBOL ES R a3 = cr2x 4. + 14 = 21.481
cl
RADIUS R 14
Contact calculation
ELEMENT SYMBOL ES q 21 = 15 + 33.742 = 48.742
END POINT z 70 /
Xl = 20 + 2 (40 - 21.481) = 57.038
!
/ End point calculation of R14

! 22 = 15 + 45.552 = 60.552

- 248 -
 Typical turning drawing
--

Symbolic FAPT system

Data to be calculated in advance in
manual calculation system
Questions Key input

ELEMENT SYMBOL ES Calculation of intersection of two

cl\
straight lines

START POINT SDX 30 x + tan 20" 2 - 15 = 0 ..........Ob. 01

SZ 0 x + tan 5" z + (60 tan 5" - 25) = 0

•~**~.~~*~..ob**s*o 02

ANGLE FROM Z A 20 from (ij, @

ELEMENT SYMBOL ES X value = 2 x

0\
tan 20" -15
= 2 tan' 5" (60 tan 5" - 25)
1 tan 20"
END POINT DX 50 2 tan 5"
= 42.508
X 70 - 10

ANGLE FROM Z A -5
-15 1
ELEMENT SYMBOL ES I (60 tan 5" - 25) 1
c!l Z value =
1 tan 20"
END POINT DX 70 1 tan 5"

ELEMENT SYMBOL ES / El = 17.183

END POINT Z 70 /

- 249 -
 Typical turning drawing
p-- ~-__l__--

Symbolic FAPT system

Data to be calculated in advance in
I
manual calculation system
Questions Key inout
L /
+
ELEMENT SYMBOL ES \
cl Calculation of contact of taper line and
R18
Calculation of center coordinate value of
R18
START POINT SDX 30
18
x = -tan 20" 2 + 15 -
sz 0

50
ANGLE FROM 2 Z 20 x= -tan 5" 2 + { 2 - (70 - 10) x

ELEMENT SYMBOL ES R
il 18
tan 5'1 - ~0s b.*ae*. . . . . . . . 0
RADIUS R 18

ELEMENT SYMBOL ES \
cl Center of RlE is obtained from 0, 0;
Z = -21.1122
END POINT DX 50 3.52901 (Radius)

Z 70 - 10 1 Caiculation of 1st contact

WGLE FROM Z .A / 5 Xl = 2 (3.5629 + 18

fl
I
l8 20” x cos 20")
ELEMENT SYMBOL ES ’ Zl = 21.1122 - 18
21.1122
I x sin 5"
END POINT DX / 70 I i 352901 = 14.995
I I
I1 1I /
ZLEMENT SYMBOL ES I I_ ; Calculation of 2nd contact
I !
3ND POINT 70 X2 = 2 (3.529 + 18
IL cos 5")
22 = 21.1122 - 18
x sin 5"
= 19.543

- 250 -
 Typical turning drawing

Symbolic FAPT system

Data to be calculated in advance in
manual calculation system
Questions Key input

ELEMENT SYMBOL ES q Calculation of contact of taper line and

RlO
Calculation of center coordinate value of
R10
START POINT SDX 30
10
sz 0
x=- tan 20" + 15
cos 20"
l *eooeee** 01
2 2
ANGLE FROM Z A 20 (2 + 40) + (x - 35) = lo2 bb.beo*e* 02
ELEMENT SYMBOL ES U from 0, @
cl
END POINT DX 70 Center coordinate value of RlO
X= -30.1302
Z 40 X= 36.6083 (Radius)

TANGENT LAST TL 1 30.1302

RlO
20"
RADIUS R 10
36.6083 (Radius)
ELEMENT SYMBOL ES
El

END POINT Z 70 -

! Contact is obtained by;

X = 36.6083 x 2 - 2 x 10 x cos 20"
i = 54.422
z = 30.13021 + 10 x sin 20"
= 33.5504
!

i
i

, I
i
I

- 251 -
 Typical turning drawing

Symbolic FAPT system

Data to be calculated in advance in
manual calculation system
Questions Key input

ELEMENT SYMBOL ES
q Calculation of contact of RlOO and R5
Center coordinate value of RlOO
START POINT SDX 32
2 2
SZ 0 z + (x - 16) = loo2 •b~*o*~~~~**~~~~01
2 2 2
TANGENT NEXT TN 1 (2 + 29) + (x - 26) = (100 -+ 5) l 0 . 02

RADIUS R 100 from 0, @

ELEMENT SYMBOL ES tJ
cl z = -31.302
X= -78.975
RADIUS R 5

CENTER CDX 52 Calculation of contac't

CZ 29 (z + 31.302)2 + (x + 78.975)2 = loo2

l eo*ebo.. 03
2 2 2
ELEMENT SYMBOL ES lz (2 + 29) + (x-26) =5 . . . . . . . . . . . 04
i
END POINT DX 70 1 from (3J) @

z ’ 29+5 = -29.110
= 21.001’ that “’
ELEMENT SYMBOL ES
H
END POINT 2, 70
I

- 252 -
 l

Typical turning drawing

-_p

Symbolic FAPT system

T Data to be calculated in advance
manual calculation system
in

Questions Key input

ELEMENT SYMBOL ES Calculation of contact of RlOO

ICI
Calculation of center coordinate value of
RlOO:
START POINT SDX 0
2 2 2
(2 + 7) + x = (7 + 110) . . . . . . . . . . . 01
SZ 0
2 2 2
(2 + 54) + (x - 37) = (10 - 110) ..@
RADIUS R 7
from 0, @
CENTER CDX 0
z = 7.124
CZ 7 X = 116.144

ELEMENT SYMBOL ES Calculation of 1st contact

I0

TANGENT LAST TL 1 (2 + 7) 2 + x 2=72 . . . . . . . ..*o*~bo.*o* 0

2
TANGENT NEXT TN 1 (2 - 7.124)' + (x - 116.144)' = 110 l@
RADIUS R 110 from 0, @

ELEMENT SYMBOL ES 0
cl
z = -6.155 that is zl = 6.155
9
x = 6.949’ Xl = 13.898
RADIUS R 10
Calculation of 2nd contact
CENTER CDX 74
(2 + 54) 2 + (x - 37) 2 = 10 2 . . . . . . ...* 05
cz 54
2
(2 - 7.124)' + (x - 116.144)' = 110 l@
ELEMENT SYMBOL ES
H
from 0, @
END POINT DX 70
z = -60.112 that is 22 = 60.112
x= 9
Z 70 29.086' x2 = 58.172

- 253 -
9. SYMBOLIC FAPT TURN SPECIFICATIONS LIST

9.1 Blank Figure

Select a cylinder, hollow cylinder, or a special figure as a blank figure. The

special figures are available in two types; part figures with a constant surface
thickness and optional.shape.

9.2 Symbolic Keys

Define a part figure using the following symbolic keys:

1) Straight line in parallel with an axis : -f f f -h

2) Straight line in an optional direction : K 4 fl g
3) Circular arc : 3G
.. T
4) Thread
5) Groove .
. G
6) Chamfer
.
. C
7) Corner radius
.. R
8) Neck
.
. N

9.3 Drawing Input Method/List Input Method

There are two'methods to input part figure data; the drawing input method which
allows drawing of a figure for every element and the list input method which
allows input of only the data without drawing.

9.4 Operation Functions

At the input of dimensions, the arithmetical operations and optional function .

operation can be performed.
The following functions can be calculated:
Tangent, sine, cosine, arc sine, arc cosine, arc tangent, square root, and
power.
Parentheses "( )" can overlap up to four times.

9.5 Definition .of Machining Processes

1) Center drilling

(ij Center drilling

0 Drilling

2)'Turning'

Outer diameter rough cutting

Inner.diame.terrough cutting‘
Outer-diameter semi-finishing
Inner diame'tersemi-finishing
.Outer diameter finishing
Inner diameter finishing

3) Grooving and threading

- 254 -
(4) C-axis machining)

0 End face drilling

0 Side drilling
0 End,face grooving
@ Side grooving (Z-axis direction or C-axis direction)
0 Face milling
@ Cylinder grooving

(5) Y-axis machining

0 End face drilling

0 Side face drilling
CD End face pattern milling
CD Side face pattern milling
0 End face arbitrary milling
8 Side face arbitrary milling

(6) Special machining

a Auxiliary machining
0 Bar feed

9.6 Automatic Setting of Cutting Conditions

The cutting conditions can be automatically determined from the material

_ _ data
preset for each material and system parameters. For milling machining, the
tool type (such as CARBIDE, HSS, or special steel) can be considered.

9.7 Machining Time Display

The machining time of each process and the total machining time are displayed.
The cutting time and rapid traverse time are displayed as the machining time.
The bar graph is also displayed to allow relative comparison of the machining
time between processes.

9.8 Sub-memory

The sub-memory is divided into the system area to store system parameters, MTF,
setting data, tool data, and graphic data and the file area to store the family
programs, material files, tooling files, and sub cycle files. This memory is
backed up by battery to. retain its contents even when the power goes off. The
files stored in the file area are given file names so that they can be called by
specifying their file names. Various kinds of files can be stored in this area
within the storage capacity.

9.9 Tool Data and Tooling lnformation Files

The tool data file is used to store the data of various tools required for
machining, while the tooling information file is used to store the data of the
tools used for actual machining selected from the tool data file. That is, the
tooling information file is a group of data of the tools mounted on the
turrets.
The tool data file can be divided into the cutting tool data area and the
milling tools data area'which allow storage of 200 data items and 100 data
items, respectively. (The allocation can be varied from 2OO:lOO)
The tooling information file can be registered in sub-memory with a file name.
Multiple tooling data files can be registered to allow programming with the
tooling data file optimum to the machining process.

- 255 -
9.10 Material Data

Various machining conditions (such as feed rate and cutting depth) can be set
for each material. There are the following machining condition settings:

a Center drilling conditdon

aDrilling condition
aRoughing condition
@Semi-finishing condition
6 Finishing condition
@Grooving or necking condition
0 Threading condition

Several types of material data can be grouped together and given a file name and
registered in sub-memory. 'Ihisis called a material file.

9.71 Family Program

The program created by Symbolic FAPT is called a family program. A family

program can be registered in sub-memory with a file name. If it is registered
in sub-memory, it can be called if necessary and used to create a program for a
similar figure by simply changing the dimensions of a part.

9.12 Magnifying and Reducing Drawing

Press the software key "DRAWNG RANGE" to magnify or reduce a part of the
drawing.

9.13 Batch Input Function for Chamfering or Corner Rounding

Multiple chamfered sections or corner Rs with a constant chamfering amount can

be input in a batch after the part shape has been defined.
For turning, each corner is usually slightly chamfered (thread chamfering).
Therefore) use of this .function enables the key operation for.defining the par+
figure to be simplified, thus reducing the programming time.

9.14 Animation Drawing Function

The animation drawing function allows display of blank figures, chuck figures,
tail stock figures, and tool figures on the screen to simulate machining. As
chuck figures, the outside catch chuck, inside catch chuck, and special figures
chuck can be registered. As tail stock figures, standard figures and special
figures can be registered.

9.15 Process Edit Function (15~TTFB only)

The processes can be edited to operate two tool posts simultaneously. During
creation of NC data, the M codes can be automatically inserted into the
necessary points according to the edited processes.

- 256 -
9.16 Auto Collision I Avoidance Function (IHTFB only)

A program which may collide both tools will be modified automatically so that
the tools do not collide each other.
This function is realized using the interference check function of the animated
drawjng function.

9.17 Balance Cut FAPT Function (WTTFB only)

Balanced cutting refers to the use of both the tools of tool post 1 and 2 in a
single process. Use of this function allows the NC statement for balanced
cutting to be automatically created. There are two types of balanced cutting,
as shown below.
Type A: The two tools operate in perfect sync for precise machining of long and
narrow workpieces.
Type B: The tool on tool post 1 cuts first, followed by that on tool post 2
making a deeper cut, the process then being repeated to achieve high
quality machining.

Type A

- 257 -
9.18 C-axis FAPT

NC statements for C-axis machining are prepared using this function.

The following programming process is the same as usual turning process.

1) Figure definition on C axis

2) Definition of machining process
3) NC statement preparation
4) Checking NC data with animated drawing

Following machining processes are obtained with the C-axis FAPT function:

1) End face drilling

2) End face grooving
3) Side drilling
4) Side grooving (Z-axis direction and circumferential direction)
5) Face milling
6) Cylinder grooving

In drilling, the followings are enabled:

1) Center drilling
2) Drilling
3) Tapping

For face milling, the polar coordinate interpolation option is required.

Cylinder grooving requires installation of the cylindrical interpolation
option.

9.19 Y-Axis FAPT

This function is used for programming the following types of machining that use
the Y-axis:
1) End face drilling
2) Side face drilling
3) End face pattern milling
4) Side face pattern milling
5) End face arbitrary milling
6) Side face arbitrary milling

9.20 Sub Cycle

This function is used for special machining such as that involving the passing
of a workpiece.
This function prepares NC statement for calling a macro.
The main body of a macro is supposed to be prepared by MTB. The custom macro
option is required.

9.21 Automatic Process Decision Function

If a blank figure and a part figure are input, NC data for a representative
cutting pattern is prepared by a push of several soft keys.

- 258 -
APPENDIXES
APPENDIX 1 RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE

Table 1 (a) Linear axis (in case of metric thread for feed screw and metric input)

Increment system

IS-A IS-B IS-C IS-D IS-E

Least input 0.01 mm 0.01 mm 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm 0.00001 mm

increment or -)'cl or ;kl or or
0.001 mm 0.0001 mm 0.00001 mm 0.000001 mm

Least command 0.01 mm 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm 0.00001 mm 0.000001 mm

increment

Interpolation 0.005 mm 0.0005 mm 0.00005 mm 0.000005 mm 0.0000005

unit

Maxl k999999.99 +999999e999 +9999*9999 k9999.99999 k999.999999

programmable
dimension ;:
'2

Max. rapid 2400000 240000 100000 10000 1000 mm/min

traverse 9:4 mm/min mm/min mm/min mm/min

Feedrate range OeOOOl - OeOOOl - OeOOOl - OeOOOOl - OeOOOOOl -

.qr
8.4 2400000 240000 100000 10000 1000 mm/min
mm/min mm/min mm/min . mm/min

Incremental OeOl, 0.1, 0,001, OeOOOl, OeOOOOl, OeOOOOOl,

feed ;'c5 1, 10, 100, OeOl, 0.1, 0,001, OeOOOl, OeOOOOl,
1000 1, 10, 100 OeOl, 0.1, 0,001, 0.0001,
mm/step mm/step 1, 10 0.01, 0.1, 0.001,
mm/step 1eO mm/step 0.01, 0.1
mm/step

Tool O- O- O- o- o-
compensation +999e99 mm *999e999 +999*9999 rt9999.99999 +999e999999

Backlash o- +gggg 0 - +9999 0 - +9999 0 - +9999 0 - +9999

compensation *6 pulses pulses pulses pulses pulses

Dwell time *3 o- O- o- O- O-
999999 l99 99999.999 9999.9999 9999.99999 999.999999
set set set set set

- 261 -
 Table 1 (b) Linear axis (in case of metric thread for feed screw and inch input)

Increment system
IS-A IS-B IS-C IS-D IS-E
Least input 0.001 inch 0.001 inch 0.0001 inch 0.00001 0.000001
increment or *l or *l inch inch
0.0001 inch 0.00001
inch 0.0"0'001 o.o~t;ooo1
inch inch

Least command 0.01 mm 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm 0.00001 mm 0.000001 mm

increment

Interpolation 0.0005 0.00005 0.000005 0.0000005 0.00000005

unit 1 inches inches inches inches inches
Max. +39370.078
- k3937.0078 k393.70078 k393.700787 k39.3700787
programmable inches inches inches inches inches
dimension 3:
'2
Max. rapid 2400000 240000 100000 10000 1000 mm/min
traverse 3:
84 mm/min mm/min mm/min mm/min
Feedrate range 0.00001 - 0.00001 - 0.00001 - 0.00001 - 0.000001 -
'rc
'4 96000 9600 4000 400 40
inch/min inch/min inch/min inch/min inch/min
Incremental 0.001, 0.0001, 0.000001, 0.000001, 0.0000001,
feed -:i5 0.01, 0.1, 0.001, 0:0001, 0.00001, 0.000001,
1, 10, 100 0.01, 0.1, 0.001, 0.0001, 0.00001,
inch/step 1, 10 0.01, 0.1, 0.001, 0.0001,
inch/step 1 inch/step 0.01, 0.1 0.001, 0.01
inch/min inch/min
Tool O- O- o- O- O-
compensation k99.999 +99.9999 +99.99999 +999.999999 +99.9999999
inches inches inches inches inches
Backlash O- &9999 0 - +9999 0 - +9999 0 - +9999 0 - +9999
compensation *6 pulses pulses pulses pulses pulses
Dwell time *3 O- o- O- O- o-
99999.999 99999.999 999.99999 9999.99999 999.999999
set set set set set

- 262 -
 Table I (c) Linear axis (in case of inch thread for feed screw and inch input)

Increment system

IS-A IS-B IS-C IS-D IS-E

Least input 0.001 inch 0.001 inch 0.0001 inch 0.00001 0.000001
increment or '-:l t:
'1 inch inch
0.0001 inch o:~oool
inch 0.0"0'0001 0.0~~0001
inch inch

Least command 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm 0.00001 mm 0.000001 mm 0.0000001 mE

increment

Interpolation 0.0005 0.00005 0.000005 0.0000005 0.00000005

unit inches inches inches inches inches

Max. k99999.999 k9999.9999 IL999499999 k999.999999 rt99.9999999

programmable inches inches inches inches inches
dimension ii
'2

Max. rapid 240000 24000 10000 1000 100 inch/min

traverse ;:
'4 inch/min inch/min inch/min inch/min

Feedrate range 0.00001 - 0.00001 - 0.00001 - 0.000001 - 0.000001 -

9;4 240000 24000 10000 1000 100
inch/min inch/min inch/min inch/min inch/min

Incremental 0.001, 0.0001, 0.00001, 0.000001, 0.0000001,

feed *5 0.01, 0.1, 0.001, 0.0001, 0.00001, 0.000001,
1, 10, 100 0.01, 0.1, 0.001, 0.0001, 0.00001,
inch/step 1, 10 0.01, 0.1, 0.001, 0.0001,
inch/step 1 inch/step 0.01, 0.1 0.001, 0.01
inch/min inch/min

Tool o- o- o- o- O-
compensation $~6 zt99.999 +-99.9999 +99.99999 +999.999999 +999.999999
inches inches inches inches 9 inches

Backlash o- &9999 0 - +9999 0 - 29999 0 - +9999 0 - +9999

compensation pulses pulses pulses pulses pulses

Dwell time X'3 o- o- O- o- O-

,99999.999 9999.999 999.99999 9999.99999 999.999999
set set set set set

- 263 -
 Table 1 (d) Linear axis (in case of inch thread for feed screw and metric input)

Increment system

IS-A IS-B IS-C IS-D IS-E

Least input 0.01 mm 0.01 mm 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm 0.00001 mm
increment or -)';l or $Cl or or
0.001 mm 0.0001 mm 0.00001 mm 0.000001 mm
4
Least command 0.001 inch 0.0001 inch 0.00001 0.000001 0.0000001
increment inch inch inch

Interpolation 0.005 mm 0.0005 mm 0.00005 mm 0.000005 mm 0.0000005~

unit

Maxl k999999.99 k99999.999 +9999e9999 +9999e99999 +999e999999

programmable
dimension 3:
'2

Max. rapid 240000 24000 10000 1000 100

(
traverse 3:4 inch/min inch/min inch/min inch/min inch/min

Feedrate range OeOOOl - OeOOOl - OeOOOl - OeOOOOOl - OeOOOOOO1 -

9
X4 2400000 240000 100000 10000 1000 mm/min
mm/min mm/min mm/min mm/min

Incremental OeOl, 0.1, OeOOl, OeOOOl, 0.00001, OeOOOOOl,

feed $;5 1, 10, 100, OeOl, 0.1, OeOOl, ?.OOOl, OeOOOOl,
1000 1, 10, 100 OeOl, 0.1, 0eOO1, OeOOOl,
mm/step mm/step 1, 10 OeOl, 0.1, OeOOl,
mm/step 1eO mm/step OeOl, Oel
mm/step

Tool o- o- o- O- O-
compensation +999e99 mm +999e999 -+999*9999 +9999e99999 +999e999999

Backlash o- kg999 0 - +9999 0 - zt9999 0 - +99999 0 - +9999

compensation *6 pulses pulses pulses pulses pulses

Dwell time *3 o- o- o- o- O-
999999e99 99999 l999 9999 l 9999 .9999e99999 999e999999
set set set set set

- 264 -
 Table 1 (e) Rotary axis

Increment system

IS-A IS-B IS-C IS-D IS-E

Least input 0.01 deg 0.01 deg 0.001 deg 0.0001 deg 0.00001 deg
increment or I':1 or *1 or or
0.001 deg 0.0001 deg 0.00001 deg 0.000001
deg
Least command 0.01 deg 0.001 deg 0.0001 deg 0.00001 deg 0.000001
increment deg
Interpolation 0.005 deg 0.0005 deg 0.00005 deg 0.000005 0.0000005
unit deg deg
Max. k999999.99 k99999.999 L-9999.9999 k9999.99999 k999.999999
programmable deg deg deg deg deg
dimension X'2,

Max. rapid 2400000 240000 100000 10000 1000

traverse *4 deg/min deg/min deg/min deg/min deg/min

Feedrate range 0.0001 - 0.0001 - 0.0001 - 0.00001 - 0.000001 -

Jr
-4 2400000 240000 100000 10000 1000
deg/min deg/min deg/min deg/min deg/min

Incremental 0.01, 0.1, 0.001, 0.0001, 0.00001, 0.000001,

feed -:c5 1, 10, 100, 0.01, 0.1, 0.001, 0.0001, 0.00001,
1000 1, 10, 100 0.01, 0.1, 0.001, 0.0001,
degfstep deg/step 1, 10 0.01, 0.1, 0.001,
deg/step 1.0 0.01, 0.1
deg/step deg/step

Tool o- o- o- o- O-
compensation k999.99 +999.999 +999.9999 +9999.99999 +999.999999
deg deg deg deg deg
Backlash O- &9999 0 - +9999 0 - +9999 0 - +9999 0 - +9999
compensation *6 pulses pulses pulses pulses pulses

Dwell time *3 O- O- o- O- O-
999999.99 99999.999 9999.9999 9999.99999 999.999999
set set set set set

9~1 Selected by parameters for each axis.

Certain functions are not applicable for axes with different increment
systems (e.g. circular interpolation, tool nose radius compensation, etc.)
*2 When given commands for axes of different increment system in the same
block, limitations are set by the smallest value.
-:C3Will depend on the unit system of the axis on address X.
*4 The feed rate ranges shown above are limitations depending on CNC
interpolation capacity. When regarded as a whole system, limitations,
depending on the servo system, must also be considered.
;k5 In case of BMI interface, incremental feed amount can be specified by
setting amount (parameter setting.)
*6 The unit of backlash compensation is detection unit.

- 265 -
APPENDIX 2. FUNCTION AND TAPE FORMAT LIST

The symbols in the list represent the followings.

I? : x Y z A .b l

As seen above, the format consists of a combination of arbitrary axis addresses

am.?ng X, Y, 2, A, B, C, U, V, and W.

x : First basic axis (X usually)

Y : Second basic axis (Y usually)
z : Third basic axis (Z usually)
a : One of arbitrary addresses
0: One of arbitrary addresses
Xp: X axis or its parallel axis
Yp: Y axis or its parallel axis
zp: Z axis or its parallel axis

Functions Illustrations Tape format

Positioning
(GOO)
/p Goo(P -;
Start point

Linear
interpolation
(GOI) AP Gol[P-F-;
Start point
fi
start,
Circular
point Jfi(z y) ’ [zig} Xp_Yp_{:==-J_]L;
interpolation
(GO& G03) X9
I
End point GO2 R I
Go3 i GO31 XP_ZP- I T----K
_ _ IF_;
(x9 y)
R
GO2 R
2J F
i GO3 1 'p-'p- -;
I { J-K_ -. I
(In case of X-Y plane)
Dwell (G04) Per second dwell
G94 GO4 ; - ;
i i
Per revolutiondwell
G95 GO4 ; - ;
i 1

Exact stop (G09)

Speed
1 GO9 1;:; j .
9
1
i/-[//
L >
Time

Change of offset Geometry offset amount

value by program G10 LlO P X Z Y
R Q ;- - - -
(GlO)
Wearyffset amount
GlO Lll P X Z Y
R Q ;- - - -

Workyeropoint offset amount

GlO L12 P - P v ;

- 266 -
 Functions Illustrations Tape format

Tool nose
radius
compensation

Tool offset E? T ;

Setting of G52tP ;
local
coordinate Local coordinate

system

Command in G53lP ;
machine
coordinate
system (G53)

Selection
of work
(G54 _ G59)
coordinate
system
Work zero Machine
point coordinate
. Offset system

Inch/metric Inch input G20;

conversation Metric input G21;
(G20, G21)

Stored stroke (x, 0 G22X 2 I K ;

check G23; . - . . Cancel- -
(G22, G23)

Reference
point return
check (G27)
Start point

Reference G28 P ;
Reference point
point return
(G28)
Znd, 3rd, 4th
reference'
point return Intermediate
Start point
point
(G30)

- 267 -
 Functions Illustrations Tape format

Reference point
Return from
reference
point (G29)
Intermediate point

/-
Skip function
(G31) Start
_ point si-gnal

Thread cutting Even lead thread cutting

(G33) G33 IP F Q ;
Qi TEeadTuttzg start point
shift angle
Inch thread cutting
-u
F G33P E Q ;
E: Tzeadyperinch
Mirror
Programmable G51.18) ;
mirror image 1 k iA _ G50.1; .x Cancel .
(G50.1, G51.1)
P

Custom macro One-shot call

(G65, G66, G65 P <Argument assignment>;
G66.1, G67) P: Program No.
Modal call
<Argument assignment>;
G67; . . . Cancel

Canned cycles for See "Canned cycle for G80; oo Cancel

l

drilling (G80 - drilling." G83.1‘

G89) G84.1
G86.l.x y 2
G81 PrRF
- - - - L;-
0

Gi9 d
__
Absolute/ G90 ; Absolute
incremental G91 ; Incremental
programming G90 - G91 - ; Combined use
(G90/G91)

Change of work G92 ;

coordinate
(G92)

- 268 -
 Functions Illustrations Tape format

Per-minute feed mm/min, inch/min G94 F -;

/per-revolution mm/rev, inch/rev G95 F -;
feed (G94, G95)

G98
Initial point T I point G98 ;
return/R point G99 ;
return (G98, G99) G99
R point

2 point

Constant G96 S ;
r
surface speed G97; . -. . Cancel
control
(G96, G97)

Circular thread
cutting Xp _ Yp _ I _ J _ F _;

Xp _ Zp _ I _ K _ F _;

yp _ zp _ J _ K - F -;

Hypothetical axis G07cxO;

interpolation

Canned cycle Refer to item of N - G70 P - Q T ;

for turning "canned cycle for
(G70 - G79) turning".
U W D F
s - - - - -

G73P Q I K U W
D F s T;- -
- - V -

X~Z___l__wK-F~D-;

G76X Z I K D F
A_P_;-- - - -

G79 X 2 - K - F - ;

- 269 -
 Functions Illustrations Tape format

Variable lead
thread cutting G34 - F - K m ;
(G34)

Chamfering
corner R

Mirror image G68: Mirror image for double

for double - t 3 turret ON
turret G69: Mirror image cancel
(~68, G69) ,
I 9

Measuring position
Start reach signal
Automatic tool_
compensation
(G37.1 - G37.3)

amount

Balanced cutting G68: Balanced cutting mode

(G68, G69) G69: Balanced cutting mode cancel

- 270 -
APPENDIX 3. LIST OF TAPE CODE

IS0 code EIA code

I Meaning I
I T , I -7

'4 3 2 1 Character 8 7 6 5 4 321

I I II
0
1’1 I 1 Numc3x1 0
I I 1’1 I I Numt

] lolo["l
I I_* 101 I Numeral 9
v I 10 1 I I
A I!o, I0 0 a 00
B ! 10 0 0 b 00 O 0 ?
C 0 0, 0 ’
0,o c 000, O oo?
D 01 O 0 d 00
Oo
E 00 '0 oe 0 oio.
O 0 0
F 00 Ooo f 0 0 0
O 010
G 1 t-1
0 I I
Oooo 1-1-r-.
2
IJ
00 I” 010 0
H 10 0’11 h 00 o" ? Address H
I 00 o" oi oooo", ‘0 Address I
3 06 lo "1 0 j t 0 ,o “I I o ? Address J
K 0 0’1 oo k 0 0 O 0 Address K
L .o 0 0 O10 1 0 I” 00 Address L
M 1 0 Oo1
1 0 m I0 01 I-0 Address M
i
N I IoOl 0 O 010 n 0 i’io roi Address N

T I 0 01 lo! O 0 t Address T I lo’ O! lo 0

_u 0 o/ Oo 0 u Address U 0 0 yoi
V 0 01 O.o.0 V , or !O 0. o ? Address V
W 00 0 Ojooo w 0 Ooo Address W
X 00 OOOI X 00 Oooo Address X
Y 0 00” 0 y 000” ? Address Y
z 0 oo” 0 0 o” 0 Address Z
DEL 0,o 0 O/O O 0 0 0 Eel loo00 ' o o o . * Delete _- (cancel an error punch) .
d. Can not be used In
I III, 0 I IIlll IIIII v t section ixiEIA code.
BS 0 BS 01 o" 0 * Back space
HT 1: O o Tab o/o 0 O 0 0 * Tabulator
LF
_- or NL I! loo1 0 CR or EOB o ! lo End of block
I ’ ’ ’ ’ ‘- ’ -’ Carriage return
I
I
1 ’ :
.

w
I I I InI
I”!
loI
!
I I 1’ Space I ,*
I”! I I

% 10 0 Oo 0 ER o" 010 Absolute rewind stop

0
( j o” (2-4-S) ! 0 Control out (a comment is started)
1 o i:i to '1 o (2-4-7) o 1' 0" O o I Control in (the end of a comment)
* Positive sign
Negative sign
1 Colon
i Optional block skip
Period (A decimal point)
ik
$ G I 1 1 1 ,

,
',o!ol *! Ampersand
&t o(i ,o
101 f1 O
O.o/o
0,Ol 0 & : I0 1 *i Apostrophe
I 1 *I Asterisk
* lo! 10 'ol"l !o I ! j
3 loi 0 o”loI j , ]o(o’o!” /o/o *I Comma
I
3. 0 OOOO I0 0, ! 1 1x*1 Semicolon
<
I
0 0 I o!
I
O 01 1
I I * Left angle bracket
= 01 0 0 oi O 0’ 01 /JK I * Equal
> 0 ooo”oo 1 //I I! * Ri ht an le bracket
? 0.0-O O.0 0 01 1_v/ j 1 ( , , j ,*I Qu&tiongmark- ,
0’0 oi p-7 1 I ! I I I * Commercial at mark
0
0 0 * Quotation
00 ‘OOO ,oo * Left brace
,o o_ IO.0 O1ol o,/ 1 .I.. *I Right brace

- 271 -
Note 1) *: When read in the comment zone, the codes are read into memory.
When read in the significant data zone, the codes are ignored.
Note 2) ?: When read in the comment zone, the codes are read into memory.
When read in the significant data zone, an alarm is generated.
Note 3) When a custom macro option is used, the following codes car; also be used
in significant data zone.
+, [, ] ) =, #, *, in IS0 code.
+, a code set by parameter in EIA code.
Note 4) Codes not in this table are ignored if their parity is correct.
Note 5) Codes with incorrect parity cause the TH alarm. But they are ignored
without generating the TH alarm when they are in the comment zone.
Note 6) A character with all eight holes punched does not generate TH alarm even
in EIA code.

- 272 -
APPENDIX 4 EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

60 __ . 112
I 1

Fig. l(a) External view of 3-slot control unit

- 273 -
 s= l/l

93
4
rt‘

s= l/l

Fig. l(b) External view of 4-slot control unit

- 274 -
 L_
336
112 112
t
----I--- \ 1
-l

eD L

Fig. l(c) External view of 6-slot control unit

- 275 -
 112 112
I 4

7
w

I d I

u u u

Fig. l(d) External view of 8-slot control unit

- 276 -
 iB-M3 130 130 130
\I I I I

Panel cut drawinq

. I
;
22 ,I
2
85 (PDP)
220 (Monochrome CRT)

I
72

Fig. 2(a) External view of 9” CRT/MD1 unit, (Small type, monochrome CRT)
External view of 9” PDP/MDI unit, (Small type)

- 277 -
 M3 130 130 130
\r I I I I

1
rl
1 8

Panel cut drawinq

!2/
I
2
293
\.
@TP
&it support
(for reference)
.
l

An appropriate support ,
for the CRT unit should
be provided.

Fig. Z(b) External view of 9” small CRT/MD1 unit (color CRT)

05 (POP)
2
8-H 6 t 170 170 170 5 22 / 220 (monochrome CRT)

Fig. 2(c) External view of 9” CRT/MD1 unit (standard, monochrome CRT)

External view of 9” PDP/MDI unit (standard)

- 278 -
 Panel cut drawinq

22 293 \
..6
rf .
I
* ---j .
: _J

3
1 1;
.
LA +i .

i t
An appropriate support
for the CRT unit should
be provided.

Fig. 2(d) External view of 9” CRT/MD1 unit (standard, color)

-1 I 1
8+4
./ 620
170 170 170 3 Panel cut drawinq
-5
1
I
I
I
4 4

L 1

cl 0000
- 000000
0000000
clt- 0000000
0000000
0000000
cl
0.

nnnnnnn

[ 000000000000 ]

Fig. 2(e) IO” LCD/MD1 unit (horizontal type)

10” PDP/MDI unit (horizontal type)

- 279 -
 6 -1

\-

Panel cut drawinq

Fig. 2(f) IO” LCD/MD1 unit (vertical)

30” PDP/MDI unit (vertical)

lo-M4 Panel cut drawinq

2.6
c
A 372
1

VI.. VcrllilalionUrllf support

lzJ
Oporling

(for rufmmc0)
An appropriate support
for the CRT unit should
be provided.

Fig. 2(g) 14” CRT/MD1 unit (horizontal)

- 280 -
193 193 7 VIEW FROM REAR SIDE

Panel cut drawinq

Fig. 2(h) 14” CRT/MD1 unit (vertical)

A02B-0120~CO72#0 0

- 281 -
 +_.
244
L_ 260 _, 4-M3

Panel cut drawinq

85 (PDP)
220 (monochrome CRT)

Fig. 2(i) 9” separate type CRT unit (monochrome CRT)

9” separate type PDP unit

- 282 -
 Panel cut drawing

260 2
4+4 6 260
22.f 288

Fig. 2(j) 9” separate type CRT unit (color)

- 283 -
 260
260
I2
1 IO 21
1’\ f
r
-t-f- I 1 244

Panel cut drawinq

Fig. 2(k) Separate type MD1 unit (standard)

- 284 -
 INDEX

<I>
l-block plural M command . ... . .. .. . .. ... .. .. . . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. ... . 73

<2>
2nd, 3rd and 4th reference point return (G30) ... .. . . . .. . . . .. ... . ... .. .. . . ... .. . 56

<3>
3Tinterface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..~......... 191

<6>
6Tinterface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

<A>
Abnormal load detection ... ... . .. .. . ... .. .. .. . . . . .. . . .. .. ... . ... . . .. ... . 183

Absolute and incremental programming (G90, G91) .............................. 62

Acceleration/deceleration before cutting feed interpolation ......................... 50

Acceleration/deceleration function for the constant speed specified by the PMC axis
control function ....................................................... 53

Accuracy compensation function .......................................... 110

Activation of automatic operation .......................................... 135

Actual spindle speed output ............................................... 65

Additional optional block skip .............................................. 78

Alarmsignal ......................................................... 184

All axes interlock ..................................................... 179

All axes machine lock ................................. : ................ 144

Animation drawing function .............................................. 256

Autocoilisionavoidance(15TTFBonly) ..................................... 257

Automatic acceleration/deceleration ......................................... 50

Automatic corner override (G62) ........................................... 54

Automatic operation ................................................... 135

Automatic operation all axes ............................................. 179

Automatic operation signal ............................................... 184

Automatic operation start lamp signal ....................................... 184

Automatic operation stop ................................................ 136

Automatic process decision function ........................................ 258

Automatic programming function (15-TF, 15-TTF) .............................. 205

Automatic reference point return (G28, G29) ................................... 55

i-l
Automatic setting of cutting conditions ...................................... 255

Automatic tool offset (G37.1, G37.2, G37.3) .................................. 114

Automatic/manual simultaneous operation .................................... 140

Auxiliary function lock .................................................. 144

Axes control ......................................................... 129

AXis control with PMC .................................................. 132

Axis move direction signal ............................................... 185

<B>
Background editing .................................................... 167

Backlash compensation ................................................. 111

Balance cut (G68, G69) ................................................ 201

Balance cut fapt function (15TTFB only) .................................... 257

Basic address and command value range . . .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . .. . .. .. .. . . .. . .. . .. . 77

Basic controlled axes . .. .. ... .. ... .. .. . .. .. .. . .. . . . . . .. .. .. .. . . .. . . .. . .. 27

Basic machine interface (BMI) ............................................ 191

Basic simultaneously controllable axes ....................................... 27

Batch input function for chamfering or corner rounding . l . . 256

Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation .................. 52

Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration after rapid traverse interpolation ................. 52

Blankfigure ......................................................... 254

Block start interlock . . .. .. ..: . . .. . . .. . .. ... .. . . .. . . . . . ... . .. . .. . .. . .. . . 179

Buffer register ....................................................... 136

<c>

C-axis control switching (only for 15-TTEWTFB) ................................ 69

C-axisfapt .......................................................... 258

Canned cycle for turning ................................................. 79

Canned cycles for drilling (G83.1, G84.1, G86.1, G80 - G89, G98, G99) ............... 91

Chamfering and corner R ................................................ 97

Changing of tool offset (programmable data input) (Gl 0) ......................... 109

Chuck/tail stock barrier ................................................. 181

Circular interpolation (G02, G03) ........................................... 35

Circular interpolation by radius programming ................................... 98

Circular thread cutting (G35, G36) .......................................... 45

Clock function ....................................................... 157

Constant surface speed control (G96, G97) . ... . .. .. . .. l . . .. . .. .. .. . . . .. . .. . .. 64

i-2
Constant surface speed control signal ...................................... 185

Continuous thread cutting ................................................ 45

Control axis detach .................................................... 130

Control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..~................................... 198

Control-in/control-out .................................................... 78

Controllable axes expansion .............................................. 27

Controlled axes ........................................................ 27

Coordinate systems .................................................... 59

Coordinate value and dimension ........................................... 62

Count input of offset values .............................................. 117

CRT screen saving function .............................................. 165

CRT/MD1 and external position display .. ... .. . .. . . . . .. . ... . . .. . .. . . .. .. .. ... 145

CRT/MD1 panel I ..................................................... 145

Cs contour control ..................................................... 68

Custom macro ....................................................... 118

Cutting block start interlock .............................................. 180

Cutting cycle A (G77) (with G code system A: G90) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Cutting feed rate ... ..... . ... ... . ... ... .. . . . .. .. . ... . . .. . . .. . .. .. .. .. .. 47

Cutting feed rate clamp .................................................. 47

Cutting mode (G64) .................................................... 54

Cutting/rapid traverse position check function .................................. 54

Cycle start .......................................................... 135

Cylindrical interpolation (G07.1) ............................................ 38

<D>
Data input/output ... ..... .. ... .. .. .... .. . . .. . . . .. . .. . . .. . .. .. . . .. ... .. 174

Data protection key .................................................... 161

Decimal point input/pocket calculator type decimal point input ....................... 63

Definition of machining processes ......................................... 254

Designation of material and part ........................................... 216

DI status output signal .................................................. 185

Diagnosis functions .................................................... 171

Diameter and radius programming .......................................... 63

Digital adjustment of origin deceleration limit ................................... 57

Direct drawing dimensions programming ...................................... 99

Direct input of offset value measured ....................................... 115

Directory display and punching on each group ................................. 162

i-3
Directory display of floppy cassette/program file ............................... 161

Display ............................................................ 152

Displaying data related to coordinates ....................................... 166

Displaying internal position compensation data ............... : ................ 166

Distribution end signal .................................................. 184

Dog-less reference point setting ............................................. 58

Door interlock ....................................................... 180

Drawing input method/list input method ...................................... 254

Dry run ............................................................ 144

Dwell(G04) .......................................................... 54

<E>
Emergency stop ...................................................... 177

Environmental conditions ................................................ 198

Equal lead thread cutting (G33) (with G code system A: G32) ....................... 44

Exact stop (G09) ...................................................... 54

Exact stop mode (G61) .................................................. 54

Execution of automatic operation .......................................... 136

Expanded part program editing ........................................... 167

Extended tool compensation ............................................. 107

External alarm message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

External custom macro variable value input .. . .. .. .. . . . . .. . .. . . .. . . .. . .. . .. .. . 187

External custom macro variable value output . . ... . .. . . .. . . . .. . . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . 188

External data input/output ............................................... 186

External deceleration ................................................... 180

External dimensions ................................................... 273

External l/O device control ............................................... 170

External machine coordinate system compensation ............................. 187

External machine coordinate system compensation amount output . . .. . . .. . .. . .. .. . . 188

External operator’s message .............................................. 187

External program number output .......................................... 188

External program number search . . . . . . . . . os . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

External sequence number output . ... . . ... .. . .. .. . . . . . .. . . .. .. . . . .. .. . .. . . 188

External sequence number search ......................................... 186

External tool compensation .............................................. 186

External tool offset amount output ......................................... 188

External work coordinate system shift ....................................... 187

External work coordinate system shift amount output ............................ 188

External work number search ............................................. 189

<F>
Failure diagnosis guidance ............................................... 171

Family program ...................................................... 256

FANUC Handy File .................................................... 176

FANUC PROGRAM FILE mate ........................................... 175

Feed forward control .................................................... 128

Feed forward during rapid traverse ......................................... 128

Feed functions . .. . 47

Feed hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Feed hold signal .. .. ... .. .. .. ... . ... .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. . .. .. . .. . .. ,. . .. .. 184

t-eea rate overriae . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Feed stop .......................................................... 130

Finishing cycle (G70) ................................................... 85

Floating reference point return (G30.1) ....................................... 56

Following up function .................................................. 129

Following-up for each axis ................................................ 129

Foreground editing .................................................... 167

Function and tape format list ............................................. 266

Function for displaying multiple subscreens ................................... 163

Function for overriding the rapid traverse feedrate in 1% units ...................... 49

Function for switching between diameters and radius programming ................... 63

Function selection with hard keys .......................................... 170

Functions for 4-axis lathes (15-TTB, 15TTFB) ................................ 201

Functions for high speed cutting .......................................... 127

Functions to simplify programming .......................................... 79

<G>
Graphic display function .. .. . .. .... .. ... .. .. . .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. . . .. .. . ... .. 159

Grooving in X-axis (G75) . .. . ... ... ... .. .. .. .. . . . .. .. . .. . . .. . .. .. .. . . ... . 87

<H>
Handle interruption .................................................... 140

Hardware specifications ................................................ 195

Help function ........................................................ 164

High-speed M/S/T/B interface .. . ... .... ... .. . . .. . . .. . .. . .. . .. . . ... . . ... .. 72

i-5
High-speed machining (G10.3, Gll.3, G65.3) ................................. 127

High-speed measuring position reach signal input .............................. II5

High-speed part program registration function ................................. 170

High-speed skip signal input ............................................. II3

Home position and index position .......................................... 227

Hybrid control ....................................................... 133

Hypothetical axis interpolation (G07) ........................................ . 36

<I>
Inch input signal . . . .. .. .. ... .. ... . .. . . .. . .. .. . .. . . .. . . . . ... . .. .. . .. . . . 185

Inch thread cutting (G33) (with G code system A: G32) . .. .. . . . . . .. .. .. . .. . .. . .. . . 44

Inch/metric conversion (G20, G2I) . ... . .. . . . .. . .. .. . .. . . . . .. .. . .. .. . .. . .. . . . 63

Inclination compensation ................................................ III

Increment system ..................................................... . 27

Incremental feed ....................................................... I41

Inposition signal ...................................................... 184

Input device ......................................................... I75

Input/output of family program ............................................ 237

Interference check function .............................................. 201

Interlock ........................................................... 179

Interlock per axis ..................................................... 179

Interpolation functions .................................................. 34

Interpolation pitch error compensation ...................................... 110

Interruption type custom macro ........................................... 126

Involute interpolation ................................................... 41

<K>
Key and program encryption ............................................. 126

Key input from PMC ................................................... 194

<L>
Label skip .......................................................... . 78

Language selection A/B ................................................. 156

Linear acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation . . . . . . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. .. 51

Linear interpolation (GOI) ................................................ 34

List of specifications ..................................................... 4

List of tape code ..................................................... 271

Load meter display .................................................... 157

i-6
Local coordinate system (G52) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

<M>
Machine coordinate system (G53) .......................................... 59

Machine interface .................................................. 191, 199

Machine lock on each axis .............................................. 144

Machining definition ................................................... 228

Machining time display ................................................. 255

Machining time stamp function ............................................ 161

Macro compiler/executor ................................................ 190

Magnifying and reducing drawing .......................................... 256

Main program ......................................................... 76

Man machine control (MMC) ............................................... 195

Manual absolute on/off ................................................. 143

Manual data input (MDI) .. .. ... . .. ... ... . .. .. . . . .. . .. .. .. . . . .. . .. . . ... .. 152

Manualfeed ......................................................... 141

Manual handle feed (1st) ................................................ 142

Manual handle feed (2nd 3rd) ............................................ 142

Manual interruption during automatic operation ................................ 140

Manual numerical command ............................................. 142

Manual operation ..................................................... 141

Manual per-rotation feed ................................................ 142

Manual reference point return ............................................. 55

Material data ..................................................... 240, 256

Maximum command value ................................................ 28

MDIkey ............................................................ 209

MDI operation ....................................................... 135

Measurement functions ................................................. 113

Mechanical handle feed ................................................. 129

Memory operation ..................................................... 135

Menu switch ........................................................ 158

Mirror image ................... ..................................... 129

Mirror image for double turrets (G68, G69 > . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Miscellaneous functions ........... ... .. .. . .. . . .. . .. .. . . .. .. .. . ... .. .. .. . 72

MMWCNC window ............... ..................................... 196

MMC/PMCwindow .................................................... 197

Movesignal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..g........................... 184

i-7
 Multi-buffer (G05.1) ................................................... 127

Multi-edit function ..................................................... 170

Multiple repetitive cycles for turning (G70 - G76) ............................... 81

<N>
Nameofaxes ........................................................ 27

NC data checking (animated drawing function) ................................ 236

NC format guidance .................................................... 159

NC format guidance with figure ........................................... 160

NC functions ......................................................... 25

NC ready signal ...................................................... 184

NCwindow ......................................................... 194

NCwindow B ........................................................ 194

Number of common variables ............................................ 125

; Number of registered programs ........................................... 168

Number of tool offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . o. . . . . . . . . . 109

<o>

Operation functions .................................................... 254

Operation history ..................................................... 164

Operation mode ...................................................... 135

Operation procedure ................................................... 213

Operator’s panel of symbolic FAPT turn ..................................... 209

Optional block skip .................................................... . 78

Output and setting of PMC parameters ...................................... 194

vvernae . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Override cancel ....................................................... 50

Overtravel .......................................................... 177

Overtravel functions ................................................... 177

<P>
Parameter setting (RS-232-C) screen ....................................... 164

Part program storage and editing .......................................... 167

Part program storage length ............................................. 168

Parts figure input example ............................................... 244

Pattern repeating (G73) .................................................. 85

Peck drilling in Z-axis (G74) ............................................... 86

Per minute feed (G94) (With G code system A: G98) ............................. 48

i-8
Per revolution feed (G95) (With G code system A: G99) .......................... 48

Playback ........................................................... 169

PMC instruction ...................................................... 192

Polar coordinate interpolation (G12.1, G 13.1) .................................. 39

Polygonal turning (G51.2) ............................................... 131

Portable tape reader ................................................... 175

Position coder ........................................................ 200

Position switching function ............................................... 189

Positioning (GOO) ..................................................... 34

Positioning detector ................................................... 198

Power supply ........................................................ 198

Preparation of NC data ................................................. 233

Preparatory functions ................................................... 29

Process edit function (15TTFB only) ....................................... 256

Program configuration . .... . . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. .. . . . .. .. . . . ... .. 75

Program end (M02, M30) ............................................... 136

Program name ........................................................ 75

Program name (48 characters) ............................................. 75

Program number ...................................................... 75

Program number search ................................................ 135

Program restart ...................................................... 136

Program restart function and output of M, S, T and B codes ....................... 137

Program search using the program name .................................... 135

Program stop(MOO,MOl) ............................................... 136

Program test functions ................................................. 144

-
rrogrammable machine controller (PMC-N) ................................... 192

Programmable mirror image (G50.1, G5l .l) .................................. 98

Programmable parameter entry (Gl 0, Gl I) ................................... 112

Programming start . ... ... .. . .. ... .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. . . ... .. .. . . .. . . .. .. . 215

<R>
Range of command value ............................................... 261

Rapid traverse ....................................................... 47

Rapid traverse override ................................................. 49

Rapid traversing signal ................................................. 185

Read/punch function for custom macro common variables ........................ 125

Reader/puncher interface ............................................... 175

i-9
Reference point . . . . . .. . .. .. ... .. 55

Reference point return check (G27) . .. . .. . . . .. .. .. .. .. . .. . . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . 56

Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Reset signal ......................................................... 184

Restart of automatic operation ............................................ 136

Restart of block ...................................................... 137

Rewind ............................................................ 135

Rewinding signal ..................................................... 184

Rigid tap (G84.2, G84.3) ................................................. 95

Roll-over function for a rotation axis ........................................ 134

Run hour and parts number display ........................................ 157

Run hourdisplay ..................................................... 163

cs>
Scodeoutput ........................................................ 64

Safety functions ...................................................... 177

Second auxiliary functions ................................................ 72

Second feed rate override ................................................ 49

Second feedrate override B ............................................... 49

Selection of execution programs .. . .. .. . . . .. .. .. .. . .. . .. . . . .. . . .. . . . .. . . .. 135

Selection of jobs by soft keys ............................................ 212

Self diagnosis functions ................................................. 171

Sequence number . . . .. .. . ... .. .. . .. . . .. . ... . .. .. . . .. .. . . .. . . . . .. .. . . . 76

Sequence number comparison and stop ..................................... 136

Sequence number search ............................................... 135

Servo ............................................................. 198

Servooff ........................................................... 129

Servo ready signal .................................................... 184

Setting and displaying data .............................................. 238

Setting data ......................................................... 242

Simple conversational automatic programming function .......................... 160

Simultaneously controllable axes expansion .................................. 27

Single block ......................................................... 144

Skip function (G31) .................................................... 113

Skipping the commands for several axes .................................... 113

Soft key ............................................................ 209

Software operator’s panel ............................................... 158

i-10
Software specifications .. ... .. .. .. . .. ... ... .. .. . . .. . .. .. .. . .. . . .. . . .. ... 196

Spindle ............................................................ 199

Spindle functions ...................................................... 64

Spindle orientation (with position coder) ...................................... 68

Spindle output switching ................................................. 68

Spindle positioning ..................................................... 65

Spindle speed analog output .............................................. 64

Spindle speed binary code output (at only F56 interface) .......................... 64

Spindle speed clamp (G92) ............................................... 64

Spindle speed fluctuation detection (G25, G26) ................................. 65

Spindle speed output ................................................... 67

Spindle synchronization .................................................. 69

Spline interpolation ...................................................... 42

Status output ................................................ .' ....... 184

Stock removal in facing (G72) ............................................. 84

Stock removal in turning (G71) ............................................ 81

Stored pitch error compensation .......................................... 110

Stored stroke check I .................................................. 177

Stored stroke check 2,3 ... ... . ... .. .. ... ... . .. . .. . . . ... . .. .. . .. . . . ... .. 178

Straightness compensation .............................................. 112

Stroke check before move ............................................... 178

Subcycle .......................................................... 258

Subprograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Sub-memory ........................................................ 255

Sumbmemory ....................................................... 243

Symbolic fapt programming .............................................. 213

Symbolic fapt turn specifications list ........................................ 254

Symbolic keys ....................................................... 254

Synchronous control ................................................... 133

Synchronous/independent switching function .................................. 130

System parameter .................................................... 241

<T>
Tcodeoutput ........................................................ 70

Tangential speed constant control .......................................... 47

Tapecodes .......................................................... 76

Tape function ......................................................... 78

i-11
Tapeoperation ....................................................... 135

Tape reader ......................................................... 174

Tape reader withreels . . ,. . ... ... .. .. . . . ... . ... . . . .. . . .. .. .. . . .. .. . . .. . 174

Tape reader without reels .. .. ... .. . . .. . . .. .. ... . . . .. . . . .. .. .. . . .. .. . . .. . 174

Tapping signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

The second cylindrical pitch error compensation method .. . . . . .. . .. .. . .. . .. . .. . .. 110

Thread cutting ........................................................ 44

Thread cutting cycle (G76) ............................................... 87

Thread cutting cycle (G78) (with G code system A: G92) . . . .. . . . .. . ... . . .. .. . . .. .. 80

Thread cutting cycle retract .. ... .. . .. . .. . . ... .. .. . . . . . .. .. . .. .. . . .. . .. .. .. 46

Thread cutting signal . . . . .. ... ... . . .. . . .. .. .. .. . .. . . . . .. . .. .. . .. .. . . .. .. 185

Three-dimensional coordinate conversion .. . .. .. .. .. -. . . . . . .. . l . l . .. . .. . . .. .. 102

Tool compensation function .............................................. 103

Tool compensation value measure value direct input B ........................... 115

Tool data ........................................................... 238

Tool data and tooling data files ........................................... 255

Tool functions ........................................................ 70

Tool life management ................................................... 70

Tool nose radius compensation (G40, G41, G42) .............................. 104

Tool offset .......................................................... 103

Tool offset amount memory .............................................. 107

Tool retrace & recover ................................................. 137

Tooling information .................................................... 239

Turning cycle in facing (G79) (with G code system A: G94) ........................ 80

Turret axis control ..................................................... 71

<v>
Variable lead thread cutting (G34) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D. o . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . 45

cw>
Waveform diagnosis functions ............................................ 165

Work coordinate system (G54 to G59) ....................................... 59

Work coordinate system change (G92) (with G code system A: G50) ................. 60

Work coordinate system preset (G92.1) (with G code system A: G50.3) ............... 61

Work origin offset value change (programmable data input) (G10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . 61

CY>
Y-axisfaot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..ae l .-....................... 258

i-12
· No part of this manual may be
reproduced in any form.

· All specifications and designs

are subject to change without
notice.